Transact Technologies Itherm 280 Users Manual 28 07765C M280i Programmers Guide

2015-02-02

: Transact-Technologies Transact-Technologies-Itherm-280-Users-Manual-487071 transact-technologies-itherm-280-users-manual-487071 transact-technologies pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 349

DownloadTransact-Technologies Transact-Technologies-Itherm-280-Users-Manual- 28-07765C M280i Programmers Guide  Transact-technologies-itherm-280-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
®

iTherm 280
International Version

Programmer’s Guide

PN 28-07764, Rev C April 2009

This page intentionally left blank

Change History
Rev A Initial Release
Rev B
Added Periodic status back
Added user defined code page description.
Added double byte code page support
Rev C
Revised Page mode section
Added several internal code pages
Added Multi-byte Code page support

28-07764

Rev C

Sept 2007

April 2009

Page 1

Federal Communications Commission Radio
Frequency
Interference Statement
®

The iTherm 280 Printer complies with the limits for a Class A computing device in
accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These regulations are
designed to minimize radio frequency interference during installation; however, there is
no guarantee that radio or television interference will not occur during any particular
installation. Interference can be determined by turning the equipment off and on while
the radio or television is on. If the printer causes interference to radio or television
reception, try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1. Reorient the radio or television receiving antenna
2. Relocate the printer with respect to the receiver
3. Plug the printer and receiver into different circuits
If necessary, the user should consult their dealer or an experienced radio/television
technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared
by the Federal Communications Commission helpful: How to Identify and Resolve
Radio/TV Interference Problems. This booklet is available from the US Government
Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Ask for stock number 004-000-00345-4.

Canadian Department of Communications Radio
Interference
Statement
®

The iTherm 280 Printer does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emissions from
digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.

Regulatory Compliance
FCC Class A
ULc
CE Mark
UL 1950
TUV

Page 2

Rev C

28-07764

Disclaimer
NOTICE TO ALL PERSONS RECEIVING THIS DOCUMENT:
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this
document may be reproduced, stored or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of
TransAct Technologies, Inc. ("TransAct"). This document is the property of and contains
information that is both confidential and proprietary to TransAct. Recipient shall not
disclose any portion of this document to any third party.
TRANSACT DOES NOT ASSUME ANY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES INCURRED,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS OR
DISCREPANCIES IN THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT.
TransAct cannot guarantee that changes in software and equipment made by other
manufacturers, and referred to in this publication, do not affect the applicability of
information in this publication.

Copyright
© 2007-2009 TransAct Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
Revision Level C
April 2009
Printed in USA

Trademarks
Some of the product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only
and may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
BANKjet, 50Plus, Insta-Load, Ithaca, "Made to Order. Built to Last", Magnetec, PcOS,
POSjet, PowerPocket, iTherm and TransAct are registered trademarks and Epic 950,
Flex-Zone, imPort, ithaColor, KITCHENjet, Momentum, QDT and TicketBurst are
trademarks of TransAct Technologies, Inc.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 3

Table of Contents
Change History ............................................................................................................... 1
Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement ........... 2
Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Statement ....................... 2
Regulatory Compliance ................................................................................................... 2
Disclaimer ....................................................................................................................... 3
Copyright ........................................................................................................................ 3
Trademarks..................................................................................................................... 3
Table of Contents............................................................................................................ 4
Figures............................................................................................................................ 9
Tables ............................................................................................................................. 9
®

Introducing your iTherm 280 Printer ........... 11

About your iTherm® 280 Printer..................................................................................... 13
Who Should Read This Guide? ..................................................................................... 14
What Is Included in This Guide? ................................................................................... 14
Warranty Options .......................................................................................................... 14
Technical and Sales support ......................................................................................... 15
On-line Technical Support ..................................................................................... 15
Telephone Technical Support ................................................................................ 15
Return Materials Authorization and Return Policies ............................................... 16
Service Programs .................................................................................................. 16
Sales Support........................................................................................................ 16
Contact Information ............................................................................................... 16
®

iTherm 280 Specifications and Requirements
...................................................................... 19
iTherm® 280 Specifications and Requirements ............................................................. 21
iTherm® 280 Thermal Printer Models ........................................................................... 21
Standard Features ........................................................................................................ 21
Optional Features ......................................................................................................... 23
General Specifications .................................................................................................. 24
Printing Specifications ........................................................................................... 24
Physical Characteristics ................................................................................................ 24
Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 24
Weight ................................................................................................................... 25
Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................................... 26
Internal AC Powered ............................................................................................. 26
External Powered DC ............................................................................................ 26
Thermal Print Head ....................................................................................................... 26
Media Specifications ..................................................................................................... 27
Receipt Paper ....................................................................................................... 27
Buzzer .......................................................................................................................... 29
Cover Interlock .............................................................................................................. 29
Display Pass Through ................................................................................................... 29
Communications Interface............................................................................................. 30
Parallel Interface ................................................................................................... 30
RS-232 Serial Interface ......................................................................................... 31
USB Interface ........................................................................................................ 31

Page 4

Rev C

28-07764

Ethernet 10-Base-T adapter .................................................................................. 32
802.11b Wireless Interface .................................................................................... 32
Cash Drawer ......................................................................................................... 33
Interface Description ............................................................................................. 33
Cash Drawer Pin Assignments .............................................................................. 33
Vertical Wall Mount Kit Option....................................................................................... 35

Setup Procedures .......................................... 37
Verifying the Configuration ............................................................................................ 39
Verify the Communications Interface Card ............................................................ 39
Changing Interface Cards...................................................................................... 39
Removing the Old Interface Card .......................................................................... 39
Cash Drawer Configuration ................................................................................... 40
Configuring the Cash Drawer Interface.................................................................. 40
Installing Cables............................................................................................................ 41
Connecting power ................................................................................................. 41
Connecting Communications Cables ..................................................................... 42
Verify the Firmware Configuration ......................................................................... 43
Installing Paper ............................................................................................................. 43
Printer Drivers and Printer Controls............................................................................... 44
Definitions for terms you will see in this guide: ...................................................... 44
Getting Started – Questions to Ask ............................................................................... 45
Do you want to use USB and simulate a communication port? .............................. 45
Do you want to use an Ethernet interface and simulate a communication port? .... 45
Are you using OPOS (UnifiedPOS/UPOS)? .......................................................... 46
Do you want to print from a Windows application? ................................................ 46
Windows Printer Driver ................................................................................................. 47
PC Hardware ................................................................................................................ 47
GDI ............................................................................................................................... 47
OPOS driver ................................................................................................................. 48
PC Hardware ................................................................................................................ 48
USB driver .................................................................................................................... 49
Ethernet Virtual Serial driver ......................................................................................... 50
POSPrinter ActiveX Control (POSPrinter OCX)............................................................. 51
PC Hardware ................................................................................................................ 51
Where to get more information .............................................................................. 52
®

How to Operate the iTherm 280 Printer ....... 53
How to Operate the iTherm® 280 Printer ....................................................................... 55
* Button........................................................................................................................ 55
FEED Button ................................................................................................................. 55
Indicator Lights (LED) ................................................................................................... 56
Power Indicator (LED) ........................................................................................... 56
Error Indicator (LED) ............................................................................................. 56
Paper Indicator (LED)............................................................................................ 56
Fault Indicators ............................................................................................................. 56
Testing the Printer Overview ......................................................................................... 58
Using Self-Test, Configuration, and Hex Dump Mode ........................................... 58
Hex-dump Mode.................................................................................................... 60
Level 0 Diagnostics ............................................................................................... 61
Boot Loader Mode ................................................................................................. 61

28-07764

Rev C

Page 5

Configuring Your iTherm® 280 Printer ........... 63
Configuration Mode Overview ....................................................................................... 65
Most Frequent Configuration Incompatibilities ....................................................... 65
How to Change Configuration Settings ......................................................................... 65
Entering into Configuration Mode .......................................................................... 65
Using Configuration Mode............................................................................................. 66
Remote Configuration ................................................................................................... 69
Setting up for Color Paper............................................................................................. 69
Custom Color ........................................................................................................ 69

Programming Codes ...................................... 71
Control Codes Overview ............................................................................................... 73
Nomenclature................................................................................................................ 73
Standard Emulation ............................................................................................... 74
IPCL Codes ........................................................................................................... 74
EPOS Emulation ................................................................................................... 74
Axiohm .................................................................................................................. 74
Ithaca® Microline Emulation ................................................................................... 74
Application Development .............................................................................................. 74
Ithaca Control Codes and Commands .......................................................................... 75
PcOS Printer Control Codes.................................................................................. 75
Quick PcOS Reference Chart ................................................................................ 76
Low Level Paper Motion Control............................................................................ 82
Horizontal Motion Control ...................................................................................... 83
Vertical Motion Control .......................................................................................... 85
Feed to Black Dot .................................................................................................. 91
Character Pitch ..................................................................................................... 93
Character Font ...................................................................................................... 96
Character Sets and Code Pages ........................................................................... 98
Double-Byte and Multi-Byte Code Page Description Files ................................... 100
Code page selection............................................................................................ 100
Page Mode .......................................................................................................... 113
Graphic Mode...................................................................................................... 123
Graphics Compression ........................................................................................ 129
User Store (Graphic Save) .................................................................................. 129
User Macros ........................................................................................................ 137
Bar Codes ........................................................................................................... 139
Electronic Journal................................................................................................ 149
Miscellaneous Control ......................................................................................... 161
Remote Power Control ........................................................................................ 169
Documented Extended Control commands ......................................................... 170
Printer Status ...................................................................................................... 171
Inquire Commands .............................................................................................. 172
ESC/POSTM Codes ..................................................................................................... 181
Differences between Epson TM T90 and iTherm® 280 ........................................ 181
Supported TM-T88 Commands ................................................................................... 183
Undocumented TM-T88 Commands ........................................................................... 186
Supported TM-T90 Commands ................................................................................... 187
TM-T88 / TM-T90 and ESC/POSTM Command Descriptions ....................................... 191
Print and Feed Commands ......................................................................................... 191
Line Spacing Commands ............................................................................................ 193
Page 6

Rev C

28-07764

Character Commands ................................................................................................. 193
Panel Button Commands ............................................................................................ 202
Paper Sensor Commands ........................................................................................... 203
Print Position Commands............................................................................................ 205
Bit-Image Commands ................................................................................................. 209
Status Commands ...................................................................................................... 210
Printing Paper Command ............................................................................................ 216
Page Mode ................................................................................................................. 217
Bar Code Commands.................................................................................................. 220
Mechanism Control Commands .................................................................................. 223
Miscellaneous Commands .......................................................................................... 224
Macro Function Commands ........................................................................................ 230
User-defined Images and Graphics Commands .......................................................... 231
Ithaca® Specific iTherm® 280 Commands ................................................................... 236
Panel Button Commands..................................................................................... 236
Paper Out/Low Sensor Commands ..................................................................... 236
iTherm® Citizen Emulation .......................................................................................... 238
iTherm® Star Emulation ............................................................................................... 238
iTherm® Axiohm Emulation ......................................................................................... 238
®

iTherm 280 Color Graphics ......................... 239
Printing Graphics ........................................................................................................ 241
Character Graphics ............................................................................................. 241
APA Graphics...................................................................................................... 244
iTherm® 280 Universal Color Graphics ........................................................................ 247
Print File Graphics ............................................................................................... 248
Store Graphics in the printer: ............................................................................... 249
How universal graphics is done ........................................................................... 250
How to use IPCL commands in text strings ......................................................... 250
Cautions .............................................................................................................. 251
Universal Color Command Descriptions .............................................................. 252
iTherm® 280 Coupon-Cut-Logo Feature ...................................................................... 254

Unicode and Fonts ....................................... 255
Unicode and Fonts ....................................... 257
Fonts........................................................................................................................... 257
Character Generation .......................................................................................... 257
Character Definition............................................................................................. 258
Internal Fonts ...................................................................................................... 260
Character Cache ................................................................................................. 260
Custom Fonts ...................................................................................................... 261
Stacked or Linked fonts ....................................................................................... 261
Font Storage ....................................................................................................... 261
Unicode....................................................................................................................... 262
Unicode Encoding ............................................................................................... 262
Bitmap Fonts ....................................................................................................... 265
File system and the POR.INI file ................................................................................. 268
Font Size and Spacing ................................................................................................ 273
Font Size and Spacing command interactions ..................................................... 274
Legacy Printer Features that Have Changed .............................................................. 280
Dynamic code page definition.............................................................................. 280

28-07764

Rev C

Page 7

File System .................................................. 281
File System Interface .................................................................................................. 283
File System commands ....................................................................................... 283
®

iTherm 280 Extended Printer Control ......... 289
Communications .......................................... 297
Protocol and Print Buffers ........................................................................................... 299
USB ............................................................................................................................ 302
USB Support ....................................................................................................... 302
TCP/IP ........................................................................................................................ 303
Print Server Features Standard Ethernet Connection .......................................... 303
Supported Protocols ............................................................................................ 303
User Interface/Configuration ................................................................................ 303
Other ................................................................................................................... 303
Parallel Port ................................................................................................................ 304
Parallel Port Protocol........................................................................................... 304
Printer Buffer Size ............................................................................................... 305
Parallel Port Inquire and IEEE 1284 .................................................................... 305
Parallel Port Plug and Play .................................................................................. 307
Serial Port ................................................................................................................... 309
Serial Port Protocol ............................................................................................. 309
Print Buffer Flow.................................................................................................. 311
Printer Buffer Size ............................................................................................... 313
Serial Mode Plug and Play .................................................................................. 313
Using DSR .......................................................................................................... 313
Serial Device Identification .................................................................................. 314
Serial Port Inquire................................................................................................ 315
Display Pass Through ................................................................................................. 316
Remote Power Control ................................................................................................ 316
Remote Printer Reset.................................................................................................. 317
Reset in Serial Mode ........................................................................................... 317
Reset in Parallel Mode ........................................................................................ 317
Miscellaneous Communication Features ..................................................................... 318
Power-cycle Recovery......................................................................................... 318
Data Pass-through .............................................................................................. 318
Multi-drop Configuration ...................................................................................... 318
Off-line Active ...................................................................................................... 319
Recovery from Mechanical Errors ............................................................................... 320
Programmer’s Notes ................................................................................................... 321

Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Page 8

A: Internal Code Pages................. 323
B - ASCII Code Table .................... 324
C: Unicode Character Addresses ... 325
D: WGL4.0 Character Addresses ... 327
E: GB18030 Character Addresses . 331
F Windows 1252 Latin 1 ............... 338
G: Ordering Supplies .................... 341
Rev C

28-07764

Index ........................................................... 343
Figures
Figure 1 Receipt Printing, Tear off Position .................................................................. 28
Figure 2 Cash Drawer Pin Definitions ........................................................................... 33
Figure 3 Cash Drawer Selection.................................................................................... 40
Figure 4 3-pin mini DIN plug.......................................................................................... 42
Figure 5 Windows Print Driver....................................................................................... 47
Figure 6 OPOS or UPOS .............................................................................................. 48
Figure 7 USB Driver ...................................................................................................... 49
Figure 8 Ethernet Virtual Serial Driver ........................................................................... 50
Figure 9 POSPrinter OCX ............................................................................................. 51
Figure 10 Page Mode Entry Orientations .................................................................... 114
Figure 11 Page mode set printable area ..................................................................... 117
Figure 12 Default Page mode printed area.................................................................. 118
Figure 13 Defined Page mode printed area................................................................. 119
Figure 14 Code 39 full 128 character encoding ........................................................... 141
Figure 15 Expanded Function coding .......................................................................... 143
Figure 16 Code 128 encoding values .......................................................................... 144
Figure 17 Example of Character Graphics .................................................................. 241
Figure 18 Example Commands for a Sample Receipt ................................................. 242
Figure 19 Sample Receipt........................................................................................... 243
Figure 20 Receipt with graphics .................................................................................. 247
Figure 21 Typical POS System ................................................................................... 299
Figure 22 Host to Printer Link...................................................................................... 300
Figure 23 Printer Communications Buffer Flow ........................................................... 301
Figure 24 Parallel-port Data Timing............................................................................. 304
Figure 25 Parallel Port ACK Timing Options ............................................................... 305
Figure 26 Serial Port Flow Control Using DTR ............................................................ 309
Figure 27 XON/XOFF Serial Port Flow Control ........................................................... 310

Tables
Table 1 Standard Power Input Requirements................................................................ 26
Table 2 Power Input Requirements with the 24-volt DC Power ..................................... 26
Table 3: Paper Grades-Monochrome ............................................................................ 27
Table 4 Parallel Interface Pin-outs ................................................................................ 30
Table 5 Serial Interface Pin-outs ................................................................................... 31
Table 6 Cash Drawer Pin Assignment........................................................................... 34
Table 7 Serial interface pin out...................................................................................... 42
Table 8 Parallel interface pin out ................................................................................... 42
Table 9 Error Blink Codes ............................................................................................. 57
Table 10 Character Pitch .............................................................................................. 94
Table 11 Inter-character Spacing .................................................................................. 95
Table 12 Language Table ID’s .................................................................................... 101
Table 13 Euro Character Substitution Matrix ............................................................... 103

28-07764

Rev C

Page 9

Table 14 Paper Sensor Commands ............................................................................ 165
Table 15 Paper Sensor Commands ............................................................................ 166
Table 16 Supported TM-T90 Commands .................................................................... 185
Table 17 Undocumented TM-T90 Commands............................................................. 186
Table 18 Supported EPOS Commands....................................................................... 187
Table 19 Select Character Font Table ......................................................................... 194
Table 20 International Character Sets ......................................................................... 195
Table 21 Character Code Pages ................................................................................. 197
Table 22 Character Code Table .................................................................................. 198
Table 23 Print Modes .................................................................................................. 199
Table 24 Rotation Modes ............................................................................................ 200
Table 25 Paper Sensor Commands ............................................................................ 203
Table 26 Paper Sensor Commands ............................................................................ 204
Table 27 Print Density Selection ................................................................................. 209
Table 28 Automatic Status Back (ASB) Values for  ............................................... 210
Table 29 Automatic Status Back (ASB) First Byte (Printer Information)....................... 211
Table 30 Automatic Status Back (ASB) Second Byte (Error Information) .................... 211
Table 31 Automatic Status Back (ASB) Third Byte (Paper Sensor Information) .......... 212
Table 32 Automatic Status Back (ASB) Fourth Byte (Paper Sensor Information) ........ 212
Table 33 Paper Sensor Status ( = 1, 49) ............................................................... 212
Table 34 Drawer Kick-out Connector Status ( = 2, 50) .......................................... 213
Table 35 Values for the Status Function, .............................................................. 213
Table 36 Printer Status ( = 1) ................................................................................ 213
Table 37 Off line Status ( = 2) ............................................................................... 214
Table 38 Error Status ( = 3)................................................................................... 214
Table 39 Paper Roll Sensor Status ( = 4) .............................................................. 214
Table 40 Peripheral Status ( = 0, 48) .................................................................... 215
Table 41 Paper Status ................................................................................................ 215
Table 42 Bar Code System Based on  ................................................................. 221
Table 43 Printing Position of HRI Characters .............................................................. 222
Table 44 Font for Human Readable Interpretation (HRI) Characters ........................... 222
Table 45 Horizontal size of the bar code ..................................................................... 222
Table 46 Printer ID ...................................................................................................... 224
Table 47 Type ID ( = 2 or 50) ................................................................................ 224
Table 48 Peripheral Device Bit Definitions .................................................................. 226
Table 49 Macro Control Bit Definitions ........................................................................ 230
Table 50 User-defined Bit-image Resolutions ............................................................. 235
Table 51 Character Pitch ............................................................................................ 279
Table 52 Parallel-port Timing ...................................................................................... 305
Table 53 Paper Ordering Information .......................................................................... 341
Table 54 Cables Ordering Information ........................................................................ 341

Page 10

Rev C

28-07764

chapter

1
Introducing your iTherm® 280 Printer

28-07764

Rev C

Page 11

This page intentionally left blank

Page 12

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

About Your iTherm® 280 Printer

About your iTherm® 280 Printer
The Ithaca iTherm® 280 printer represents the very latest technology for use for thermal
receipt printing for point-of-sale and retail environments. It builds upon the architecture of
Ithaca’s proven thermal printers, together with a host of features specifically designed to
improve the performance of your receipt-printing applications, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Crisp, clear receipt printing in either one or two colors
Fast 8 inches per second print speed
Rugged spill-resistant cover
Large 4-inch paper roll capacity with drop-in loading
Protected internal power supply
Ethernet and USB interfaces
Wireless option for reduced cable clutter
Application-controllable buzzer
Configurable cash drawer functionality

The iTherm® 280 also offers a wide range of programmable features, including color and
font control, APA graphics support, bar codes, and support for over 60 language
character sets. These features let you quickly and easily integrate more layout and
printing options than ever – while giving you the reliability, durability and uptime you
have come to expect from Ithaca printers.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 13

About Your iTherm® 280 Printer

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Who Should Read This Guide?
This document provides information and programming specifications for operators who
will integrate the iTherm® 280 printer into their kitchen operations.

What Is Included in This Guide?
This Programmer’s Guide includes information on the features and programming
interface of the iTherm® 280 printer. It provides the following information to support your
programming and implementation efforts:
•
•
•

Warranty and technical support information.
Specifications and functionality description.
Programming information, including documentation of low-level and high-level
command interfaces, as well as sample scripts to guide your own implementation
efforts.

We want you to have a trouble-free implementation with your Ithaca printer. For any
issues not covered in this guide, quality technical support is available on-line at
www.transact-tech.com, or by telephone at (607) 257-8901 or (877) 7ithaca. Consult
the following pages for more details about our support services.

Warranty Options
All iTherm® 280 printers come with a standard 24-month standard warranty covering
both parts and labor that starts upon shipment from the factory. An optional extended
warranty, covering both parts and labor for an additional 12 months, may be purchased
separately. For more information concerning the warranty options, please contact the
Sales Department at TransAct’s Ithaca facility. You are responsible for insuring any
product returned for service, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Ithaca.
C.O.D. packages are not accepted and warranty repairs are subject to the terms and
conditions as stated on the Ithaca warranty policy.

Page 14

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

About Your iTherm® 280 Printer

Technical and Sales support
Your Ithaca printer is backed by the resources of TransAct Technologies, a global
technology firm with dedicated technical support and sales assistance. Here is how we
can help you:

On-line Technical Support
Our web site at www.transact-tech.com is your on-line portal to obtaining technical
assistance with your Ithaca printer. Click on Ithaca link and then the Technical Support
link to find documentation for your iTherm® 280 printer, including a current copy of this
Programmer’s Guide featuring:
o
o
o
o

Command codes and descriptions.
Character fonts.
Printer features.
Communication specifics.

Other utilities available include a font utility, a color converter and a terminal application
for communicating with your printer, as well as the following drivers and utilities:
Windows 95/98/Me Print Driver with Documentation
Windows NT 4.0 2K and XP Print Driver with Documentation
OPOS Drivers with Documentation
Master Character Set Definitions

Part No.
Part No.
Part No.
Part No.

100-9167
100-9170
100-9732
100-9785

Our on-line support site also includes a convenient e-mail assistance request form,
where you can submit support requests 24 hours a day, and receive a return contact
from a TransAct support technician during regular business hours.

Telephone Technical Support
Live telephone support is available Monday through Friday from 8 AM to 5 PM Eastern
US time, excluding holidays. We can provide general information about programming for
your iTherm® 280 printer, technical support, documentation, or assistance in sending a
printer for service. To obtain telephone support, call TransAct's Ithaca Facility at (607)
257-8901 and ask for Technical Support. To help us serve you faster, please have the
following information ready when you call:
•
•
•
•
•

The Model Number and Serial Number of the printer.
A list of any other peripheral devices attached to the same port as the printer.
What application software, operating system, and network (if any) you are using.
What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred.
How you tried to solve the problem.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 15

About Your iTherm® 280 Printer

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Return Materials Authorization and Return Policies
If the technical support person determines that the printer should be serviced at our
facility, and you want to return the printer for repair, we will issue you the Returned
Materials Authorization (RMA) number that is required before returning the printer.
Repairs are warranted for 90 days from the date of repair or for the balance of the
original warranty period, whichever is greater. Please prepare the printer being returned
for repair as follows:
•
•
•
•

Pack the printer to be returned in the original packing material.
Packing material may be purchased from TransAct's Ithaca Facility.
Do not return any accessories unless asked to do so by a support technician.
Write the RMA number clearly on the outside of the box.

Service Programs
TransAct Technologies Incorporated has a full service organization to meet your printer
service and repair requirements. If your printer needs service, please contact your
service provider first. If any problems still persist, you can directly contact the Ithaca
facility’s Technical Support Department at (607) 257-8901 or (877) 7ithaca for a return
authorization. International customers should contact your distributor for services.
TransAct offers the following service programs to meet your needs.
•
•
•
•

Extended Warranty.
Depot Repair.
Maintenance Contract.
Internet Support.

Sales Support
To order supplies, receive information about other Ithaca products, or obtain information
about your warranty, contact our Sales Department at the contact telephone or fax
numbers listed below. To receive information on International distribution, visit our web
site at www.transact-tech.com.

Contact Information
TransAct Technologies Incorporated
Ithaca Facility
20 Bomax Drive
Ithaca, NY 14850 USA
Telephone
Main fax

Page 16

(877) 7ithaca or (607) 257-8901
(607) 257-8922

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Sales fax
Technical Support fax
Web site

28-07764

About Your iTherm® 280 Printer

(607) 257-3868
(607) 257-3911
www.transact-tech.com

Rev C

Page 17

chapter

2
iTherm® 280 Specifications and Requirements

28-07764

Rev C

Page 19

This page intentionally left blank

Page 20

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

iTherm® 280 Specifications and Requirements

iTherm® 280 Thermal Printer Models
•
•
•

iTherm® 280-P: parallel interface printer
iTherm® 280-S: serial interface printer
iTherm® 280-USB: USB interface printer

Standard Features
The following features are common to the entire family of thermal printers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Print Speed for text is 8 inches per second (200 mm/sec) (monochrome)
8.0 inches per second paper feed speed
3.15 inch (80 mm.) print zone
44/57 characters per line
Built-in self-ranging External Power supply
Clam-shell paper loading
Single RJ11 cash drawer driver with status (Single RJ12)
Parallel (25 or 36 pin), serial (9 or 25 pin) RS232C, and USB interface
Configurable receiver buffer
Self diagnostics
Set up and configuration utility program

28-07764

Rev C

Page 21

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

CPI selections from 8 to 30 CPI1
Paper Out sensor
Multiple printer emulations: Ithaca PcOS and Epson Extended,
Maximum 8K buffer (adjustable)
2 Megabytes Flash Memory
2 Megabytes RAM
APA and Epson graphics
Bar Codes: Code 39, Code 93, Code 128, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC-A, UPCE, EAN-8, EAN-13, EAN-14, PDF417 stacked symbology and Codabar
WGL4.0 Character set.
Metal receipt tear off
8 dots/mm. thermal print head resolution
ON/OFF button located on front of printer
Cable routing strain relief
Power/Error/Paper LEDs
Paper feed button
Cover open button
Settable cash drawer configurations (Ithaca, Epson, or Star)
Spill proof design- vertical main PCB mounting
58 mm. or 80 mm. paper width – factory-settable
4.0 inch (101 mm.) Paper roll diameter
Portrait/landscape printing under Windows
Page mode printing
Cover Open sensor
Electronic journal capability
Internal counters for hours on, cuts, print lines and errors
100 km print head life
60 million print line printer MCBF (excluding knife)
Strong break-away paper cover
1,000,000 cuts cutter life (partial cut)
Buzzer
2 color printing (4 inches per second print speed)

1

Character spacing is adjustable from 1 to 30 CPI. Typical values will be between 8 and 20 CPI
depending on the font selected. Values of 13.3, 14.86, or 17.3 are typical for each resident font.
2
CPI’s greater than 16 will not be supported in NLQ fonts

Page 22

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

Optional Features
The following options are available on some of the models:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Vertical Wall Mount Kit
Adjustable paper low
OCR TrueType font
Chinese GB18030 Font.
Custom interfaces and emulations
DC powered version through Hosiden type connector

28-07764

Rev C

Page 23

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

General Specifications
Printing Specifications
Printing method:
Vertical/Horizontal dot pitch:
Resolution:
Line feed pitch:
Print zone (maximum)
Print speed (monochrome):
Print Speed (two color):
Number of print elements:

Thermal Sensitive Line Dot System
0.125 mm.
8 dots per mm (203 DPI)
3.2 mm. (.125 inches)
80 mm (3.15 inch)
8 inches per second
4 inches per second
640 dots in-line

Physical Characteristics

Dimensions

Page 24

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

Max Dimensions
Dimensions in
inches

W
6.25

D
8.50

H
5.87

Weight
Approximate weight:
Shipping weight:

28-07764

4.6 lb.
6.0 lb.

Rev C

Page 25

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

Electrical Characteristics
Internal AC Powered
The iTherm® 280 Printer is designed to be AC self-powered in domestic and
international markets. The printer is equipped with a universal input power supply that is
designed to operate worldwide without modification.
Supply
Voltage
Rating
(VAC)
100-240

Supply
Voltage
Range
(VAC)
90-264

Frequency
(Hz)

Rated Power
(watts)

47 – 63

45

Idle Current
(amps)

.1A @ 120VAC
.05 A @ 240VAC
Table 1 Standard Power Input Requirements

Printing Current
(amps)

1.4 A @ 120VAC
.7 A @ 240VAC

External Powered DC
Optionally, the iTherm® 280 Printer can be operated with 24-volt DC power supplied
from a host terminal or external supply. Connection to this printer version is made via a
three-pin Hosiden type connector.
Supply
Voltage
Rating
(VDC)
24
-5+10%

Supply
Voltage
Range
(VDC)
22.8 –
26.42

Frequency (Hz)

Idle
Current
(amps)

Current (amps)

DC

0.125 A

2.0 A (Cash Drawer Fire)
3.5 A (Printing maximum for < 1 minute)
4.8 A Peak (< 167 msec.)

Table 2 Power Input Requirements with the 24-volt DC Power

The iTherm® 280 can be configured to operate with various power supplies. If a DC
power supply with less capability is used, the printer must be configured for reduced
power and the printer will print slower.

Thermal Print Head
Thermal Print Head Overview:
Number of heat elements:
Heat element pitch:
Print width:
Pulse Life:
Abrasion Life:
Vertical dot pitch
Operating Temperature
Humidity:

640
0.125 mm (8 dots/mm.)
80 mm. +/- 0.2 mm.
100 million pulses
100 km.
0.264 mm (0.0104 inch) or 96 DPI
5-45 degrees C
10-90 % RH (non-condensing)

Operation Precautions:
• Do not print without paper.
• Clean the head with ethyl-alcohol after power is removed from the printer. This will
remove foreign particles or paper dust which may degrade print quality.
• Be sure to set the paper width in the printer’s configuration to agree with the paper
being used (58 or 80 mm width).
2

For DC powered printers, the cash drawer is supplied directly from the DC input supply. The
cash drawer requirements may affect the allowable range of voltages.

Page 26

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

•

Specifications and Requirements

Once narrow paper has been used, some part of the print head always contacts the
platen. If 80 mm. paper is used after setting up and running 58 mm. paper, the head
or the cutter blade may be worn out. Never change the paper width from narrow to
wide (58 to 80 mm.) once you set the paper width to narrow (58 mm.).

Media Specifications
Receipt Paper
Paper feed method
Paper feed pitch
Paper width
Roll diameter
Paper thickness
Roll paper core
Roll footage

Friction feed
Default - 1/8 inch
80 mm: 79.5 +/- 0.5 mm. (3.13 +/- 0.02 inches)
58 mm: 57.5 +/- 0.5 (2.26 +/- 0.02 inches)
101.6 mm. (4.0 inches) Max.
0.06 to 0.09 mm. (.00225 to .0035 inches)
Inside diameter .445 to .635 inches
Outside diameter .730 to .860 inches
400 feet (min.)

Thermal Paper Grades (Monochrome)
Paper
Manufacturer
Basis Weight
Caliper
Image color
Brightness
Activation Temp.

Smoothness (bekk)

Kanzaki P-300

Kanzaki P-310

Appleton Alpha 400-2.3

14.1 lbs.
14.2 lbs.
.00225 mils
.00226 mils
black
Black
85%
85%
Initial: 74+/-5°C
Initial:73 +/-5°C
Effective: 87 +/- 5°C
Effective: 83 +/- 5°C
Optimum: 100 +/- 5°C
Optimum: 88 +/- 5°C
325 sec. Ave.
325 sec.Ave.
Table 3: Paper Grades-Monochrome

14.5 lbs.
.00235 inches
Black
87%
Initial:77.2°C
Optimum: 104.8 +/- 5°C
200 (bekk).

Thermal Paper Grades (color)
Paper
Manufacturer

Kanzaki P-320 RB

Kanzaki P-320 BB

Appleton Dual RB

Appleton Dual BB

Basis Weight
Caliper
Brightness
Image color
Thermal
Response

14.6 lbs.
.00227 mils
87 %
Red/Black:
Initial(Red):80 +/-5°C
Initial(B):98 +/-5°C
Effective(Red): 87 +/- 5°C
Effective(B): 116 +/- 5°C
Optimum(Red):100 +/-5°C
Optimum(B):130 +/-5°C

14.6 lbs.
.00227 mils
87 %
Blue/Black
Initial(Blue):74 +/-5°C
Initial(B):90 +/-5°C
Effective(Blue): 80 +/- 5°C
Effective(B): 120 +/- 5°C
Optimum(Blue):90 +/-5°C
Optimum(B):130 +/-5°C

15.6 lbs.
.00235 mils
89.5 %
Red/Black:
Initial(Red):77.8 +/-5°C
Initial(B):77.8 +/-5°C
Optimum(Red):90.5 +/-5°C
Optimum(B):103.3 +/-5°C

15.6 lbs.
.00235 mils
87.8 %
Blue/Black
Initial(Blue):69.4 +/-5°C
Initial(B):69.4 +/-5°C
Optimum(Blue):82 +/-5°C
Optimum(B):118 +/-5°C

Smoothness
(bekk)

500 sec. ave.

500 sec. ave.

250 sec./min.

250 sec./min.

Table 8: Paper Grades-Color

Paper Usage Precautions:
• The life of the thermal head, when two-color paper is used, is reduced to half of the
life when single-color thermal paper is used.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 27

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

•

Use only specified thermal paper. If other paper is used, print quality, head life, and
cutter life may deteriorate.

Paper Out
A receipt paper out sensor is provided as a standard feature. It senses when there is
approximately .5 inches length of paper left on the paper roll.
Paper Low
A receipt paper-low sensor is provided as an optional feature. An operator adjustable
paper-low assembly will be provided to allow the printer to sense when the paper roll
diameter is between .94 to 1.29 inches (approximate). It is adjustable to compensate for
various paper core dimensions.
Paper Low Adjustment Settings
UPPER LIMIT: 2 turns (counter clockwise)
1 turn (counter clockwise)
FACTORY SETTING
1 turn (clockwise)
LOW LIMIT: 2 turns (clockwise)

Approximate Paper Remaining
(in feet)
29’
23’
18'
13'
8.5‘

Paper Roll Diameter
1.29"
1.203"
1.115"
1.028"
.940“

Notes:
• These measurements are approximate. Paper roll used for testing had paper roll
core outside diameter of .750 inches, and inside diameter is .625 inches. Results will
vary depending on core O.D./I.D. dimensions.
• Paper roll core should meet or exceed paper width.
• Results based on thermal paper .0025 inches thick.
• The receipt printable area is as shown in the following diagram.

1.00”

2.83

0.15

3.15
Figure 1 Receipt Printing, Tear off Position

The paper tear off is positioned 1 inch from the last line of print

Page 28

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

Receipt Printing, Auto Cutter Position
A receipt auto-cutter is a standard feature with all iTherm™ 280 Printers.
Cutter type
Rotary
Media width
3.13 +/- .02 inches (79.5 +/- .5 mm)
Media thickness range
0.0025 to 0.0035 inch
Cut to line of print
0.70 inch
Cutter life
1,000,000 cuts
Partial Cut tab:
.125 inches +/- .0625 inches (right edge of receipt)
Cut time:
Less than 350 milliseconds

Buzzer
A buzzer is provided as a standard feature. It is triggered upon command from the host
terminal to make a sound loud enough to be heard under noisy conditions. It will produce
a sound pressure level of at least 90 dBA, 1 foot from the front of the printer.

Cover Interlock
A paper cover interlock switch is provided as a standard feature. When the paper cover
is open, the printer is off-line, and will not print.

Display Pass Through
The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the
printer. The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable. The host
sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display. The
printer does not provide power to the display. During normal printer operation, no data is
passed to the display. In pass through mode, all received data is passed on to the
display.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 29

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

Communications Interface
Parallel Interface
Your printer features two parallel interfaces:
•
•

An IEEE 1284-A 25-pin, D-shell connector, with pin-outs that interface to a
standard IBM PC parallel printer interface with a one-to-one cable.
An IEEE 1284-B, which is a standard Centronics 36-pin connector.

Both interface cards provide a dual cash drawer interface. The following table lists
interface signals and corresponding pins.
25-pin Connector
Pin 1
Pins 2-9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pins 18-25

36-pin Connector Signal
Description
Pin 1
STROBE
Clock data to printer
Pins 2-9
D0 - D7
Data
Pin 10
ACK\
Printer accepted data
Pin 11
BUSY
Printer busy
Pin 12
PE
Paper Out/Status
Pin 13
SLCT
Printer selected
Pin 14
AUTOFD
Autofeed paper
Pin 32
FAULT\
Printer error
Pin 31
INIT\
Initialize printer
Pin 36
SLIN
Select printer
Pin 17
FG
Frame ground
Pin 18
+5V
Peripheral logic high
Pins 16, 19-30
GND
Ground
Table 4 Parallel Interface Pin-outs

Direction
Host to Printer
Host to Printer
Printer to Host
Printer to Host
Printer to Host
Printer to Host
Host to Printer
Printer to Host
Host to Printer
Host to Printer
Printer to Host
Printer to Host

Signal Levels
Voltage levels
Logic levels
Logic one
Driver
Receiver
Logic zero
Driver
Receiver
Current requirements
Logic one
Logic zero
Line termination
Data and control
Strobe

Page 30

0 V and +5 V (nominal)
+2.4 V to +5 V
+2.0 V to +5 V
0 V to +0.4 V
0 V to +0.8 V
Source
Sink 16 ma

0.25 ma at +2.4 V

3.3k ohm to +5 V
1.2k ohm to +5 V

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

RS-232 Serial Interface
Serial Port Features
The serial port features are as follows:
Baud Rates
Bit Patterns
Flow Control
9-pin
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, and 57.6K
8-bit no parity; 8-bit odd; 8-bit even; 7-bit no parity; 7-bit odd; 7-bit even
DTR and XON/XOFF
25-pin
Signal
Pin 8
Pin 3
RX
Pin 2
TX
Pin 20
DTR
Pin 7
GND
Pin 6
DSR
Pin 4
RTS
Pin 5
CTS
Pin 11
Table 5 Serial Interface Pin-outs

Description
Not Connected
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Not Connected

Signal Voltage and Current levels
The serial interface meets EIA RS232 interface specifications:
Voltage Levels
Mark = Off =
Space = On =

Max
Min
-3 to –15 Volts
+3 to +15 Volts

+-15 Volts
+- 3 Volts

Because both the host and printer are DTE's (Data Terminal Equipment), they use the
same serial port pin-outs. If the cable that is used to connect the host to the printer is a
pin-to-pin inter-connect, it will not work. Therefore, a null modem or turn-around cable
must be used to interconnect the host and the printer.
Display Pass Through
The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the
printer. The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable. The host
sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display. The
printer does not provide power to the display. During normal printer operation, no data is
passed to the display. In pass through mode, all received data is passed on to the
display.

USB Interface
The USB interface is a Version 1.1 interface that is Version 2.0 compliant. The standard
USB interface card is implemented through a Standard Series "B" Receptacle as defined
in the USB Specification. The printer is self-powered and does not draw power from the
standard type B USB interface cable.
The Standard USB Type B connector has the following pin functions:
Pin Signal

28-07764

Rev C

Page 31

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

1 Vbus (+5 V dc) (Not used in the iTherm® 280)
2 Minus data
3 Plus data
4 Ground
Note: The standard USB interface does not have enough power to run the
printer.

Ethernet 10-Base-T adapter
An IP addressable 10-Base-T Ethernet adapter is available for the iTherm® 280 printer.
It provides for web page configuration and supports bi-directional RAW and Telnet
interfaces. All protocols are implemented to the extent necessary to support printing
from Windows™ platforms; specific protocols supported include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Line Printer Daemon Protocol (LPR) – RFC1179
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) – RFC1157
Printer MIB – RFC1759
Port 9100 (Raw data)
Service Location Protocol (SLP) – RFC2165
The TFTP Protocol (Revision 2) – RFC1350
Telnet COM Port Control Option – RFC2217
Hypertext Transfer Protocol – HTTP/1.1 – RFC2616

Refer to the 100-05072 Wired Ethernet Programmer’s Guide for features and additional
setup information.
Note: The Ethernet adapter supports only the Ithaca Cash Drawer
interface.

802.11b Wireless Interface
An 802.11b wireless interface is available for the iTherm® 280 printer, allowing wireless
operation of the printer within a specified distance of a base unit. Contact TransAct
technical support for more information on this interface.

Page 32

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

Cash Drawer
Interface Description
The iTherm® 280 Printer supports a single cash drawer with status. The driver in the
printer is capable of supplying 24 V DC at up to 1.5 amps for up to 250 milliseconds. The
iTherm® 280 Printer defines cash drawer closed as switch open. If the drawer is
disconnected, it will be viewed by the printer as closed. Since the printer does not act on
the cash drawer status, the application can interpret cash drawer status any way it
wants.
Driver connector type (standard)
Driver voltage
Driver current
Pulse duration
Drawer status

Single RJ12 connectors with 24V sink drivers
24 volts (Refer to power supply specification).
1 amp maximum with current limit
250 msec. maximum
Open/close drawer status provided to printer

Cash Drawer Pin Assignments
Ithaca

Epson

Star

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

pin
pin
pin
pin
pin
pin

pin
pin
pin
pin
pin
pin

pin
pin
pin
pin
pin
pin

1
2
3
4
5
6

CD2CD1 Sense
Ground
CD Drive + (+24V)
CD1Not Connected

1
2
3
4
5
6

Not Connected
CD1CD1 Sense
CD Drive + (+24V)
CD2Ground

1
2
3
4
5
6

Not Connected
CD1CD Drive + (+24V)
CD Drive + (+24V)
CD2CD1 Sense

Figure 2 Cash Drawer Pin Definitions

The cash drawer can be configured for one of three configurations; Ithaca, Epson, or
Star. The Main Controller PCB has three (3) six-pin headers, one each configuration.
The cash drawer harness is identical, and is plugged into the appropriate header at time
of factory build. The header position defines the configuration of the cash drawer. This
design allows for changing the cash drawer in the field by a trained technician. Refer to
the markups on the board when determining where the harness should be installed to
work in the three different configurations.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 33

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

Pin Number
1

2

3

4
5

6

Ithaca
Signal Name
Frame
ground
Drawer kickout drive
signal 1
Drawer
open/close
signal
+24V DC
Drawer kickout drive
signal 2
Signal
Ground

Direction

Output Sink
Drive
Input

Output Sink
Drive

Epson
Signal Name
Drawer kickout drive
signal 2
Drawer
open/close
signal
Signal ground

+24V DC
Drawer kickout drive
signal 1
Frame Ground

Direction
Output Sink
Drive
Input

Output Sink
Drive

Star
Signal Name
Frame
ground
Drawer kickout drive
signal 1
+24V DC

+24V DC
Drawer kickout drive
signal 2
Drawer
Open/Close
signal

Direction

Output
Sink Drive

Output

Input

Table 6 Cash Drawer Pin Assignment

Page 34

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Specifications and Requirements

Vertical Wall Mount Kit Option
A kit is available as an add-on option that allows the iTherm® 280 printer to be vertically
mounted to a wall. It is comprised of a metal mounting bracket that attaches to the base
of the printer with two M6 thread-cutting screws. Additional hardware is required to
mount the bracket to the wall. The hardware should be installed into wall studs to
ensure that the printer mounting meets the following conditions:
•
•
•

The mounting to the wall must withstand 4 times the printer weight in downward and
outward directions.
The kit must include mounting instructions to explain how to meet the load test
The firewall or the outer housing of the printer is maintained between the controller
PCB and the mounting wall.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 35

chapter

3
Setup Procedures

28-07764

Rev C

Page 37

This page intentionally left blank

Page 38

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Verifying the Configuration

Before you install an iTherm® 280 Printer into your system, you should verify that the printer is
configured as required by your system. There are four parts to this verification process.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Verify that the communications interface card is the correct one.
Verify that the cash drawer interface is configured correctly.
Verify that the power connection is correct.
Verify that the firmware in the printer is configured correctly.

Verify the Communications Interface Card
There are several basic types of interface cards, and each has variations. Make sure your
printer has the correct interface card.
Parallel Interface
• Centronics 36-pin interface
• 25-pin D shell
Serial Interface
• 9-pin D shell interface
• 25-pin D shell interface
USB Interface
• Standard 4-pin
Ethernet 10-Base-T Adapter
• Standard Ethernet port connector
802.11b Wireless Interface
• Wireless interface pre-installed within printer unit
It is easy to distinguish most of the interface cards other than the 25-pin serial and 25-pin
parallel interface cards. To determine what interface is installed, refer to the configuration
receipt shipped with the printer, or enter configuration mode and look at the verification printout.
If a serial interface card is installed, the printout will refer to the RS-232 serial interface. If the
parallel interface card is installed, the printout will refer to the parallel interface.

Changing Interface Cards
The interface card on the iTherm® 280 Printer can be changed in the field.
In most cases, interface cards are interchangeable without altering the printer firmware.
However, you may have to load new firmware and/or a new boot loader before you change the
interface cards. Check with Technical Support for firmware compatibility between interface
cards before ordering.

Removing the Old Interface Card
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Turn over the printer, taking care not to allow the cover to open or the paper to fall.
Disconnect the current communications and cash drawer cables.
If equipped, unsnap the power supply retainer and slide out the power supply.
Disconnect the power supply from the interface card.
Remove the interface retaining screw.
Slide the interface card sideways-towards the power supply pocket-and remove it.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 39

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Cash Drawer Configuration
Verify the Cash Drawer Interface
The printer is shipped from the factory with a cash drawer interface label on the bottom of the
printer. You should always verify that the cash drawer you are using matches the printer’s cash
drawer interface label. If there is no cash drawer label, you should remove the communications
interface card and verify the setting. See "Configuring the Cash Drawer Interface" on page 40 .
There are many vendors of cash drawers. If you are unsure what the cash drawer interface is,
contact the cash drawer vendor for more information.
If you find that the cash drawer does not match the printer, you may change the printer's cash
drawer interface configuration. If the cash drawer interface no longer matches the label on the
printer, please remove the label.
Install the new interface card
1. Slide the interface card into the printer. Make sure the interface card sits flush with the
printer. The retaining screws should also line up with the mounting holes.
2. Install the retaining screws.
3. Connect the communications interface card and any cash drawer cables.
4. Turn over the printer, and reconnect the power.

Configuring the Cash Drawer Interface
CD interface drawing not yet available.
Figure 3 Cash Drawer Selection

The cash drawer connector may be connected to one of three internal connectors on the
controller board. To access the internal connector, you must first remove the interface adapter.
Removing the interface card
1. Unplug the printer
2. Turn over the printer. Take care not to allow the cover to open or the paper to fall.
3. Disconnect the current communications and cash drawer cables.
4. Remove the interface retaining screw2.
5. Slide the interface card towards the back of the printer and remove it.
Reconfigure the cash drawer
1. Slide the cash drawer socket out of the slot in the frame.
2. Unplug the socket harness from the main circuit board.
3. Plug the harness into the connector for the desired interface.
4. Reinstall the cash drawer socket into the frame.
Re-Install the interface card
1. Slide the interface card into the printer. Make sure the interface card sits flush with the
printer. The retaining screws should also line up with the mounting holes.
2. Install the retaining screws.
3. Connect the communications interface card and any cash drawer cables.
4. Turn over the printer, and reconnect the power.

Page 40

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Installing Cables
Three cables are required to be connected to the printer.
1. Power
2. Communications
3. Cash Drawer

Connecting power
The iTherm® 280 Printer is generally supplied with a built-in power supply. As an option, the
printer is available without a power supply.
Internal Supply
The internal supply connects to an outside power source with a standard two wire power cord.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 41

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

External Supply
If an external supply is used a 3 pin mini DIN plug is provided for the external 24 Volt supply.
Earth Ground
+24 Vo lt Supply

Ground (+24 V dc)

Figure 4 3-pin mini DIN plug

Connecting Communications Cables
The iTherm® 280 has a number of different communications interfaces.
Serial
The serial interface connector is either a 9-pin or 25-pin mail D shell interface. The pin-out is
shown below
9-pin
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8

25-pin
Pin 3
Pin 2
Pin 20
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 4
Pin 5

Signal
Description
RX
Receive Data
TX
Transmit Data
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
Signal Ground
DSR
Data Set Ready
RTS
Request to Send
CTS
Clear to Send
Table 7 Serial interface pin out

Parallel
The parallel interface connection is very similar to the serial interface connection. It can be a
36-pin Centronics (IEEE 1284-B) or a 25-Pin female D-Shell (IEEE 1284-A) connector. The pinout of both connectors are shown below
25-pin
Connector
Pin 1
Pins 2-9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pins 18-25

Page 42

36-pin
Connector
Pin 1
Pins 2-9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 32
Pin 31
Pin 36
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pins 16, 19-30

Signal

Description

STROBE
Clock data to printer
D0 - D7
Data
ACK\
Printer accepted data
BUSY
Printer busy
PE
Paper Out/Status
SLCT
Printer selected
AUTOFD
Auto-feed paper
FAULT\
Printer error
INIT\
Initialize printer
SLIN
Select printer
FG
Frame ground
+5V
Peripheral logic high
GND
Ground
Table 8 Parallel interface pin out

Rev C

Direction
Host to Printer
Host to Printer
Printer to Host
Printer to Host
Printer to Host
Printer to Host
Host to Printer
Printer to Host
Host to Printer
Host to Printer
Printer to Host
Printer to Host

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

USB
The USB connector can be one of two types: a standard Type B connector, as in commonly
used in the PC industry, or a POS Powered USB connector. In the case of the powered USB
connector, there are a number of different versions. Make sure you are using a 24 volt DC
version, and the 24 volt supply meets the requirements of the iTherm® 280 printer and any cash
drawer that is connected to the printer.
A powered USB interface is a special order option. There are several standards for the power
interface. Make sure that you inform TransAct is aware of what interface you require, and that
that interface connector is supported by the iTherm® 280.

Verify the Firmware Configuration
An example receipt is Included in the box your printer shipped in that will show how the printer
was configured before it shipped from our Ithaca facility. Compare this information to your
system requirements. Pay attention to the emulation and the communications link. If they are
wrong, the printer may appear inoperative. If the configuration is not correct, refer to the section
on changing the iTherm® 280 configuration. If there are a number of printers to be installed and
you want the identical configuration in each, you can use the universal configuration program to
record the configuration on one printer, and replicate it over a group. The configuration program
is available from Transact technical support.

Installing Paper
It is easy to install paper in the iTherm® 280.
1. Open the paper cover by grasping the green cover release between your thumb and
forefinger, and squeeze the release. This will pop the cover up.
2. Open the cover and install a roll of paper with the paper coming off of the bottom of the
roll.
3. Lay the paper tail over the front of the printer and center it over the paper path.
4. Close the cover. When the cover is closed, the printer will feed several inches of paper
to make sure the paper is aligned in the printer. If equipped with a cutter, the printer will
automatically cut the paper tail and the printer is now ready to print. If the printer is not
equipped with a cutter, the operator should remove the paper tail.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 43

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Printer Drivers and Printer Controls
Definitions for terms you will see in this guide:
OS – The Operating System, which is the operating software underlying a computer
system. Examples of OS’s include Microsoft Windows® (9x/Me/2000/XP), Linux, Unix,
and OS2.
Application - A software program that a person uses to perform a function, such as a
point of sale (POS) application. Also referred to as a program.
Driver - Software that makes hardware do something (something useful, we hope!). A
driver translates (or converts) a software command to a command that specific hardware
can understand. Types of drivers include printer drivers, port drivers, OPOS drivers, and
USB drivers.
OCX/ActiveX - a software component that utilizes Microsoft’s OLE (Object linking and
embedding).
API - Application Programming Interface, or the language used to develop applications
for devices such as printers. In the generic sense, the term “the API” refers to the
Windows Operating System API. Types of APIs include Windows API, Visual Basic API,
Delphi API, and MFC API.

Page 44

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Getting Started – Questions to Ask
Most driver software for TransAct Technologies printers fall into one of three main
categories:
•

They support or emulate a specific type of communications port – for example, a
USB port driver, or a driver to emulate a serial port via an Ethernet interface.

•

They support the industry standard OPOS (OLE Point of Sale) interface for point of
sale printer applications.

•

They support a direct printer interface, such as the Windows printer API or low-level
printer commands.

The questions below can help clarify which types of drivers may be appropriate for your
printer. The following section then examines each of the most common types of driver
software in detail.

Do you want to use USB and simulate a
communication port?
The TransAct Virtual Serial (TVS) USB Driver allows your application to think that it is
communicating with a serial port, but is actually using the USB link to communicate with
the printer. This driver should be downloaded and installed when requested as part of
the Windows Plug and Play process, or may be preinstalled.
Some of TransAct Technologies printers support a composite USB interface. This
interface allows a Windows print driver to be installed to a windows USB printer port as
well as supporting a virtual serial port. In some cases the printer USB port is
configurable, and either the windows printer port or the virtual serial port may be
disabled. If you will be using OPOS, you should disable the Windows printer interface.
If you are going to use only the Windows printer API, you can but do not need to disable
the virtual serial interface.

Do you want to use an Ethernet interface and simulate
a communication port?
The TransAct Ethernet Virtual Serial (VSerial) Driver allows your application to think that
it is communicating with a serial port, but is actually using the Ethernet link to
communicate with the printer. This driver should be downloaded and installed when
required. There is currently no reliable Windows Plug and Play protocol for Ethernet
devices.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 45

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Are you using OPOS (UnifiedPOS/UPOS)?
If you are using an application that is written to interface with the OPOS (OLE Point of
Sale) standard, then the TransAct Technologies OPOS driver will allow you to
communicate with most TransAct Technologies printers. The OPOS driver provides the
mechanisms to print in all of the print modes supported by the printer.
Note: The TransAct Technologies OPOS driver only supports Microsoft Windows
operating systems.
Note: If you are using a USB printer, you will also need to install the TransAct
Technologies Virtual Serial (TVS) driver.
Note: If you are using an Ethernet printer, UPOS can be configured to interact directly
with the printer. In this case, you do not need the VSerial Ethernet driver.

Do you want to print from a Windows application?
Microsoft supports a Windows Printing API for Windows applications. This interface is
intended to support typical Windows page printers, and has features such as begin
document, end document, and tray selection. While this is not an ideal environment for a
POS printer, there are cases where such functionality is required.
To support this environment TransAct Technologies provides a Windows print driver with
extensions for POS, which may be downloaded and installed for most TransAct
Technologies printers.
Please read the Ithaca Printer API documentation included with the driver. A POS
printer is not the same as a typical consumer printer and requires unique consideration
when using a Windows printer API interface.

Page 46

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Windows Printer Driver
A Windows printer driver is a specific type of driver defined by Microsoft that the OS
uses to translate drawing commands by a Windows application to a specific printer’s
command set. A standard Windows printer driver is a graphics page mode driver, and is
not a POS (point of sale) driver. (Have you ever had to open a cash drawer that was
connected to your printer at home?)

PC Hardware
Window’s Operating System

Windows Print
Application

Printer
Driver

GDI
Graphics
Device
Interface

Port
Hardware

Port
Driver

Serial

Serial

OR
Parallel

OR
Parallel

Part of the
Windows
API

Printer
Driver

OR
USB bus.

OR
USB

OR
Other

OR
Other

Figure 5 Windows Print Driver
When to use a windows printer driver:
Use a printer driver when writing a program that uses the Windows API to send print
information to the printer.
When not to use a windows printer driver:
When a program wants to send printer command codes to the printer, or when a
program wants to get information back from a printer.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 47

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

OPOS driver
An OPOS driver is an implementation of the UnifiedPOS (UPOS) specification.
It provides an application interface for retail devices such as a POS printer, scanner,
cash drawer, pole display, MICR, scale, or others.

PC Hardware
Window’s Operating System
POS Application

OPOS POSPrinter Driver
(Service)

OPOS Printer
Control (ActiveX)

OPOS
Drawer
(Service)

OPOS Cash
Drawer Control
(ActiveX)

Cash
Driver

Port
Driver

Port
Hardware

Serial

Serial

OR
Parallel

OR
Parallel

OR
USB

OR
USB bus.

OR
Other

OR
Other

Figure 6 OPOS or UPOS
When to use an OPOS driver:
When an application is written that invokes the retail device functions based on the
UPOS specification, in a vendor independent manner, OPOS can be used on the
Microsoft Windows platform. It allows access to all the features of a retail device without
having to deal with specific device commands. It also allows information to be retrieved
from the retail device.
When not to use an OPOS driver:
When the application is written using the Windows print API, and device specific
commands are sent directly through the application to the device.

Page 48

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

USB driver
A USB driver is a low level device driver, required for USB communication with the
printers. It is a Windows Plug and Play driver and needs to be installed for USB printers,
when the printer is initially plugged into the system.

Window’s Operating System

OPOS
Driver

USB Interface

USB
Driver

USB
PRINTER

USB Interface
Windows
Driver

Windows
Print App.

USB Interface

Figure 7 USB Driver

When to use the USB driver:
A USB driver is needed whenever data is to be sent to or received from the printer using
the USB interface. It is needed with both the Windows and the OPOS drivers, when
these drivers use the USB interface as the underlying communication path. It is also
needed if the application does not use either the OPOS or the Windows driver, but
needs to communicate directly with the printer using the USB interface.
When not to use the USB driver:
A USB driver is not needed if the application uses any of the other forms of
communication such as serial, parallel, or Ethernet, and does not use USB.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 49

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Ethernet Virtual Serial driver
A VSerial driver is a low level device driver, which appears to Windows and your
application as a serial com port. However, all of the data sent to and received from the
serial com port actually comes from the Ethernet printer.

Window’s Operating System

User
Application
Driver

Virtual Serial
Link

Virtual
Driver

Ethernet
Printer
With Print
Server

Figure 8 Ethernet Virtual Serial Driver

When to use the Ethernet Virtual Serial driver:
An Ethernet Virtual Serial Driver is needed whenever data is to be sent to or received
from the printer using the Ethernet interface, but needs to appear to the application as a
serial port.
When not to use the Ethernet Virtual Serial driver:
An Ethernet Virtual Serial driver is not needed if the application is able to directly interact
with an Ethernet printer using TCP/IP Protocol.

Page 50

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

POSPrinter ActiveX Control (POSPrinter OCX)
This is not a driver; but rather a software component that provides a connection from an
application to a port driver. This allows an application to communicate “directly” with a
printer. This approach allows an application to send commands to the printer if desired,
similar to the legacy DOS approach once used to communicate with a POS printer.

PC Hardware

Window’s Operating System

POS Application

POSPrinter.ocx
ActiveX Control
Printer
Driver

Port
Driver

Port
Hardware

Serial
OR
Parallel
OR
USB
OR
Eternet
OR
Other

Serial
OR
Parallel
OR
USB bus.
OR
Ethernet
OR
Other

Figure 9 POSPrinter OCX
When to use the POSPrinter OCX:
When the application writer wants complete control of what is sent to the printer. The
application must take the responsibility of sending the correct codes to the printer as well
as detecting error conditions, and graceful recovery from error situations.
When not to use the POSPrinter OCX:
When you do not want to deal with the low-level commands sent to the printer.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 51

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Setup Procedures

Where to get more information
Additional information about Driver and support programs are available for your Transact
Sales representative, from
Transact customer support or from the TransAct Technologies Web site.

Page 52

Rev C

28-07764

chapter

4
How to Operate the iTherm® 280 Printer

28-07764

Rev C

Page 53

This page intentionally left blank

Page 54

Rev C

28-07764

How to Operate the ITherm® 280

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

How to Operate the iTherm® 280 Printer
Your iTherm® 280 printer contains two buttons and three (LED) indicator lights. In
addition to power control and feeding paper, these two buttons can be used to perform
functions like self-testing, clearing errors and printer configuration. They are:
* BUTTON
FEED

This is the standby or power down button, located on front face of the
printer’s cabinet
Located on bottom portion of printer’s keypad

* Button
The iTherm® 280 has been designed to remain connected to a power source at all times.
The * button on the iTherm® 280 Printer does not completely remove power from the
printer. Because of this, the * button is used to alternately switch the printer between
OFF and ON modes. The * button does not disconnect power to the printer. The printer
is truly off only when the AC power supply is disconnected. You will notice that none of
the indicator lights will be on when the printer is in OFF. When the printer enters ON
mode, the green power indicator light will be activated. The operational state of the
iTherm® 280 can be determined by looking at the Power Indicator Light (LED).
When the * button is pressed or the power down command is received, the iTherm® 280
Printer enters an OFF low power mode. The printer is not completely off, but is in
Standby mode 3.
Standby mode is remembered even if the power is removed. Whenever power is turned
back on, the printer starts, performs Level 0 diagnostics, and re-enters Standby mode.

FEED Button
The FEED button feeds paper through the printer. By pressing the FEED button
momentarily, the paper will be fed one line at a time. Pressing and holding the FEED
button will make the printer feed paper continuously until the button is released.

3

The printer draws about four watts of power in Standby.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 55

How to Operate the ITherm® 280

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Indicator Lights (LED)
The three iTherm® 280 indicator lights are:
•
•
•

Power LED
Error LED
Paper LED

Indicates printer activity and non-recoverable errors
Indicates problems and probability of recovery
Indicates paper status (paper low)

Power Indicator (LED)
The power indicator lets the user know that the printer is ON. If the POWER indicator
blinks in conjunction with the ERROR indicator, the printer is experiencing a nonrecoverable error: see the fault indicators discussed below. If the POWER indicator blinks
and there is no error indicator blinking, the printer is being held in reset by the host.

Error Indicator (LED)
The ERROR indicator lets the user know that the printer is experiencing a problem. If the
POWER indicator is lit (not blinking), the error is generally recoverable without data loss.
If the POWER indicator is blinking, a non-recoverable error has occurred: see the fault
indicators below. If the error is not operator recoverable, a power cycle may correct the
problem. If a power cycle does not correct the fault, the printer must be serviced.

Paper Indicator (LED)
The PAPER indicator signals the paper status. If the printer is equipped with a paper low
option, the PAPER indicator will blink when the paper is low. The low sensor is adjustable,
and the amount of paper remaining is dependent on the adjustment. If the PAPER
indicator is lit with the error indicator, the printer is out of paper: in this case, the printer
stops printing and waits for the paper to be changed.

Fault Indicators
The ERROR indicator is the primary fault indicator, and is either always on or blinking if a
fault has occurred. There are three types of faults:
Fully-recoverable faults
Semi-recoverable faults
Non-recoverable faults

Page 56

Paper out or cover open
Head jam
Component failure

Rev C

28-07764

How to Operate the ITherm® 280

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Fully-recoverable and Status
A fully-recoverable error will restart printing exactly where it stopped when the error
occurred. Printing will resume after error has been properly addressed. A status
recoverable error is very similar to a fully-recoverable error. Additionally, status is used
to display when the printer consumables may need replacing.
Semi-recoverable
A semi-recoverable error is determined by whether or not the printer has to be shut off
and turned back on while attending to the problem. The amount of information lost is
dependent on the type of error and the state of the information being processed.
Non-recoverable
A non-recoverable error produces information loss.
Error Blink Codes
If during normal operation, the ERROR indicator is lit and the POWER indicator is blinking,
a minor error occurred. The POWER indicator shows the error by blinking a pattern.
Cycling the power restarts the printer. Blink patterns are defined as follows.
1 Blink
__¦__________________¦______

(1 blink, pause)

2 Blink
__¦__¦_______________¦__¦___

(2 blinks, pause)

3 Blink
__¦__¦__¦____________¦__¦__¦_

(3 blinks pause)

A similar pattern is followed for other blink counts. Error indications are as follows:
Error Indicated
Unused
Configuration Read
Configuration Write
Software Error
Auto Cutter Error
Unused
User Store Format Error
Electronic Journal Format Error
Flash Operation Error
Internal Memory Error
Communication Adapter Error
Operating System Error
Table 9 Error Blink Codes

28-07764

Rev C

Blink Count
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
14
15

Page 57

How to Operate the ITherm® 280

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Testing the Printer Overview
Using Self-Test, Configuration, and Hex Dump Mode
Self-Test Mode allows you to perform a series of tests to show if the printer is functioning
correctly. Self-Test Mode also allows you to print a summary of how your iTherm® 280 is
currently configured. Use this printout to compare your printer’s settings to your system’s
requirements. Specific attention should be given to emulation and communications
settings. For serial printers, the baud rate and other RS-232 interface settings are
important. If there is a configuration problem, you should use Configuration Mode to
make any changes necessary.
Entering Self-Test, and Configuration mode
To enter self test and or configuration mode, perform the following sequence of
operations:
1. Press and release the * button to turn the printer OFF. (The power indicator light
will be off.)
2. Press and hold the Feed button.
3. While holding the Feed button, press and release the * button.
4. When the red, error indicator light blinks, release the Feed button
5. Follow the directions printed on the receipt to cycle through and select the
desired TEST option.
The iTherm® 280 has a total of seven Self-Test and or configuration options. Two are
designed to be useful when performing on-site print evaluations. One option allows the
printers electronic journal to be maintained, one allows the printers configuration to be
changed, and two are designed for factory setup by TransAct.
Testing the printer
Use the following two TEST options when verifying basic printer operation.
TEST-Receipt

The receipt test is the primary test option to use when determining if the printer is
functioning correctly.
The receipt test is mostly used during the early stages of troubleshooting, to eliminate
the possibility that the problem is occurring with the printer. If the printer experiences a
failure, and the error indicator light is activated, call TransAct’s Ithaca Facility’s Technical
Support Department.
TEST-Head Test

This test performs a test pattern that will print all the head print elements and verify that
the drive roll is free from defects. The print head has two heating elements per dot
position. A print element is not considered bad unless both elements are missing. If the
head test shows that there is an inconsistency in the drive roll it may be debris or a void.
If debris is indicated, cleaning the drive roll should correct the problem. If this does not
correct the problem, contact TransAct’s Ithaca Facility’s Technical Support Department.

Page 58

Rev C

28-07764

How to Operate the ITherm® 280

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Maintaining the Electronic Journal
The iTherm® 280 has an electronic journal option. It is possible to configure the printer
with a journal station. This selection allows the information saved in the electronic journal
to be printed and maintained by the operator.
Operation of this mode will be described later in the manual under Electronic Journal
Operation.
It the Electronic Journal is unintentionally initialized, it may be deactivated by this option
as well. If the Electronic Journal is password protected, the manual Electronic Journal
option will be disabled.
Configuring Options
The configuration option allows the configuration of the printer to be printed and, if
necessary, changed. When configuration mode is entered, the current configuration, the
Current User store status, and the current totals are printed. If any printer errors have
occurred, a hardware and software error log may also be printed. At the end of the print
out are instructions on how to use configuration mode. Please read these instructions
carefully, as they are not the same as Self-Test. You may exit configuration mode at
any time, without affecting the printer configuration, by pressing the power button.
TEST- Configuration

The content of the configurable features will alter based on the hardware installed.
There will be at least three groups of options:
1. Emulation
2. Communications
3. General Options
Under emulation the instruction set or emulation of the printer may be changed.
Available options will depend on the model of printer, however Ithaca PcOS is always
available. Other options may be Epson TM88, TM90, Microline, and Ithaca M50.
Under Communications, the way the printer deals with the communications port can be
adjusted. The printer will only show communications options that deal with the
communications adapter installed.
Under General Options, all other configurable features of the printer can be adjusted.
The default language, paper options, electronic Journal features, and print defaults may
be set.
Details of all printer options and features will de discussed later in this manual.
Factory Test
The printer is equipped with several factory test modes. These test options are only used
for factory burn-in and testing.
TEST-Burn-in
TEST-Rolling ASCII

28-07764

Rev C

Page 59

How to Operate the ITherm® 280

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Hex-dump Mode
Hex-dump mode is used to diagnose communication problems with the printer. As
information is received by the printer, the information is converted to a Hex/ASCII format
and printed. No translation is made, which means no commands are interpreted. All
information is converted to Hex/ASCII and printed on the receipt tape. If a carriage return
is sent to the printer, it is translated to 0D in the hexadecimal field and "." in the ASCII
field.
Entering Hex-dump Mode
To enter hex-dump mode, perform the following sequence of operations:
1. Press and release the * button to turn the printer OFF. (The power indicator light
will be off.)
2. Press and hold the Feed button.
3. While holding the Feed button, press and release the * button.
4. When the red, error indicator light blinks, continue to hold the Feed button until
the blink pattern changes (about 5 seconds). After the pattern changes, release
the line feed button and the printer will enter Hex-dump mode.
Hex-dump format
The format follows.
54
61

68
20

69
74

73
65

20
73

69
74

73
0D

20
0A

This is
a test..

Several indications of printer and host communication problems can be deduced from
hex dump mode. If the printer is printing all 3F "?" symbols, the parity or the number of
bits is wrong. If the printer is printing 3F "?" symbols when it should be printing other
characters, the communications are probably incorrect, such as the parity, baud rate, or
bit length setting. If the printer prints incorrect characters (like Hex C1 instead of Hex 41
"A"), it is set for 8-bit data, and the host is set for 7-bit. In most cases, the print problem
can be traced to the host and printer being configured differently.

Page 60

Rev C

28-07764

How to Operate the ITherm® 280

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostics always and only run at power up, e.g. power being applied. These
diagnostics perform the following tasks:
Cold Power On
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Basic System Integrity
Vector Integrity
RAM Test
Flash Boot Loader Integrity
Flash Firmware Integrity (NOTE: If the firmware is corrupted, the printer will remain in boot load.)
Start Normal Firmware
Verify Configuration Integrity
Interface Card Configuration
User-store Integrity
Start Kernel, Verify Multitasking, Start Tasks

11.
12.
13.
14.

Once the kernel is running, the following tests must pass to allow operation. However, if any test
fails (except the knife home test), the remaining tests will generate recoverable faults and normal
operation will start as soon as the fault is cleared. These tests are also run when operation is
resumed from OFF.
Cover Closed Check
Knife Home (if installed)
Paper Present
Place Printer On-line, Start Normal Operation

The first phase of testing consists of step 1-5, and determines that the boot loader is
accurate and the printer firmware is correct. Tests 1 through 4 produce non-recoverable
errors if they fail, in which case the power must be removed from the printer and the
printer returned for service. If the boot loader is intact, but the main firmware is
corrupted, the printer automatically enters boot loader mode, where the firmware can
then be reloaded into the printer.

Boot Loader Mode
The boot loader cannot be entered during normal operation. Boot loader mode can only
be entered in one of two ways: (1) when Level 0 Diagnostics finds that the firmware
check (also known as a cyclical redundancy check, or CRC) is bad, or (2) manually.
To manually enter the boot loader, hold the * button while the power is applied. The
ERROR Indicator comes on, and the POWER indicator blinks. At this time, the firmware
boot program is operating and the boot load file may be sent to the printer. When the
printer receives the boot load file, the printer will automatically restart if the firmware load
was successful. If the load fails, the printer will remain in boot load mode. If the load
fails, reset the printer by removing the power and restarting it.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 61

chapter

5
Configuring Your iTherm® 280 Printer

28-07764

Rev C

Page 63

This page intentionally left blank

Page 64

Rev C

28-07764

Configuring Your ITherm® 280 Printer

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Configuration Mode Overview

There are two ways to configure the iTherm® 280 printer: the first is to use the manual
configuration sequence by using the keypad controls, and the second is to use
TransAct’s remote configuration software. TransAct Technologies offers the use of a
remote CONFIG program as a fast, easy way for system integrators to configure or
reconfigure your iTherm® 280 printer. To obtain more information, or the latest version of
the CONFIG program, call our Sales Department or Technical Support.

Most Frequent Configuration Incompatibilities
Parallel Printer
Emulation
Carriage Return Options
Serial Printer
Emulation
RS-232 Serial Interface (baud rate)
Carriage Return Options

How to Change Configuration Settings
Entering into Configuration Mode
1) Place the printer in standby by pressing the * button.
2) Press and hold the Feed button while pressing and releasing the * button.
3) When the error indicator blinks, indicating a stuck key, release the Feed key and
enter Self Test Mode.
4) Press and hold the Feed button until the next test is printed. Then release the Feed
button.
5) Repeat step 4 until “Test-Configuration” is printed.
6) Press and release the Feed button briefly. The current configuration will then be
printed.
7) You are now in Configuration Mode.
After you enter Configuration Mode, the printer will print the current configuration, the
current totals and the error logs, if any. Save this printout as a guide to changing the
configuration, and in case you wish to return the printer to the previous configuration.
Each emulation can have different configurable features. If you are changing the
emulation, note that the printout that was printed at the beginning of the configuration
process may be incorrect for the new emulation, and the configurable features may be
different. If you are using this print out as a configuration guide, and you are changing
the emulation, you may wish to save the new emulation and then re-enter Configuration
Mode to change other options. This will print all the available features for the new
emulation.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 65

Configuring Your ITherm® 280 Printer

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Using Configuration Mode
The Feed button is used to select and change configuration setting. By pressing and
releasing the Feed button, the parameter to be changed can be selected. By pressing
and holding the Feed button, the value of the selected parameter will change.
The following chart lists some of the potential parameters and their options.
Parameter
Emulation Mode

Definition
Printers command set

Model

Type of Epson Printer

Paper Colors
Black Dot Eo

Red Dot Eo

Color
Density Adjust
Baud Rate

This option allows the
Custom Black or Custom
Color paper Black
energy to be set.
This option allows the
Custom Color paper
Color energy to be set.
This option selects the
secondary paper color
This is a fine adjustment
for the print density.
Serial Communications
Bit rate

Mode

Number of bits, parity
and stop bits.

Handshaking

Flow control options

Receive Error

What happens when an
error is detected.
Flag for Windows Plug
and Play active.
What RS232 signals are
used for flow control
How CTS and DSR used
Flag for multidrop active
Relationship of Busy to
ACK on the IEEE1284
interface.
Command used for
printer select and
deselect (Microline and
M50 only)
What character set is
used for a default.
Is the zero slashed, unslashed or defined by
the language set.
Sets the size of the
default font
Sets the default
characters per inch

Windows PnP
DTR/RTS Signal
CTS/DSR Signal
Multidrop Mode
Busy-to-ACK

Select/Deselect

Code Page or
Language Set
Zero

Font
CPI

Page 66

Options
Ithaca PcOS, Epson TMTXX, ESC/POS,
Microline, Ithaca M50
TM-T85, TM-T88II, TMT88III, TM-T90

Default
Ithaca PcOS

10 to 40

24

10 to 40

12

Monochrome, Red,
Green, or Blue
-50 to + 50

None

300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600,115200
7 bit or 8 bit
Even, Odd, No Parity
1 or 2 Stop Bits
Ready/Busy
Xon/Xoff
None
Prints ?
Ignores the data.
Enabled,
Disabled
DTR, RTS, or Both DTR
and RST
None (Not used)
Off, A, B, or C Address
ACK while Busy
ACK in Busy
ACK after Busy
DC3/DC1
DC1/DC3

19200

See appendix

0 or 437

Slashed
Un-Slashed
Follow Language set
9x24, 10x24, 13x24, or
15x24
Value may be form 10 to
24 characters per inch

Defined by the language
set.

Rev C

TM-T88II

0

8 Bit, No parity, 1 Stop
bit
Ready/Busy

Prints ?
Enabled.
Both DTR and RTS
None (Not used)
Off
ACK in Busy

DC3/DC1

12 x 24
15

28-07764

Configuring Your ITherm® 280 Printer

Smoothing
Paper Width

Bar Code Width
10CPI (DC2)
ESC v
nINIT/ENQ<10>
Carriage Return

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Flag for whether scaled
characters smoothed.
Width of the paper
installed.

Enabled, Disabled

Enabled

80 or 58 mm paper and
print zone from 608 to
256 dots
1 to 8

80 mm and 576 dots.

Normal, Ignore LF,
Ignore CR ,
Add LF to CR,
Add CR to LF,
Add to Both,
Use CR as Print
Normal: Cover open,
paper out, and buffer
full.
Buffer full only.
6, 7.5, or 8 lines per
inch.
40 Characters
256 Characters
1024 Characters
2048 Characters
4096 Characters
8192 Characters
One Line

Ithaca Emulation:
Normal
Epson Emulation: Ignore
CR.
Axiohm Emulation: Use
CR as Print.
Normal.

This option will select a
paper type by brand
name.

Generic Black
Generic Color
Custom Black
Custom Color
Optima POS
Kanzaki P-320
Kanzaki P-350
Kanzaki P-320RB
Kanzaki P-320GB
Kanzaki P-320BB
Appleton RB100-2.3
Appleton GB100-2.3
Appleton BB100-2.3

Generic Black

This sets the
temperature that the pint
head tries to maintain.
The printer uses an 80W
internal supply. If an
external supply is used,
this adjustment will limit
the printer to the power
indicated.
This options sets the
default form feed page
length.
The Microline option has
two potential cash
drawer commands

See the section on Head
pre-heat later in the
manual.
60 to 120 Watts

25

Default barcode line
width.

This option defines how
CR and LF characters
are used.

Off-Line Option

This option defines what
conditions place the
printer off line.

Line Spacing

How many lines per inch
are printed by default.
This option specifies
how large the input
buffer is.

Input Buffer

Print Energy Control
Paper

PreHeat Temp.

Power Supply

Page Length

Cash Drawer CMD

28-07764

3

Ithaca Emulation: 8
Most others: 6
8192 Characters

80

0 – 60 lines.
0 disables the form feed

40

ESC +
BEL

BEL

Rev C

Page 67

Configuring Your ITherm® 280 Printer

CD ESC BEL Parm.

Microline Mode
Cash Drawer Time

Cash Drawer Sense

External User Store

Electronic Journal

External User Store

EJ Manual Print

EJ Record Numbers

User Store

On/Off Switch
Audio Alert

Cutter Option

Pre-Cut Feed or Tear
Point Adjust

Cutter Speed

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

The Microline Emulation
has the option of using
the ESC BEL command
to operate the cash
drawer
There are three
Microline modes
The cash drawer fire
time is adjustable in the
Ithaca emulation.
The sense of the cash
drawer open status can
be reversed.
Flag for user store in use
or configurable. If the
user store is in use and
has data in it, it can not
be reconfigured.
This specifies the
amount of external flash
available for the
electronic journal or user
data space.
This indicates the
amount of external flash
that is available for user
storage (Graphics and
characters.)
This sets whether or not
the manual electronic
journal options are
available.
This options sets
weather or not the
record number is printed
with journal entries.
This option sets a lock
on user store that
prevents any changes to
the data.
This option disables the
On/Off switch
This option configures
the operation of the
audio alert
This activates or
deactivates the auto
cutter
This option sets how
much the cut point is
adjusted before the auto
cut or manual tear-off.
This option adjusts the
auto cutter speed to
allow the use of thicker
paper.

Enabled
Disabled

Disabled

M50, M50 Plus, OKI
ML192
10 to 250 Ms

M50

Normal,
Inverted

Normal

In use or configurable.

Not Settable.

1 to 31 64K blocks

2

1 to 31 64K Blocks

This is not settable. It
equals 32 – the
Electronic Journal
setting.

Enabled
Disabled

Enabled

Enabled
Disabled

Enabled

Unlocked
Locked

Unlocked

Enabled
Disabled
Off, 50 ms to 1 Second
in 50 mSec steps

Enabled

Active
Inactive

Active if the printer is
equipped with an auto
cutter.
0

0 or none to 20 mm.

130 to 80 where 80 is
the slowest speed.

250 Ms

250 mS

100

Note: There are other features that may be configurable. It is intended
that if you need to change them, you will contact TransAct Technical
support for assistance.

Page 68

Rev C

28-07764

Configuring Your ITherm® 280 Printer

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Remote Configuration
Remote configuration is provided for all printers, and is accessed through a series of
extended diagnostic and configuration commands. The TransAct universal configuration
program will allow the configuration to be read, edited, and written back to the printer. It
will also allow the configuration of one printer to be recorded and replicated over a
number of printers. The program is available from TransAct Technical Support or by
downloading it from the Internet – consult the section On-line Technical Support for
further details.

Setting up for Color Paper
The iTherm® 280 may be configured to print two color thermal paper. For good print
quality, the printer should be configured to print the paper being used. If the paper you
are using is included in the list of papers displayed during printer configuration, that
configuration should be used. If not, the printer should be set to Generic Color. If this
does not produce acceptable print quality, you may select Custom Color.

Custom Color
When using Custom Color, start with a read setting of about 0.12 mJ/sq.mm and a black
energy of 0.24 mJ/sq.mm. First, adjust the black level to produce acceptable black print.
DO NOT EXCEED 0.40 mJ/sq.mm, or the paper may start to stick to the
print head and cause paper jams. Setting the Black energy too high will
also slow the printer down. All color papers tested by TransAct will
operate with black levels less than 0.35 mJ/sq.mm. When the Black
energy is set, adjust the Color value.
NEVER exceed the Black energy with the Color energy. The color level
can be very critical. Do not attempt to make the color darker by increasing
the energy to the point where black starts to appear, the print quality will
not be consistent.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 69

chapter

6
Programming Codes

28-07764

Rev C

Page 71

This page intentionally left blank

Page 72

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Programming Codes

Control Codes Overview

This Programmer's Guide is designed to help users of the iTherm® 280 printer develop
applications. iTherm® 280 Printers are specialized point-of-sale printers that have
several features not normally found on general-purpose printers. Because of these
special features, iTherm® 280 Printers have unique control codes. This programmer's
guide documents the control codes that are unique to the iTherm® 280 Printer.

Nomenclature
When describing control codes, confusion often occurs as to whether the description is
decimal, hexadecimal, or ASCII. To minimize the problem, this programmer’s guide uses
the following nomenclature when describing control code sequences.
[ ]

Encloses a control character. [ ] represents a single, 8-bit value as
defined in the standard ASCII tables. The ASCII Code Table in Appendix
B lists the control codes. An example would be [ESC], which would
represent a 1BH or 27 decimal.

< >

Encloses an 8-bit value in decimal format. The value is from zero to 255.
An example is <2>, which represents 02H or 2 decimal.



Indicates a variable parameter. The variable parameter, , can have a
value from zero to 255. The meaning of  is described and defined in
the description of the command.

 

Indicates that there are two parameters,  and , where both can
have values from zero to 255.

 

Is an Ithaca® Printer Control Language (IPCL) parameter consisting of
two digits where  and  are ASCII characters from zero to nine.
The parameter is combined to form a value from zero to 99. If  is
included, the parameter is combined to be from zero to 999. If two values
are specified, there must be two bytes added to the IPCL code. That is, if
the command specifies   and the desired value is five, it must
be specified as 05.

x

All other characters in control strings represent ASCII characters. For
example, [ESC] 1 represents 1BH followed by 31H.

In many cases, applications require that control sequences be specified in hexadecimal
or decimal codes. In most cases, commands are specified in ASCII, hexadecimal, and
decimal. The ASCII Code Table in Appendix B (page 324) lists ASCII, hexadecimal, and
decimal equivalents.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 73

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Programming Codes

Standard Emulation
The standard control codes for the iTherm® 280 Printer are extensions and subsets of
the PcOS IBM emulation provided on other Ithaca® products. In some cases, an
application designed for a Series 50 Printer with IBM code sets will function with a
iTherm® 280 Printer.

IPCL Codes
Ithaca® Printer Control Language (IPCL) codes are part of PcOS and designed to control
a printer without using control characters (i.e. characters less than 20H). Only the
standard PcOS emulation supports IPCL.
In rare cases, an IPCL code will interfere with the text that is to be printed. The IPCL
translator can be disabled with an [ESC] y <4> command.

EPOS Emulation
ESC/POS4 is referred to here as EPOS. The iTherm® 280 Printer supports two Epson
emulations. One emulation is for the TM-T88, and the other is an enhanced TM-T90
emulation.
Specific EPSON compatibility features, such as its Automated Status Back
(ASB) feature, are available as an option from TransAct Technologies.
Command codes pertaining to these features are documented as
“licensed” within the command description.
It is intended that the standard Ithaca® PcOS emulation be used for new
applications. Not all features of iTherm® 280 Printers are supported by EPOS –
specifically, the ability to print color horizontal graphics is not supported.

Axiohm
The printer contains an Axiohm A793 emulation that will allow the printer to replace an
Axiohm thermal print in most applications. Note that the iTherm® 280 does not support
the printer configuration commands provided in the A793 Printer. The iTherm® 280
should be configured through the keypad or with the TransAct configuration program.

Ithaca® Microline Emulation
The iTherm® 280 printer supports several Microline emulations. These emulations allow
the iTherm® 280 Printer to replace some older Ithaca® M50 printers with Microline
commands. This emulation is not documented here. Refer to our Microline Emulation
Programmer’s Guide (12-03244) for more information.

Application Development
To aid application development, several chapters in this manual are designed to help the
programmer understand the iTherm® 280 Printer. The next chapter provides a detailed
description of each of the commands. Subsequent chapters provide explanations of
4

ESC/POS is a registered trademark of the Seiko Epson Corporation.

Page 74

Rev C

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Programming Codes

how the printer works, including a description of the internal print buffer, communications
link, and interaction between the host computer and printer.

Ithaca Control Codes and Commands
Throughout this Programmer's Guide, charts and tables list commands and features. In
most cases, the charts cross-reference the page that describes the command. Code
summary charts, arranged by code and function, are provided to help quickly find
commands.

PcOS Printer Control Codes
The following section defines the iTherm® 280 Ithaca® PcOS emulation. The native,
Ithaca® PcOS emulation provides the most flexibility and control over the printer. It is
consistent with most previous Ithaca® PcOS products, and should be used when the
printer is placed in a new application.
One new feature in the iTherm® 280 Printer is the ability to print color graphics, and the
control codes for color graphics are all new. Due to the complexity of color graphics,
TransAct provides several drivers to integrate into your application. TransAct does not
recommend that you generate drivers. In addition, TransAct has created several tools
that can be used to generate and maintain graphic images and files for print on the
iTherm® 280. Information about drivers and tools are available on the TransAct web site
and on a TransAct Software Developer’s Toolkit. For more information about either of
these options, contact Technical Support.

28-07764

Rev C

Page 75

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Programming Codes

Quick PcOS Reference Chart
Description
Low Level paper Motion
Line feed.
Carriage return.
Horizontal Motion
Back space.
Horizontal tab.
Set horizontal tab stops.
Set horizontal position.
Set justification.
n=0 Left
n=1 Center
n=2 Right
n=8 Left (No line feed)
n=9 Center (No line feed)
n=10 Right (No line feed)
Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops.
Set left/right print margins.
n1 = Left margin, n2 = Right margin
Select Minimum character Height and
Width in points
Select Minimum character Height and
Width in ¼ points
Vertical Motion
Perform a fine line feed.

ASCII

Hex

IPCL equivalent
code

Page

[LF]

0AH

&%LF

82

[CR]

0DH

&%CR

82

[BS]

08H

&%BS

83

[HT]

09H

&%HT

83

[ESC] D  
...  <0>
[ESC] n  

1BH,44H

none

83

1BH,6EH

84

[ESC] a 

1BH,61H

&%HP
 
&%JR {n=2}
&%JC {n=1}
&%JL {n=0}

84

[ESC] R

1BH,52H

&%HV

[ESC] X 

1BH,58H

none

161

84

[ESC] + P

1BH 50H

none

278

[ESC] + p

1BH 70H

none

278

[ESC] J 

1BH,4AH

85

[ESC] 0

1BH,30H

&%FM 
 
&%ST

[ESC] 1

1BH,31H

&%SG

86

[ESC] 2

1BH,32H

none

87

[ESC] 3 

1BH,33H

85

Set variable line spacing to n/72 inch.
Feed  lines at current spacing.

[ESC] A 

1BH,41H

&%SV 
 
none

[ESC] d 

1BH,64H

Set vertical tab stops.

[ESC] B  
... 0
[VT]
[FF]

Set 1/8-inch line spacing.
Set 7/72-inch line spacing.
Begin variable line spacing. (Enable [ESC]
A ).
Set variable line spacing to n/216 inch.

86

86

1BH,42H

&%FL 

none

88

0BH

&%VT

88

0CH

&%FF

89

[ESC][VT]

1BH,0BH

None

91

[ESC] 4

1BH,34H

&%TF

89

[ESC] C 

1BH,43H

89

Select Minimum character Height and
Width in points
Select Minimum character Height and
Width in ¼ points
Begin auto line feed. (n=0, end n=1)

[ESC] + P

1BH 50H

&%SL 

none

278

[ESC] + p

1BH 70H

none

278

[ESC] 5 

1BH,35H

Set form length in inches.

[ESC] C [NUL] 

1BH,43H

&%CA {n=0}
&%MA {n=1}
&%SI 


Vertical tab.
Form feed.
Feed to black dot
Set top of form.
Set form length in lines.

Page 76

Rev C

87

90
89

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Programming Codes

Description

ASCII

Hex

Reverse line feed.

[ESC] ]

1BH,5DH

Character Pitch
Set character spacing in points

[ESC]+I

None

276

Set character spacing in ¼ points

[ESC]+i

None

277

Set character spacing in points with
adjustment
Set character spacing in ¼ points with
adjustment
Begin 10 CPI character pitch.
Begin 12 CPI character pitch.
Begin 17 CPI character pitch.
Set character pitch.

[ESC]+J

1BH 2BH
49H
1BH 2BH
69H
1BH 2BH
4AH

None

277

1BH 2BH
6AH

None

278

[ESC]+j

IPCL equivalent
code
&%LR

Page
90

[DC2]

12H

&%F3

93

[ESC] :

1BH,3AH

&%F2

93

[SI]

0FH

&%F1

93

[ESC] [ P 

&%F

94

none

95

Set inter-character spacing.
Begin 24 CPI character pitch
Select Minimum character Height and
Width in ¼ points
Set left/right print margins.
n1 = Left margin, n2 = Right margin
Character Font
Select font

[ESC] V 

1BH,5BH,
50H
1BH,56H

[ESC][SI]

1BH,0FH

&%F4

93

[ESC] + p

1BH 70H

none

278

[ESC] X 

1BH,58H

none

161

[ESC] + 3 

none

270

Select font by name

[ESC] + N
Filename<0>
[ESC] + S 
 …
[ESC] + B 

none

271

none

270

none

279

none

278
278

Select Minimum character Height and
Width in points
Select Minimum character Height and
Width in ¼ points
Begin 12 x 12 draft print.

[ESC] + P

1BH 2BH
31H
1BH 2BH
4EH
1BH 2BH
53H
1BH 2BH
42H
1BH 50H

[ESC] + p

1BH 70H

none

[ESC] # <0>

&%QT

96

Set print quality mode.
n=0 Draft (12 x 12)
n=1 Large draft (12 x 14)
n=2 NLQ (24 x 16)
n=3 NLQ (24 x 16)
n=4-7 Repeats 0-3
Begin rotated font. (See command
description).

[ESC] I 

1BH,23H,
00H
1BH,49H

&%QT {n=0}
&%QU {n=1}
&%QL {n=2}
&%QS {n=3}

96

[ESC] P 

1BH,50H

97

Select character code page.

[ESC] [ T  

Insert Euro character.

[ESC] [ C 

Print control character.

[ESC] ^ 

1BH,5BH,
54H
1BH,5BH,
43H
1BH,5EH

&%RI
&%RF
&%RN
&%CP 
  
&%EU

Redefine character set.

[ESC] [ S …

Define user-defined characters.

[ESC] =  
…
[ESC] > 

Define Stacked Font
Set stroke font Brush Size

Enable user-defined characters.
Cancel user-defined characters.

28-07764

[ESC] $

Rev C

1BH,5BH,
53H…
1BH,3DH

&%CC 
 

101
102
102
104

none

105

1BH,3EH

none

106

1BH,24H

none

106

Page 77

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Programming Codes

Description

ASCII

Hex

Print control character.

[ESC] ^ 

1BH,5EH

Print Unicode character

[ESC] “ 

1BH,22H

[ESC] c 

1BH,63H

&%CL 

107

[SO]

0EH

&%MW

107

[DC4]

14H

&%MN

107

[ESC] W 

1BH,57H

&%FS {n=0}
&%FD {n=1}
&%FH {n=3}

108

[ESC] _ 

1BH,5FH

&%CO {n=0}
&%MO {n=1}

108

[ESC] - 

1BH,2DH

&%CU {n=0}
&%MU {n=1}

110

[ESC] G

1BH,47H

&%ME

110

[ESC] H

1BH,48H

&%CE

110

[ESC] E

1BH,45H

&%MM

110

[ESC] F

1BH,46H

&%CM

111

[ESC] [ @ ...

1BH,5BH,
40H…
1BH,53H,
00H
1BH,53H,
01H
1BH,54H

&%DH
&%SH
&%SP

109

&%SB

111

&%SE

111

1BH,25H,
47H
1BH,25H,
48H

&%MI

112

&%CI

112

[ESC] t 

1BH,74H

&%PM 

114

[ESC] o  …

1BH,6FH

[FF]

0CH

&%FF

122

[ESC] K  

1BH,4BH

none

123

[ESC] L  

1BH,4CH

none

123

[ESC] Y  

1BH,59H

none

123

[ESC] Z  

1BH,5AH

none

124

[ESC] U 

1BH,55H

&%GU {n=1}
&%GB {n=0}

125

[ESC] *  

[ESC] ? 

1BH,2AH

none

124

1BH,3FH

none

124

Character Attributes
Select color.
Begin one-line double-wide print.
Cancel one-line double-wide print.
Multi-line double-wide double-high mode.
n=0 Standard mode
n=1 Double-wide
n=2 Double-high
3 = Both
Enable/disable Strike Through.
n=0 End
n=1 Begin
Begin underline mode.
n = 0 End
n = 1 Begin
Begin enhanced print.
End enhanced print.
Begin emphasized print.
End emphasized print.
Set print style. (See command description.)
Select superscript.

[ESC] S <0>

Select subscript.

[ESC] S <1>

End superscript or subscript.
Begin italics.

[ESC] T

End italics.

[ESC] % H

Rotated Print
Page Mode
Select page mode
Set page mode page position
Exit page mode
APA Graphics
Print single-density graphics.
=0...255
=0…3
len= + 256 * 
Print half-speed double-density graphics.
Print full-speed double-density graphics.
Print quad-density graphics.
Select bidirectional or unidirectional print.
n=0 Bidirectional
n=1 Unidirectional
Print graphics in mode .
Reassign graphic mode.
Two Color Graphics

Page 78

[ESC] % G

Rev C

IPCL equivalent
code
&%CC 
 
&%PU 
  


Page
102
102

111

122

28-07764

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Programming Codes

Description

ASCII

Hex

Process horizontal graphics data.

[ESC] h 
 

[ESC] *  <0>
<0>

1BH,68H

IPCL equivalent
code
none

1BH,2AH

none

128

132

&%UF

135

&%UQ
<0>
&%UQ
<0>
&%GP

136

Start macro record.

[ESC] g <1>

&%GS

138

Stop macro record.

[ESC] g <2>

&%GE

138

Stop macro record and save.

[ESC] g <3>

1BH,1FH,
62H
1BH,1FH,
6DH
1BH,1FH,
65H
1BH,1FH,
6CH
1BH,1FH,
63H
1BH,1FH,
72H
1BH,1FH,
6DH
1BH,1FH,
64H
1BH,1FH,
66H,00H
1BH,1FH,
66H,00H
1BH,1FH,
72H
1BH,1FH,
72H
1BH,67H,
00H
1BH,67H,
01H
1BH,67H,
02H
1BH, 67H,
03H

&%UB
<0>
&%UM
<0>
&%UG
<0>
&%UL
<0>
&%UC
<0>
&%UR
<0>
&%US
<0>
&%UD
<0>
&%UF

Process user macro.

[ESC] [US] b
 <0>
[ESC] [US] m
 <0>
[ESC] [US] e
 <0>
[ESC] [US] l
 <0>
[ESC] [US] c
 <0>
[ESC] [US] r
 <0>
[ESC] [US] s
 <0>
[ESC] [US] d
 <0>
[ESC] [US] f ALL
<0>
[ESC] [US] t ALL
<0>
[ESC] [US] q
 <0>
[ESC] [US] ?
 <0>
[ESC] g <0>

&%GW

138

[ESC] b  ...
[ETX]

1BH,62H

&%25 {n=0}
&%39 {n=1}
&%12 {n=2}
&%UP {n=3}
&%EA {n=4}
&%UE {n=5}
&%E8 {n=6}
&%93 {n=7}

139

[ESC] [EM] E 

[ESC] [EM] B 

1BH 19H
45H
1BH,19H,
42H

none

146

&%BH


147

[ESC] [EM] W 

1BH 19H
57H
1BH,19H,
4AH

&%BW 

147

&%BJ

147

Set horizontal graphic mode.
User Store
Begin named macro record.
Save macro data in user store.
End named macro record.
Load item from user store.
Save user-defined characters.
Run macro data from user store.
Flag item as a start-up macro.
Delete item from user store.
Flush information from user store.
Transfer user store to extended user store
Report on user store.
Return a report on user store

Bar Codes
Print bar code.
n=0 Interleave 2 of 5
n=1 Code 39
n=2 Code 128
n=3 UPC A
n=4 EAN-13
n=5 UPC E
n=6 EAN-8
n= 7 Code 93
n = 8 Codabar
PDF 417 bar code control
Set bar code height.
n=0 Restore defaults
n=1 - 9 Number of passes
(0.11 inch per pass)
Set bar code width
Set bar code justification, HRI print mode,
and print direction.
Unicode

28-07764

[ESC] [EM] J 

Rev C

Page
127

133
133
134
133
134
134
134
135

136
138

Page 79

iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide

Programming Codes

Description

ASCII

Hex

IPCL equivalent
code
none

Page

Initiate Unicode UTF-16BE encoding

[ESC] + H

1BH 2BH
48H

Initiate Unicode UTF-16LE encoding

[ESC] + L

1BH 2BH
4CH

none

271

Initiate Unicode UTF-8 encoding (MBCS)

[ESC] + M

1BH 2BH
4DH

none

271

Initiate Unicode UTF-8 Text only encoding
(MBCS)
Initiate normal 8-bit ASCII character
encoding
File System Commands
Open File

[ESC] + T

1BH 2BH
54H

none

272

[ESC] + A

1BH 2BH
41H

none

272

283

none

284

Return Free Space for Partition

[ESC][RS] s

none

284

Return Last File Command Status

[ESC][RS] ?

none

286

Close File

[ESC][RS] C

none

285

Close All Files

[ESC][RS] K

none

285

Open File

none

283

none

285

none

286

none

287

File Directory File

[ESC][RS] O
FileName<0>
[ESC][RS] A 
FileName<0>
[ESC][RS] W 
 
[ESC][RS] R 

[ESC][RS] I

none

287

Delete all Files in partition

[ESC][RS] E 

none 287 De-fragment File system [ESC][RS] F 1BH 1EH 4FH 1BH 1EH 53H 1BH 1EH 73H 1BH 1EH 3FH 1BH 1EH 43H 1BH 1EH 4BH 1BH 1EH 4FH 1BH 1EH 41H 1BH 1EH 57H 1BH 1EH 52H 1BH 1EH 49H 1BH 1EH 45H 1BH 1EH 46H none Return Free Space for Open File [ESC][RS] O FileName<0> [ESC][RS] S none 287 Set/Clear File Attributes Write File Data Read File Data Electronic Journal Electronic journal initialize and set password Electronic journal erase the electronic journal Print the electronic journal Report the electronic journal Electronic journal begin entry Electronic journal suspend entry Electronic journal resume entry Electronic journal end entry Electronic journal mode begin (journal station) Miscellaneous Commands Disable paper out sensor. Enable paper out sensor. Page 80 271 [ESC][GS]I <0> 1BH 1DH 49H %&EI 151 [ESC][GS]E <0> 1BH 1DH 45H &%EC 151 [ESC][GS]P< S l> < Ll> [ESC][GS]R< Sl> < Sh>< Ll> ESC]l <3> 1BH 1DH 50H 1BH 1DH 52H 1BH 6CH &%EP 152 &%EQ 152 [ESC]l <2> 1BH 6CH &%ES 160 [ESC]l <1> 1BH 6CH &%ER 160 [ESC]l <0> 1BH 6CH &%EE 160 [ESC]{ 1BH 7BH None 159 [ESC] 8 1BH,38H &%PF 161 [ESC] 9 1BH,39H &%PO 161 Rev C %&EB 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Description ASCII Hex Set left/right margins. n1 = Left margin n2 = Right margin Clear print buffer. Query marker. Open cash drawer. n=1 Cash Drawer 1 n=2 Cash Drawer 2 [ESC] X 1BH,58H IPCL equivalent code none Page [CAN] 18H &%RP 162 [ESC] q 1BH,71H none 162 [ESC] x 1BH,78H &%D1 {n=1} &%D2 {n=2} 163 Perform Auto Cut Audio alert. Configure audio alert. [ESC] v 1BH,76H &%FC 163 [BEL] 07H &%BL 164 [ESC] [BEL] 1BH,07H none 164 Print suppress and data pass through. Initialize printer. Enable paper error mode operation. [ESC] < 1BH,3CH &%PT 166 [ESC] @ 1BH,40H none 163 [ESC] p 1BH,70H &%PE 164 Enable dynamic response Begin multi-drop control. Inquire status. (Refer to command descriptions.) [ESC] w 1BH,77H none 154 [SOH] 01H none 170 [ENQ] 05H none 172 161 Inquire cash drawer 1 status Control Periodic Status [ENQ] <1> 05H01H none 172 [ESC][EM]P none 179 Control Periodic Status [ESC][EM]p 1BH, 19H, 50H 1BH, 19H, 70H none 179 Extended Diagnostics Set control feature commands. [ESC] y 1BH,79H 167 Extended diagnostics. [ESC] ~ 1BH,7EH &%Y0 - 9 or &%YX (for numbers >9) none 28-07764 Rev C 168 Page 81 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Low Level Paper Motion Control Print/Paper Motion [CR] Carriage return ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [CR] 0DH <13> &%CR 0DH Description The [CR] command prints the contents of the print buffer (if any) and resets the next character print position to the left margin. A line feed is not performed unless auto-feed is active. The print rotation direction and the left margin command define the left margin. [LF] Line feed ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [LF] 0AH <10> &%LF 0AH Description The [LF] command prints the contents of the buffer (if any) and advances paper one line at the current default line spacing. The next character print position is not reset to the left margin unless auto-CR is active. Page 82 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Horizontal Motion Control Several commands can be used to control the horizontal position of characters. Many applications use space control to position fields. However, the iTherm® 280 Printer has the ability to control character position with horizontal tab stops. This is done using the horizontal tab [HT] to move to those tab stops. [HT] Horizontal tab ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [HT] 09H <9> &%HT [HT] Description The [HT] command inserts spaces in the print buffer up to the next tab stop. The default tab locations are every eight spaces. [BS] Back space ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [BS] 08H <8> &%BS [BS] Description The [BS] command moves the print buffer one character width to the left. The pointer position cannot be moved to the left of the left margin. [BS] does not cause the buffer to be printed; rather, the following data is OR'ed with the previous data. [ESC] D Set horizontal tab stops ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] D ... 0 1BH 44H ... 00H <27> <68> ... <0> none [ESC] D ... 0 Description The [ESC] D ... 0 command sets tab stops at the character columns specified by . The end of the settings is specified by a <0>. All previously set tabs will be cleared. The restore-default procedure other than to re-specify the tabs. Column sizes are in accordance with the current character pitch. Setting tabs that are beyond the station width is possible. A [CR] is inserted when the tab is used. Printing begins at the home position. The power up default is every eight spaces, i.e., 9, 17, 25, and so on. 28-07764 Rev C Page 83 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] R Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] R 1BH 52H <27> <82> &%HV none Description The [ESC] R command resets horizontal and vertical tab stops to the power up configuration. The power up horizontal default is every eight spaces, i.e., 9, 17, 25, and so on. The vertical default is every line. [ESC] a Set Justification ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] a 1BH 61H <27> <97> &%JL, &%JC, &%JR [ESC] a Description Where The [ESC] a command sets the horizontal justification. 0 = Left justified &%JL 1 = Center justified &%JC 2 = Right justified &%JR 8 = Left justified (no line feed) None 9 = Center justified (no line feed) None 10 = Right justified (no line feed) None The print format of the printer can be right, center, or left justified. The value of specifies the justification. The power on default is left justified. Note: The justify commands do not affect graphics. [ESC] n Set horizontal position ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] n 1BH 6EH <27> <110> &%HP [ESC]$ Description The [ESC] command sets the print position to + * 256 in 1/196 inches. Page 84 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Vertical Motion Control [ESC] j Perform a fine line feed ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] J 1BH 4AH <27> <74> &%FM [ESC] J Description The [ESC] J command prints the contents of the buffer and performs a line feed of n/216 inch. The default line spacing value is not changed. The next character print position is reset to the left margin if the Auto-CR mode is set. Notes: • In EPOS mode, the command performs feeds in n/144-inch increments. • Immediately after APA graphics, the command is adjusted for the difference between 72 dpi graphics and 96 dpi print. [ESC] 3 Set variable line spacing to n/216 inch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] 3 1BH 33H <27> <51> &%SV [ESC] 3 Description The [ESC] 3 command sets the default line spacing to n/216 inch. Set n = 1 to 255. The line feed spacing used by [LF] is set to values other than 1/8 or 7/72 inch. The command takes effect immediately. Note: In EPOS mode, the command performs line feeds in n/144-inch increments. 28-07764 Rev C Page 85 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] 0 Set line spacing to 1/8 inch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] 0 1BH 30H <27> <48> &%ST [ESC] 2 Description The [ESC] 0 command sets the default line spacing to 1/8 inch (27/216 inch), which is the standard eight lines per inch line spacing at initial power-up. Note: In EPOS mode, the command sets 1/6-inch spacing or six lines per inch. [ESC] 1 Set line spacing to 21/216 inch or 7/72 inch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] 1 1BH 31H <27> <49> &%SG none Description The [ESC] 1 command sets the default line spacing to 21/216 inch. Use 21/216-inch line spacing for all-points-addressable (APA) graphics printing. [ESC] A Set variable line spacing to n/72 inch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] A 1BH 41H <27> <65> none none Description The [ESC] A command sets the default line spacing to n/72. Set n = 1 to 85. Variable line spacing does not take effect until enabled by the [ESC] 2 command. The command is provided to maintain backward compatibility with the Ithaca® Series 50, OKIDATA, IBM, and other printers. It can also be used to print on preprinted forms. Page 86 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] 2 Enable [ESC] A variable line spacing ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] 2 1BH 32H <27> <50> none none Description The [ESC] 2 command is a companion to the [ESC] A command and puts the specified line spacing into effect. It remains in effect until another line spacing command is issued. [ESC] d Feed lines at the current spacing ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] d 1BH 64H <27> <100> &%FL [ESC] d Description The [ESC] d command prints the contents of the buffer (if any) and performs line feeds at the current line spacing. The command does not change the default line spacing value. The next character print position is reset to the left margin. Note: The IPCL command prints from 00 to 99 lines. For example, if you wish to feed 12 lines, the IPCL command would be as follows: &%FL12. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Reverse feed lines at the current spacing [ESC] e 1BH 65H <27> <101> &%FB [ESC] e The [ESC] e command prints the contents of the buffer (if any) and performs reverse line feeds at the current line spacing. The command does not change the default line spacing value. The next character print position is reset to the left margin. Note: The IPCL command prints from 00 to 99 lines. For example, if you wish to feed 12 lines, the IPCL command would be as follows: &%FL12. 28-07764 Rev C Page 87 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [VT] Vertical tab ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [VT] 0BH <11> &%VT (VT) Description The printer sets a line counter to the top of the form at reset and when a set top of form command is issued. By setting vertical tab stops, various form positions can be reached with a [VT] operation. [ESC] B Set vertical tab stops ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] B ... 0 1BH 42H ... 00H <27> <66> ... <0> none [ESC] B ... 0 Description The [ESC] B ... 0 command sets tab stops at line positions specified by . The end of the setting is specified by a <0>. All previously set tabs will be cleared. If nn is less than nn-1, then the command is in error, and all of the following information is printed. In other words, tab stops must be entered sequentially in order to be accepted. A total of 64 tab stops can be specified. (The power on default is a vertical tab on every line). [ESC] R Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] R 1BH 52H <27> <82> &%HV none Description The [ESC] R command resets horizontal and vertical tab stops to power up configuration. The power up horizontal default is every eight spaces, i.e., 9, 17, 25, etc. The vertical default is every line. Page 88 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [FF] Form feed ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [FF] 0CH <12> &%FF none Description The [FF] command performs a form feed to the top of the form. Note: The form feed command can be disabled. Set the form length to zero. [ESC] 4 Set top of form ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] 4 1BH 34H <27> <52> &%TF [ESC] L Description The [ESC] 4 command sets the top of form to the current position. [ESC] C Set form length in lines ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] C 1BH 43H <27> <67> &%SL [ESC] C Description The [ESC] C command sets the form length to lines at the current line spacing. If the current page position is greater than the new page length, the command also sets the current position as the top of form. [ESC] C [NUL] Set form length in inches ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] C [NUL] 1BH 43H <0> <27> <67> <0> &%SI none Description The [ESC] C [NUL] command sets the form length to inches. If the current page position is greater than the new page length, the command also sets the current position as the top of form. If zero inches are specified, the form feed and vertical tab commands are ignored. 28-07764 Rev C Page 89 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] 5 Begin auto line feed ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL IPCL EPOS [ESC] 5 1BH 35H <27> <53> &%MA (Begin) &%CA (End) none Description The [ESC] 5 <1> command sets auto line feed mode. command ends auto line feed mode. [ESC] 5 <0> Note: The begin and end auto line feed command overrides the configuration setting. [ESC] ] ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Reverse line feed [ESC] ] 1BH 5DH <27> <93> &%LR none The [ESC] ] command performs a reverse line feed at the current line spacing. Note: The iTherm® 280 Printer can tolerate no more than 1/2 inch of reverse feed. Page 90 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Feed to Black Dot An option for the iTherm® 280 is a black dot sensor. This command is supported by a feed to black dot command. Note: This is a special order option, and requires an additional sensor and modified firmware. It is not possible to field retrofit a standard iTherm® 280 with a black dot sensor. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Where n Description Feed to Black Dot [ESC][VT] !BH,0BH, <27><11> None [GS][VT] is the number of inches to feed while looking for the black marker. The [ESC][VT] command performs feeds the paper until the black dot is positioned as configured. The iTherm keeps track of the location of the black dot and will feed paper until the black dot is positioned as configured. There are three configurable Black Dot parameters. The Dot Width, and the Offset may be adjusted to operate with a specific paper. The Calibration is preset and should not be changed. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Adjusting the width and offset of the Black Dot ESC ~ W nl nh m 1B 7E 57 nl nh m 27 126 87 nl nh m Where n= The offset adjustment of the Black dot in n/203 inches where n = nl + 256*nh. Default is 304 or 1.5 inches. Values greater than 368 will set n to 368. m = The Width of the black dot in m/203 inches. The default is 76 or 0.375 inches. Values less than 51 will be ignored. The offset adjustment is the position of the black dot in relation to the cut point. If n = 0 the cut point will be in the center of the black dot. If the value of n = 304, the cut point will be 1.5 inches above the black dot. Note: This command may be issued as part of an application. If the values in the configuration match the requested values, no operation occurs. 28-07764 Rev C Page 91 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes 0.8 (.20) to first line of print n/203 (n/8) Cut to Center of black dot m/203 (m/8) Dot Width Back of Ticket Dimensions in Inches (mm) Note: This command interacts with the Feed to Black Dot command. If the Black Dot paper Option is set, the black dot position specified by this command will be used for the Cover Close operation. Page 92 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Character Pitch Character pitch commands that set specific characters per inch (cpi) disable any rightside spacing set by the [ESC] V command. In addition, when font changes are made, the character pitch is maintained. [DC2] Begin 10 cpi character pitch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [DC2] 12H <18> &%F3 [ESC][SP] Description The [DC2] command sets 9.905 characters per inch print pitch. [ESC] : Begin 12 cpi character pitch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] : 1BH 3AH <27> <58> &%F2 [ESC] [SP] Description The [ESC] : command sets 12.235 characters per inch print pitch. [SI] Begin 17 cpi character pitch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [SI] 0FH <15> &%F1 [ESC] [SP] Description The [SI] command sets 17.333 characters per inch print pitch. [ESC] [SI] Begin 24 cpi character pitch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] [SI] 1BH 0FH <27> <15> &%F4 [ESC] [SP] Description The [ESC] [SP] command sets 23.111 characters per inch print pitch. 28-07764 Rev C Page 93 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] [ P Set character pitch ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] [ P 1BH 5BH 50H <27> <91> <80> &%F1, &%F2, &%F3, &%F4, &%F5, &%F6, &%F7 [ESC] [SP] Description The [ESC] [ P command sets character per inch print pitch to . The printer resolution limits the exact print pitch. The following table lists the exact pitch for various values on . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Resulting Characters per Inch 1.00 2.00 3.01 4.00 4.95 5.94 6.93 8.00 9.04 9.90 10.95 12.23 13.00 13.87 14.86 IPCL &%F7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 &%F3 &%F2 &%F6 Resulting Characters per Inch 16.00 17.33 17.33 18.91 20.8 20.8 23.11 23.11 23.11 23.11 26 26 26 29.71 29.71 IPCL &%F1 &%F5 &%F4 Table 10 Character Pitch This command disables any right-side spacing set by the [ESC] V command. In addition when font changes are made, the character pitch is maintained. Page 94 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] V Set inter-character spacing Mode ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Global [ESC] V 1BH 56H <27> <86> none [ESC] [SP] Description The [ESC] V command sets inter-character spacing by adding white space between characters. The value of sets the spacing in 216ths of an inch. The printer can only set the spacing in 208ths of an inch and converts 216ths to the nearest 208th of an inch. Each font has a basic size, and the inter-character spacing value is added to the basic size. Therefore, the affect of this command on characters per inch (cpi) will depend on the font selected. Note 1: The [ESC] V command disables any pitch settings established by pitch set commands that establish a cpi (like [ESC] [ P ). After a set right-side spacing command is issued, the pitch will vary with font selection. Font selections use the current, active, right-side spacing. Note 2: With the inter-character spacing command, the pitch cannot be set less than the font size. Therefore, it is not as effective as the pitch command, [ESC] [ P . The following table lists the cpi equivalent for several values of . The following table lists the cpi equivalent for several values of . 0 1 2 3 4 5 28-07764 Small Draft (cpi) Large Draft (cpi) 17.33 14.86 16 13.9 14.86 13 13.9 12.24 13 11.6 12.24 10.9 Table 11 Inter-character Spacing Rev C NLQ (cpi) 13 12.24 11.6 10.9 10.4 9.90 Page 95 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Character Font [ESC] # Begin 12 x 12 draft print mode ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] # <0> 1BH 23H 00H <27> <35> <0> &%QT [ESC] ! Description The [ESC] # <0> command begins 12 x 12 draft print mode. Draft print is provided to maintain compatibility with other Ithaca® products. [ESC] I Set print quality mode ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] I 1BH 49H <27> <73> &%QT 12 x 12 draft mode &%QU 12 x 14 large draft mode &%QL 24 x 16 near letter quality (NLQ) mode &%QS 24 x 16 near letter quality (NLQ) mode [ESC] x and/or [ESC] ! EPOS Description Where n The [ESC] I (e.g. capital “i”) command begins draft, large draft or near letter quality print mode. 0 = 12 x 12 draft 1 = 12 x 14 large draft 2 = 24 x 16 near letter quality (NLQ) 3 = 24 x 16 near letter quality (NLQ) 4 - 7 repeats 0 - 3 Draft print modes are high-speed print modes intended to provide quality print with minimal ink usage. The 12 x 12 draft font is the most efficient. The 12 x 14 large draft font produces a larger more readable character but with added ink usage. NLQ print mode is a two pass half-speed font. It provides what is generally regarded as near letter quality print at reduced speed with greater ink usage. Note 1: In EPOS mode, [ESC] x is similar to [ESC] I . [ESC] ! performs a similar function; however, NLQ is not available. Note 2: NLQ fonts cannot be rotated 90° or 270°. Note 3: Switching from draft to NLQ modes causes the printer to print all previously received information. Consequently, auto-center and right justify do not print mixed draft and NLQ font as expected. Page 96 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] P Begin rotated font/Right to left entry ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL &%RF {n=1} &%RN {n=0} EPOS [ESC] P 1BH 50H <27> <80> &%RI {n=2} Description The [ESC] P command sets the print font to a rotated 90° or 270° font. n = 0 Normal n = 1 Rotate 90° (Single pass, 12 x 12 draft) n = 2 Rotate 270° (Single pass, 12 x 12 draft) n = 5 Rotate 90° (Two pass, 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft) n = 6 Rotate 270° (Two pass, 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft) n = 8 Enter Text right to left n = 9 Enter Text right to left and Rotate 90° (Single pass, 12 x 12 draft) n = 10 Enter Text right to left and Rotate 270° (Single pass, 12 x 12 draft) n = 11 Enter Text right to left and Rotate 90° (Two pass, 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft) n = 12 Enter Text right to left and Rotate 270° (Two pass, 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft) Where n [ESC] V In Modes 1 and 2, 12 x 12 draft font is rotated 90 or 270° and printed in a single pass. Double wide and double high fonts are available. However, because the font is rotated, double wide makes the characters taller and double high makes the characters wider. Modes 1 and 2 distort the font, but they produce the fastest rotated print. Modes 5 and 6 rotate the 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft and maintain the aspect ratio of the fonts. Modes 5 and 6 require two passes by the print cartridge, which slows the print time considerably. The font that is rotated by Mode 5 or 6 is selected by the [ESC] I command. may be zero or one. NLQ fonts cannot be rotated 90° or 270°. The current pitch sets the spacing between lines. If eight characters per inch (cpi) is set, the printer produces the equivalent of eight lines per inch (lpi) rotated print. Modes 8-12 allow right to left text entry. (Note: right to left text entry is not supported in formatted rotated print mode (See the [ESC]r command for formatted rotated print.) 28-07764 Rev C Page 97 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Character Sets and Code Pages The iTherm® 280 Printer is primarily intended to be used in Unicode based systems. However to provide legacy support, the printer supports 8 bit and double byte ASCII encoding with code pages. When not using Unicode or double byte encoding, the printer is restricted to the 8 bit ASCII character set. To support international languages, the characters that are assigned to each of the 256 possible locations can be remapped to any character in the Unicode standard. Typically, the first 32 characters are reserved for control characters. The next 72 are typically fixed to alpha numeric and punctuation. The upper 128 characters are typically redefined to characters that support the specific language or country. These mappings are generally referred to as codepages. The iTherm® 280 provides several legacy commands to select a country code or codepage maps. However, they all simply select an ASCII to Unicode translation map. Several predefined mappings to provide legacy support are internal to the printer, but the majority of the maps are placed in the printer’s file system. This allows any preexisting codepage mapping to be defined as well as the ability to define custom mappings unique to your application. Codepage description files The format of the codepage description file is somewhat flexible. The basic format is that each line will specify an ASCII character ID and the Unicode character that is to appear in that ASCII ID location. The file format is one character per line with the first value being the ASCII ID and the second value being the Unicode address. The file should be something like this: 0x00 0x0000 # NULL 0x01 0x0001 # START OF HEADING 0x02 0x0002 # START OF TEXT 0x03 0x0003 # END OF TEXT ... or \Language = USA \Code Page = 437 0x00 0x0000 ;0 NULL 0x01 0x263A ; 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 0x263B ; 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 0x2665 ; 9829 BLACK HEART SUIT 0x04 0x2666 ; 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 0x2663 ; 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT ... or 0 0 ; NULL 1 9786 ; WHITE SMILE 2 9787 ; BLACK SMILE 3 9829 ; BLACK HEART SUIT 4 9830 ; BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 5 9827 ; BLACK CLUB SUIT Page 98 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes ... or SYMBOL SET = WE /name = Windows 3.1 Latin 2 /pcl char = E ... /symbols = 32 0x0020 ; Space Code, Prntabl Thin Space 33 0x0021 ; Exclamation 34 0x0022 ; Neutral Double Quote 5 0x0023 ; Number 36 0x0024 ; Dollar ... or \Language = USA \Code Page = 437 0x00 0x0000 ;0 NULL 0x01 0x263A ; 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 0x263B ; 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 0x2665 ; 9829 BLACK HART SUIT 0x04 0x2666 ; 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 0x2663 ; 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT ... or \Language = USA \Code Page = 437 0x00 = 0x0000 ;0 NULL 0x01 = 0x263A ; 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 = 0x263B ; 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 = 0x2665 ; 9829 BLACK HART SUIT 0x04 = 0x2666 ; 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 = 0x2663 ; 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT Numbers beginning with 0x… are treated as hexadecimal, all other as decimal. Any line beginning with a non-numeric value is ignored. Any information after the Unicode value is ignored. Not all of the ASCII ID’s need to be present, however, only ID’s present will be affected. There are two ways to select a codepage file. The first is by using the standard code page select command. If this command is used, the file name is critical; it must follow the format of Cpxyz.CPM. The xyz is the code page number that is being selected in the command. For example CP850.CPM would be referred to as 850. If the legacy commands are to be used to select file based code page mapping, the selection mode must be selected in the printer’s configuration. The second form is by name. This command is free form and will select any file present which will then be to use it as a code page definition. If the file is not a code page file, you will get unexpected results. If the file does not exist, the command is ignored. Any extension may be used for a codepage map, however, it is best to use the .CPM extension, with a descriptive filename recommended. For example ISO8859-1.CPM would be a good choice for the ISO8859-1 code page. 28-07764 Rev C Page 99 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Double-Byte and Multi-Byte Code Page Description Files In ASCII mode the iTherm® 280 Printer supports double byte code pages. Currently there are 4 double-byte codepages available and one multi-byte. Double Byte code pages available are: Code page 932, 936, 949 and 950 Multi-byte code page available are GB18030-2000. These code pages require an appropriate Unicode font be loaded that support all the characters in the requested code page. Due to the large number of characters in these code pages. These files are not supported in a customer definable ASCII form like the Code page descriptions files described above. They are compiled and compressed into a 2 or 3 file code description set. One file is like the Code page description file in that it may be referenced just like the normal code page description files. The other two files are double byte and multibyte decode files and are referenced in the master code page description. These files not distributed with the standard printer but are available from Transact upon request. Code page selection In ASCII mode the iTherm® 280 Printer supports over 40 different international character sets by default. In IBM and EPOS printers, there are two ways of selecting a character set. One way substitute’s international characters in the upper 128 characters of a standard character set. The substitution technique supports a few different countries. However, as more and more countries were added, too many characters were being replaced, and it became a problem for the application to match the characters displayed and printed. To solve this problem, a second method of selecting a character set was developed – code pages. The printer and display use the same code page, and the application displays and prints the same characters. IBM and EPOS defined new commands to select code pages, and left the old commands in effect. The iTherm® 280 Printer supports international character sets as well as code pages. To allow the most flexibility for the application programmer, both methods are extended in the iTherm® 280 Printer. The iTherm® 280 Printer allows the IBM code page selection command to choose character sets as well as normal IBM code pages. The EPOS character set select command has been extended to allow additional character sets over and above the 11 defined by EPOS. The EPOS5 code page select command has not been extended because there is no EPOS definition beyond the first six ID’s. All characters in code pages as well as character sets are addressed as zero through 255. (Characters below 32 must be addressed with the [ESC] ^ command.) Code pages may be changed at any time and are active for all features including rotated print. 5 Epson provides limited code page support through ID to code page translation. Only six translations are defined. Page 100 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes To allow other code pages to be created by an application, a redefine character set command is provided. As discussed above, there are two commands for language selection in IBM mode. The first is [ESC] !, which selects one of 19 international character sets. The [ESC] ! command does not allow all of the possible character sets to be selected, it is provided for compatibility with older programs only. The second is [ESC] [ T, which selects any code page. In EPOS mode, the [ESC] R command has been expanded to select any code page. [ESC] ! Select international character set ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] ! 1BH 21H <27> <33> &%CS [ESC] R Description The [ESC] ! command selects international character set . In standard mode, the value of is as follows. 64-‘@’ 65-‘A’ 66-‘B’ 67-‘C’ 68-‘D’ 69-‘E’ 70-‘F’ 71-‘G’ 72-‘H’ Language ASCII (slashed zero) 73-‘I’ ASCII (unslashed zero) 74-‘J’ British 75-‘K’ German 76-‘L’ French 77 -‘M’ Swedish 78-‘N’ Danish 79-‘O’ Norwegian 80-‘P’ Dutch 81-‘Q’ Table 12 Language Table ID’s Language Italian French Canadian Spanish Swedish II Swedish III Swedish IV Turkish Swiss I Swiss II [ESC] [ T Select character code page ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] [ T 1BH 5BH 54H <27> <91> <84> &%CP [ESC] t Description The [ESC] [ T command selects character code page . The iTherm® 280 Printer supports many code pages. The following code pages are supported. Refer to Appendix A for a list of supported code page. 28-07764 Rev C Page 101 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Note: The code page field is a 16-bit field that is a function of the code page numbers and , e.g. ( * 256) +. For example, 1 * 256 + 181 = 437. For the IPCL command, the page is specified in ASCII as a 4-byte field. Note: If the code page is not found in the internal translation, the code page requested is translated into a code page file name and if a user defined file is found, it will be used as the code page definition. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal CodePage Description Select character code page by name. All [ESC] + C Codepage.CPM <0> 1BH 2BH 43H <27> <43> <67> File name from 5 to 30 characters. The [ESC] + C command will select and read a code page encoding file. If the file does not exist, the current code page will be selected. If the code page definition is not complete, only the character locations defined by the file will be effected. Note: Code page translations only occur in ASCII mode. This command has no effect in Unicode mode. [ESC] ^ Print control character ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] ^ 1BH 5EH <27> <94> &%CC [ESC] ^ Description The [ESC] ^ command allows characters from zero to 31 codes to be printed. During normal operation, characters from zero to 31 are control characters. The command turns off control code translation for the following character. can be from zero to 255. [ESC] “ Print Unicode character ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] “ 1BH 22H <27> <34> &%PU [ESC] “ Description The [ESC] “command allows any Unicode character to be directly addressed and inserted into the print data. can range in value from zero to 65535. [ESC] [ C Insert Euro character Page 102 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL ESC] [ C 1BH 5BH 43H <27> <91> <67> &%EU Description The [ESC] [ C command allows an application to replace any character in the currently active character set with the Euro character. The character to be replaced is defined by . For example, if the currently active character set is CP 850 (multi-lingual) and 0D5H character is to be the Euro character, "1BH 5BH 43H 0D5H" replaces the character at 0D5H with the Euro symbol. Euro Character Substitution Matrix Name 850 Turkey 857 Win Cyrillic Win Turkish Win Greek Win Hebrew Win Baltic 28-07764 Epson IBM Code Page Insertion Point (hex) 26 850 0xD5 57 857 0XD5 52 1022 0X88 51 1021 0X80 50 1020 0X80 62 1032 0X80 68 1034 0X80 Table 13 Euro Character Substitution Matrix Rev C Page 103 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] [ S Redefine character set ASCII [ESC] [ S Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 53H … Decimal <27> <91> <83> … IPCL none Description The [ESC] [ S command allows an application to replace or redefine the active character set mapping in the printer, where defines the total length of the following data: + 256 * = 1 + 2 * the total number of characters to be replaced; is the first character in the active map to be replaced 6 is the internal address of the replacement character image. The mapping of a print pattern to each character address is referred to a code page or character set. At any given time, the printer character set is comprised of 256 characters. Each character is addressed by an 8-bit value generally referred to as a character code. For example, if you want to print an ‘A’, it would be addressed by sending a <65> decimal to the printer. Sixty-five predefined code pages or character maps assign characters to a particular address built into the printer. Occasionally, an application needs to redefine a character or group of characters in a code page. The iTherm® 280 Printer allows the map for any code page to be redefined or replaced. The define character set command allows any character or group of characters to be replaced with any other printable character. Unicode addressing is used. The redefine character set command is used as follows: [ESC] [ S <3> <0> <35> <90> <1> ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ | | +- 346th Character in the Master Set | | [(1 * 256) + 90] | +------- 35th Character +--------------- 3 bytes to follow [(0 * 256) + 3] The new map remains until the printer is power cycled or the character set is redefined. The code page and character set commands completely redefine the table. 6 The internal character map is provided in the Master Character Set Definitions Guide, PN 100-9785. Page 104 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] = Define user-defined characters ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range [ESC] = [ … d(y x x1)] … [ … d (y x xk)] 1BH 3DH … <27> <51> … y = 2 or 3 32 ≤ c1 ≤ c2 ≤ 126 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 (12 x 12 font) 0 ≤ x ≤ 14 (12 x 14 font) 0 ≤ x ≤ 16 (24 x 16 font) 0 ≤ d1 … d (y x x) ≤ 255 none IPCL Description The [ESC] = [ … d(y x x1)] … [ … d (y x xk)] command defines user-defined characters from character code to . and are the configurations of a user-defined character. specifies the number of bytes in the vertical direction. specifies the number of bytes in the horizontal direction. Character code ranges from 32 (20H) to 126 (7EH) can be defined by and . Up to 32 user-defined characters can be defined. Data () specifies a bit printed to one and not printed to zero. At the default, user-defined characters are not defined and the internal character set is printed. Once the userdefined characters have been defined, they are available until [ESC] $ is executed; the user-defined characters are redefined; the power is turned off; or the printer is reset. Each internal font (draft, large draft, and NLQ) has its own 32-character storage area. If possible, the currently selected font will be used to select which user-defined font is defined. If the font being defined is not suitable for the currently selected mode, a suitable font will be temporarily selected for the definition. If = 2, the 12 x 12 draft font or the 12 x 14 large draft font can be defined. If = 3, only the 16 x 24 NLQ font can be defined. If = 2 and the NLQ font is active, the large draft userdefined font will be loaded. If = 3 and a draft font is active, the NLQ user-defined font will be loaded. 28-07764 Rev C Page 105 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] $ Cancel user-defined characters ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] $ 1BH 24H <27> <36> none Description The [ESC] $ command removes all user-defined characters from the printer’s memory. After the user-defined characters are canceled, the internal character set is printed. [ESC] > Enable user-defined characters ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range [ESC] > 1BH 3EH <27> <62> <0>, <1>, 0, or 1 1 Enables the characters 0 Disables the characters none IPCL Description Page 106 The [ESC] > command enables or disables the user-defined characters. The internal character set is printed. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Character Attributes [ESC] c Select color ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] c 1BH 63H <27> <99> &%CL none Description Where The [ESC] c command selects the print color, and should match the color of the paper installed. 0 = Black 1 = Red 2 = Green 3 = Blue [SO] Begin one-line double-wide print ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [SO] 0EH <14> &%MW none Description The [SO] command causes subsequent characters to be printed at twice the currently selected character width. For example, ten cpi becomes five cpi, 17 cpi becomes 8.5 cpi, etc. The [SO] command remains in effect until: A valid line terminator is received ([CR], [LF], or [ESC] J (fine line feed)); The command is canceled; or the maximum number of characters per line is reached and the printer performs an auto-print. [DC4] Cancel one-line double-wide print ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [DC4] 14H <20> &%MN none Description The [DC4] command cancels one-line double-wide mode set by the [SO] command and allows single- and double-wide characters to be printed on the same line. 28-07764 Rev C Page 107 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] _ Enable/Disable Strike Through ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL IPCL EPOS [ESC] _ 1BH 5FH 01H <27> <95> &%MO (Begin) &%CO (End) [ESC] ! Description The [ESC] _ <1> command begins strike through print mode. All subsequent text, leading spaces, and trailing spaces are over-scored. [ESC] _ <0> ends the mode. [ESC] W Multi-line double-wide and double-high mode ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] W 1BH 57H <27> <87> &%FD {n = 1} &%FS {n = 0} &%FHA {n = 3} (Note: Single-wide, double-high mode is not available in IPCL mode.) [ESC] ! EPOS Description The [ESC] W command controls multi-line double-wide or doublehigh mode, where n specifies the mode: n = 0 is standard single-wide and single-high; n = 1 begins double-wide; n = 2 begins double-high; and n = 3 begins double-wide double-high. Note: The [ESC] W command does not affect line spacing. Note: In EPOS mode, [ESC] ! performs a similar function; however, near letter quality (NLQ) is not available. Where n Bits 76543210 1--------1-------1----------X Page 108 Function Underline Double-wide Double-high Font: 0 = draft; 1 = large draft Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] [ @ Set print style: double-wide, double-high, italic control ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] [ @ [EOT] [NUL] [NUL] 1BH 5BH 40H 04H 00H 00H <27> <91> <64> <04> <0> <0> &%DH Double-high, double-wide, and double-space &%SH Single-high, single-wide, and single-space Also, see [ESC] W above. Description The [ESC] [ @ [EOT] [NUL] [NUL] command sets doublewide, double-high, and italic print mode. Where k bits k 76543210 ----xxxx Italic control 0 ----0000 No change 1 ----0001 Italics On 2 ----0010 Italics Off Where n bits n 76543210 ----0nnn Height multiplier (Maximum 4) 0 ----0000 No change xxxx---Line spacing 0 0000---No change Where m bits m 76543210 ----0nnn Width multiplier (Maximum 4) 0 ----0000 No change Note: The maximum height and width multiplier is four. 28-07764 Rev C Page 109 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] - Begin underline ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL IPCL EPOS [ESC] - 1BH 2DH 01H <27> <45> &%MU (Begin) &%CU (End) [ESC] ! Description The [ESC] - <1> command begins underline print mode. All subsequent text, leading spaces, and trailing spaces are underlined. [ESC] - <0> ends the mode. Note: In EPOS mode, [ESC] ! performs a similar function; however, near letter quality (NLQ) is not available. [ESC] G Begin enhanced print ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] G 1BH 47H <27> <71> &%ME [ESC] G <1> Description All subsequent text is printed in enhanced print mode (two passes with a vertical offset). Enhanced printing provides a deeper resolution of each character and may enhance multiple part forms printing. [ESC] H End enhanced print mode ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] H 1BH 48H <27> <72> &%CE [ESC] G <0> Description The [ESC] H command cancels enhanced print mode and returns to the currently selected font. [ESC] E Begin emphasized print mode ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] E 1BH 45H <27> <69> &%MM [ESC] E <1> Description The [ESC] E command begins emphasized print mode (one pass with horizontal offset). Emphasized print is bolder than normal print. Page 110 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] F End emphasized print mode ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] F 1BH 46H <27> <70> &%CM [ESC] E <0> Description The [ESC] F command cancels emphasized print mode. [ESC] S <0> Select superscript ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] S <0> 1BH 53H 00H <27> <83> <0> &%SP none Description The [ESC] S <0> command selects superscript. The following characters are printed half size on the upper side of the print line. Note: Superscript is not available in all print modes. [ESC] S <1> Select subscript ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] S <1> 1BH 53H 01H <27> <83> <1> &%SB none Description The [ESC] S <1> command selects subscript. The following characters are printed half size on the bottom side of the print line. Note: Subscript is not available in all print modes. [ESC] T End superscript or subscript ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] T 1BH 54H <27> <84> &%SE none Description The [ESC] T command ends superscript or subscript. 28-07764 Rev C Page 111 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] % G Begin italics ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] % G 1BH 25H 47H <27> <37> <71> &%MI [ESC] 4 Description The [ESC] % G command begins italic print mode. Note: Italics are not available in all print modes. [ESC] % H End italics ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] % H 1BH 25H 48H <27> <37> <72> &%CI [ESC] 5 Description The [ESC] % H command ends italic print mode. Page 112 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Page Mode The iTherm® 280i supports two operational modes, standard and page mode. In standard mode, as a line of text is received it is buffered and printed when the line feed is received. In page mode the printer waits for a complete “page” (a number of lines) to be received before printing the complete page. The advantage of page mode is that text and/or graphics can be placed anywhere on the page, in any order, and in any of 4 orientations. How to use page mode Page mode requires two phases to operate correctly. 1. Page definition a. Define the master page size either just before or just after entering page mode. b. Optionally define a sub page. The master page defines the maximum page size, all sub pages must be smaller and contained within the master page. Master and sub page definitions are always done base on the 0 degree orientation not the current rotation. c. Optionally set an orientation. This may be 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees. d. Optionally set the entry position. This is based on the current sub page and the current rotation. e. Enter text or graphics. f. Go to step b to define additional sub pages or step c to change the orientation. 2. Print the page. Page Definition The [ESC]t command will start page definition and define the initial orientation. An [ESC]t command during page definition will change the orientation and reset the entry location back to the top left corner of that orientation. 28-07764 Rev C Page 113 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Receipt or Inserted Form B>>>>> D>>>>> A>>>>> Initial entry location C>>>>> Figure 10 Page Mode Entry Orientations The [ESC] u command wet the maximum page dimensions. Note that these dimensions are always based on 0 degree rotation. Enter text and/or graphics as required. Auto-cutter and page mode You may embed an auto-cutter command with in a page definition. The auto-cut command may be placed anywhere in the page definition, however, it will be processed after the page is printed. To prevent the cut from occurring in the page, it will be preceded with a feed that will place the end of the page about 0.125 inches above the auto-cut position. Mechanism commands in page mode In general, mechanism commands received during page mode will be processed if the result will not affect the printed result. Stopping page mode definition The following operations will stop a page mode definition: 1) [ESC]@ Printer initialize command. 2) Real time reset request [ENQ]<10> 3) Turning the printer off. Printing the page The [FF] command starts the printing process. Printing starts at the current paper position. The complete page definition is printed excluding any blank information at the bottom of the page. If the [FF] command is used to print the page, the memory used to store the page image is not maintained and is released to be used by other functions. Function Page 114 Select page mode Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Programming Codes [ESC] t or [ESC] [SUB] t 1BH 74H or 1BH 1AH 74H <27><116> or <27><26><116> &%PM [ESC] L This command activates page mode and sets the orientation. This command may also be issued during page definition. When issued in page mode it resets the orientation and entry position, but does not cause the currently defined image to be erased or printed. Where x = 0 for standard orientation x = 1 for 270° Rotation x = 2 for 180° Rotation x = 3 for 90° Rotation (Direction D) Receipt or Inserted Form Initial entry location C>>>>> B>>>>> A). B) C) D>>>>> A>>>>> (Direction (Direction (Direction Note 1: This command saves the current right and left margin and sets them to the maximum values for the orientation currently defined. Note 2: During page mode definition almost all printer commands are active. The following table lists the exceptions. Command Cash drawer commands Bell command Auto cut commands Active Yes Action Immediate action Yes Delayed Electronic journal No Immediate action The printer will perform a feed to cut and then operate the auto cutter after the page is printed. The cut command may be anywhere in the definition. If the page is printed twice, the Auto cut command must be reissued after the first print to generate additional cuts. This command is like a station select and is not active. You 28-07764 Rev C Page 115 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes station select Electronic journal entries Status requests Printer initialize command Set top of form Yes Yes Yes Vertical tab No Macro definitions No No cannot store page mode images in the electronic journal. A page mode command in journal station mode will exit journal mode. You can make journal entries as part of a page description. They are saved as text and not part of the page. The status is returned during definition. Cancels page mode definition and returns the printer to standard mode. You must set the top of form outside of page mode. The form position is maintained after the page is printed. The definition of a vertical tab is ambiguous in page mode and is ignored. You can not define or delete a macro while in page mode. You can, however, invoke a macro or stored graphic. You can not enter page mode while in a macro definition. Note 3: Unless specified by a page mode set page size command, the default page size is the full paper width for about 14 inches. Printing starts at the current paper position. The complete page definition is printed excluding any blank information at the bottom of the page. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Set Print Area in Page Mode Enhanced [ESC] [SUB] S << HL> 1BH 1AH 53H << HL> <27><26><83><< HL> None [ESC] W This command Sets the position and size of the initial area in page mode and sub pages. Where: the x direction offset the y direction offset the width in dots < HL> the height in dots Min 0 Min 0 Max 576 Max 3000 This command should always be sent before or immediately after page mode is entered to define the initial page size. Once in page mode (after the [ESC]t command) the command can be sent multiple times so that several different print areas, aligned in different print directions, can be developed in the printer’s page buffer before being printed using the Print Page Mode commands (FF or ESC FF). The starting position of the print area is the upper left of the area to be printed. The Yoffset is in the y direction and is YO dots and the Xoffset is in the x direction and is XO dots in. The length of the area to be printed in the y direction is set to H dots. The length of the area to be printed in the x direction is set to W dots. The set print area command may be invoked multiple times while in page mode. The first invocation specifies the initial master page size. Following invocations will define Page 116 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes smaller windows within the initially defined page. If the Set page size command is not used, the page size will default to the maximum size. The orientation of the set print area command is always based on 0 degrees regardless of the current orientation setting. This includes if the command is sent before the start page mode command, after the start page mode command, or as a sub-page. Note: The maximum printable area in the x direction is 576/203 or 3.15 inches. Note: The maximum printable area in the y direction is 2999/203 or 14.78 inches. Note: Only the used portion of the page is printed. That is the page length will only include what actually has print data. See illustration below. YOffset

    Height < HL> Width < W L> XOffset
      Figure 11 Page mode set printable area 28-07764 Rev C Page 117 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Previous cut edge Cut to print offset 0.7 in or 18mm Start of page definition Max width is 576 dots Cut point is after bottom most print data. Bottom most print data Unused page area is not printed End of page definition Figure 12 Default Page mode printed area Page 118 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Programming Codes Set Printed Area in Page Mode Enhanced [ESC] [SUB] W << HL> 1BH 1AH 57H << HL> <27><26><87><< HL> None [ESC] W This command is similar Set Print Area in Page Mode command above, however it will force the complete page to be printer rather than only what is used. It will define sub pages, however is intended to set the initial page size. Where: the x direction offset the y direction offset the width in dots < HL> the height in dots Min 0 Min 0 Max(576) Max(3000) This command should always be sent before or immediately after select page mode command and will define the initial page size. This command differs from the Set Print Area in Page Mode command in that it does not allow the page to be shortened. The complete page is printed even if it is not used. Previous cut edge Cut to print offset 0.7 in or 18mm Start of page definition Max width is 576 dots End of page definition Bottom most print data Unused page area is not printed Cut point after bottom of page definition Figure 13 Defined Page mode printed area 28-07764 Rev C Page 119 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Set Print Area in Page Mode Legacy Support Command [ESC] u
        < HL> 1BH 75H
          < HL> <27><117>
            < HL> &%PS<0000> [ESC] W This command Sets the position and size of the printing initial area in page mode and sub pages. Where:
              the y direction offset Default(0) the width in dots Default(576) < HL> the height in dots Default(3000) This command should always be sent before or immediately after page mode is entered to define the initial page size. Once in page mode (after the [ESC]t command) the command can be sent multiple times so that several different print areas, aligned in different print directions, can be developed in the printer’s page buffer before being printed using the Print Page Mode commands (FF or ESC FF). The starting position of the print area is the upper left of the area to be printed. The offset is in the x direction and is O dots. The length of the area to be printed in the y direction is set to H dots. The length of the area to be printed in the x direction is set to W dots. (Note that the Y offset is always 0) The set print area command may be invoked multiple times while in page mode. The first invocation specifies the final page height. Following invocations will define smaller windows within the initially defined page. If the Set page size command is not used, the page size will default to the maximum size. The orientation of the set print area command is always based on 0 degrees regardless of the current orientation setting. This includes if the command is sent before the start page mode command, after the start page mode command, or as a sub-page. Note: The maximum printable area in the x direction is 576/203 or 3.15 inches. Note: The maximum printable area in the y direction is 2999/203 or 14.78 inches. Note: The printed page length will only include what actually has print data. Page 120 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Set Page Mode Entry Position [ESC] [SUB] A 1BH 1AH 41H <27><26><65> &%PY [ESC] W This command sets the horizontal and vertical entry position to anywhere on the page. It is only valid in page mode. If the value specified is beyond the page boundary, the command is ignored. (X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the [ESC]t command, and is not same as the page definition of X and Y.) The X and Y positions are in dots. Y = Yh* 256 + Yl dots from the top X = Xh* 256 + Xl dots from the left Note: You can also use the [ESC]J, [ESC]M. [ESC]d and [ESC]e commands to position the print on the page. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Set Page Mode Entry Position Relative [ESC] [SUB] R 1BH 1AH 52H <27><26><82> None [ESC] W This command sets the horizontal and vertical entry position to anywhere on the page. It is only valid in page mode. If the value specified is beyond the page boundary, the command is ignored. (X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the [ESC]t command, and is not same as the page definition of X and Y.) The X and Y positions are in dots. Y = Yh* 256 + Yl dots from the current Y X = Xh* 256 + Xl dots from the current X Note: You can also use the [ESC]J, [ESC]M. [ESC]d and [ESC]e commands to position the print on the page. 28-07764 Rev C Page 121 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Set Page Mode Entry Position Legacy Support [ESC] o 1BH 6FH <27><111> None [ESC] W This command sets the horizontal and vertical entry position to anywhere on the page. It is only valid in page mode. If the value specified is beyond the page boundary, the command is ignored. (X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the [ESC]t command, and is not same as the page definition of X and Y.) The X and Y positions are in dots. Y = Yh* 256 + Yl dots from the top X = Xh* 256 + Xl dots from the left The F parameter is a flag that specifies if this command is an absolute position command or relative to the current position. If its value is <1> the command is processed as a relative position command, and if its value is <0> the command is interpreted as an absolute position command. Note: You can also use the [ESC]J, [ESC]M. [ESC]d and [ESC]e commands to position the print on the page. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Exit Page Mode [FF] or [ESC][SUB] P 0CH or 1BH 1AH 50H <12> or <27><26><80> &%FF [FF] This command exits page mode definition and starts the print process. If the printer is not in page mode, this command is treated as a normal form feed command. Note: When page mode finishes printing, the left and right margins are restored to the values before the select page mode command. All other format changes are preserved. Page 122 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Graphic Mode The iTherm® 280 Printer conforms to the basic definition of IBM all-points-addressable (APA) graphic commands. It is not designed to print large quantities of graphical data. The printer only prints graphics that are 2.5 inches wide. At this time, there is not a graphics mode for Epson emulation. The iTherm® 280 Printer always prints in one of the native resolutions of 104 x 96, 208 x 96, 104 x 192, or 208 x 192 dpi. To provide compatibility with the standard IBM APA resolutions, the printer internally modifies the graphics to print as expected. The printer converts the vertical resolution by altering the [ESC] J command (which is typically used for vertical spacing) and adjusting it so that horizontal passes touch as expected. The requested horizontal resolution is converted by data scaling. Because the vertical dpi of the printer is always greater, the resulting APA graphics printed on the iTherm® 280 Printer are slightly smaller than the same graphic printed on an impact printer. All of this is done transparently to the application; however, loss of resolution may result in some modes. If desired the [ESC] * command can be used to select the native resolution. Note 1: If the iTherm® 280 Printer is used with programs that convert text to graphics, the printer is slower than if the printer is sent ASCII text. The iTherm® 280 Printer is supported by a Windows’ print driver that allows applications to select supported fonts. Note 2: Generally, the horizontal graphic commands provide faster print than the APA graphic commands. Standard APA Graphics [ESC] K Print single-density graphics (60h x 72v dpi) ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] K 1BH 4BH <27> <75> none Description The [ESC] K command prints + 256 * bytes of singledensity graphics (60 dpi). [ESC] L Print half-speed double-density graphics (120h x 72v dpi) ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] L 1BH 4CH <27> <76> none Description The [ESC] L command prints + 256 * bytes of doubledensity graphics (120 dpi) at half speed, allowing full and half dots to be printed. [ESC] Y Print full-speed double-density graphics (120h x 72v dpi) 28-07764 Rev C Page 123 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] Y 1BH 59H <27> <89> none Description The [ESC] Y command prints + 256 * bytes of doubledensity graphics (120 dpi) at full speed with no consecutive dots. (The mode is generally used to print 120h by 144v dpi resolutions in two passes). [ESC] Z Print quad-density graphics (240h x 72v dpi) ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] Z 1BH 5AH <27> <90> none Description The [ESC] Z command prints + 256 * bytes of quad-density graphics (240 dpi) at half speed with no consecutive dots. (The mode is generally used to print 240h by 144v dpi resolutions in two passes). Extended APA Graphics [ESC] * Print graphics in mode (60h/ 120h/ 240h x 72v dpi) ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] * 1BH 2AH <27> <42> none Description The [ESC] * command selects one of three graphic modes as specified by . 0 60 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 1 120 dpi Half speed 8-bit slices 2 120 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 3 240 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 4 80 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 5 72 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 6 90 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 7 144 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 8,9 Not supported 10 104 x 96 dpi 1 horizontal 1 vertical pass 11 208 x 96 dpi 2 horizontal 1 vertical pass 12 104 x 192 dpi 1 horizontal 2 vertical passes 13 208 x 192 dpi 2 horizontal 2 vertical passes 15,16 Not supported Where [ESC] ? Reassign graphic mode ASCII [ESC] ? Page 124 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Hexadecimal 1BH 3FH Decimal <27> <63> IPCL none Description Where The [ESC] ? command reassigns graphic mode to resolution . Possible values for are K, L, Y, or Z. Resolutions, , are zero to seven as follows: 0 60 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices Default for K 1 120 dpi Half speed 8-bit slices Default for L 2 120 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices Default for Y 3 240 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices Default for Z 4 80 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 5 72 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 6 90 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 7 144 dpi Full speed 8-bit slices 10 104 x 96 dpi 1 horizontal, 1 vertical pass 11 208 x 96 dpi 2 horizontal, 1 vertical pass 12 104 x 192 dpi 1 horizontal, 2 vertical passes 13 208 x 192 dpi 2 horizontal, 2 vertical passes Note: Modes 11 through 13 are designed to support horizontal graphics and not intended for APA graphics. [ESC] U <1> Select unidirectional print ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] U <1> 1BH 55H 01H <27> <85> <1> &%GU ESC] U <1> Description The [ESC] U <1> command prints all data in unidirectional print mode to improve line to line registration for graphical data. Note: Unidirectional print should be canceled before normal text is printed. Print time is slowed if it is not canceled. 28-07764 Rev C Page 125 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] U <0> Select bidirectional print ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] U <0> 1BH 55H 00H <27> <85> <0> &%GB [ESC] U <0> Description The [ESC] U <0> command prints all data in bi-directional, logic-seeking print mode. Page 126 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Horizontal Graphics (Color Graphics) The iTherm® 280 Printer supports graphics sent as horizontal scan lines. Individual scan lines of graphic data are sent to the printer one line at a time. Although the iTherm® 280 Printer only supports two colors, the horizontal graphic command interface gives full color support for printer graphics. Full color support is provided to establish a full color standard for future printers. Color data is sent in one of three color planes. Typically, a red plane or scan line is sent, then green and blue. The sequence of lines defines one row of dots that is printed on the paper. The horizontal graphic commands do not include resolution information. Therefore, only once before sending graphics data, set the graphics resolution by sending the [ESC] * command with a zero length (no data). The graphic resolution sets the internal graphic mode of the printer. The printer stays in graphic mode until it is changed by another command. Note that the bar code generation and other graphic commands change graphics mode. The format of the horizontal graphic command follows. For additional information on color graphics, see Chapter 7, “Color Graphics.” [ESC] h Process horizontal graphics data ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] h 1BH 68H <27> <104> None None Description The [ESC] h command processes horizontal graphic data, where is a byte that specifies the color of the data being sent. 0 Use Previously Selected Color 1 Red 2 Green 4 Blue = Note 1: Red, green, and blue pixels set to one at the same location result in a white dot, while red, green, and blue pixels set to zero form a black dot. For black print, one represents a black dot and zero represents a white dot. Note 2: More than one color may be set at a time – for example, setting the color to six would set green and blue simultaneously. = 28-07764 byte specifying the length of the data including the format byte, ranging from 0 to 254 (255 is reserved for future use.) Rev C Page 127 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes = byte specifying the format of the graphics data. 0 for raw data 1 for bit wise RLE compression 8 for byte wise RLE compression 254 for difference compression 255 for same as previous scan line data = the data bytes that define the graphics to be printed. [ESC] * Set horizontal graphic mode ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] * <0> <0> 1BH 2AH <0> <0> <27> <42> <0> <0> none Description The [ESC] * <0> <0> command selects one of the three graphic modes specified by . The two bytes after the mode must be zero. Where 0,2,3,4,5,6,7 Standard Graphic Modes (See ESC * command documentation in previous section.) 8,9 Not supported 10 104 x 96 dpi 1 horizontal, 1 vertical pass 11 208 x 96 dpi 2 horizontal, 1 vertical pass 12 104 x 192 dpi 1 horizontal, 2 vertical passes 13 208 x 192 dpi 2 horizontal, 2 vertical passes 14,15,16 Not supported Note 1: Only modes 10 thorough 13 should be selected for horizontal graphics. Example Command Comment [ESC] * <10> <0> <0> Set resolution to 100x96 dpi. [ESC] h <1> <9> <0> Send 8-bytes red pixels. [ESC] h <2> <9> <0> Send 8-bytes green pixels. [ESC] h <3> <9> <0> Send 8-bytes blue pixels. LF Send line feed to force print of any buffered data not yet printed. Note 2: Graphic data is committed to paper when more than 12 dot rows have been transmitted to the printer. If less than 12 dot rows have been sent, they are not printed until the line is terminated (i.e. a line feed command is sent). To make graphics faster to send and smaller to store, several algorithms are included with the graphic command to compress the data. Page 128 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Graphics Compression Although the printer compression algorithms are documented, it is recommended that our Windows’ printer driver be used to generate a graphic image. Our Windows’ printer driver selects the best compression method to use on a scan line by scan line basis. The print driver can be directed to print to file, creating a .prn file. When creating a .prn file, it is recommended that the Start/End Doc settings be cleared in the Start/End Doc tab of the printer properties page. After the .prn file is created, it can be read and sent to the printer by the host application. Bit wise RLE. In bit wise RLE compression, the Most Significant Bit (MSB) compression of each data byte denotes if the compressed data represents one or zero bits. Bits zero through six indicate how many bits are represented as a one or zero. A 34 Hex (34H) represents 34H bits set to zero. A 97H represents 17H bits set to one. [ESC] h <1> <5> <1> <34H> <97H> <8fH> <09H> Byte wise RLE. In byte wise RLE compression, data is represented in byte Compression pairs. The first byte is a count, and the second is the graphics data. The graphics data byte is repeated the number of times represented by the count byte. [ESC] h <1> <5> <8> <09H> <02H> <55H> Where <09H> means repeat ffH nine times and <02H> <55H> means repeat 55H two times. Difference Compression. In difference compression, data is represented in byte pairs. In compression, the first byte is an index into the byte stream, as it would exist if sent in an uncompressed format. The second byte is the data that is different in the new scan line data. Think of compression mode as, “The scan line is the same as the previous except for the byte at a specific position.” [ESC] h <1> <5> <254> <03H> <0bH> <51H> Where <03H> means use the previously transmitted scan line data but change byte 3 to a d5H and change byte 11 (0bH) to a 51H. Same-as-previous Compression. In same-as-previous compression, the command does not contain any graphics data. The command specifies that the printer is to use the previous scan line data for the current scan line. [ESC] h <1> <1> <255>. User Store (Graphic Save) The iTherm® 280 Printer maintains a 16K (16384 bytes) section of flash memory and up to 192K of extended flash memory to save user information. The information can be either macros or user-defined characters. These groups of data are indexed by name, and may be called up at any time after they are stored. See the sections on Macros and User-defined Characters for definitions of these functions. To allow the host application to maintain these groups of data, a series of user store maintenance commands are available. As referenced earlier in this manual, the user can define a limited number of custom characters and define a macro. These character/macro definitions 28-07764 Rev C Page 129 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes can also be saved in user store. However, only one character definition and one macro can be active at any time. One macro and one user-defined character definition can be flagged to load and run at startup. If a flag is set, the printer will automatically process the macro and/or load the user-defined character set at initialization. Because user store is intended to be loaded only a few times and then printed as part of normal operation, the programmer must take some care during the definition phase. The programmer must assume the responsibility to assure the 16K buffer size is not exceeded. User store can save macros and user-defined character sets. When the basic user store is full, it can be moved to extended user store. Individual items in the extended user store can not be erased. The entire extended user store must be erased all at once. You may place two items in user store with the same name and the last defined item will be used. Defining Macros Macros can be defined two ways. The first is by using the begin and end named macro commands. These commands start the recording process and automatically save the macro when it is complete. The macro data is not processed, as it is sent to the printer. Function ASCII Begin named macro record [ESC] [US] b <0> Then send the data to be recorded. The printer does not process the data. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII End name macro record [ESC] [US] e <0> The second way to define macros is to use [ESC] g commands to define the macro, and then the save macro data command to save the data. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII Start macro record [ESC] g <1>Then send the data to be recorded. (The data is processed and printed). Function ASCII Stop macro record [ESC] g <2>Then save the macro. Function ASCII Save macro data [ESC] [US] m <0> Saving User-defined Characters. To save user-defined characters, first define the character set. Page 130 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Define user-defined characters [ESC] = [x1 d1 … d(y x x1)] … [xk d1 … d(y x xk)] Second, save the definition in the nonvolatile flash memory with the appropriate command. Save the definition. Note the "Save user-defined characters" command saves all three character definitions. Function ASCII Save user-defined characters [ESC] [US] c <0> Third, load the character set or load and run the macro. To restore the character definitions, issue a load item command with the name of the character set to be loaded. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII Load item from user store [ESC] [US] l <0> If the item referenced is a user-defined character set, it is loaded into the current definition. If it is a macro, it is loaded into the macro buffer. It is not processed or printed. To help maintain the user-store area, the following commands can be used. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII Flag as a start-up macro [ESC] [US] s <0> The [ESC] [US] s <0> command flags the referenced item to be processed at startup. No more than one user character definition and user data item may be flagged. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII Remove item from user store [ESC] [US] e <0> The [ESC] [US] e <0> command removes an item from user store and frees up its space. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. 28-07764 Rev C Page 131 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII or Description Flush information from user store [ESC] [US] f ALL <0> Base User Store [ESC] [US] f EXT <0> Extended User Store. The [ESC] [US] f ALL <0> command clears all of the information to the user store and frees the data space. The [ESC] [US] f EXT <0> command clears all of the information in the extended the user store. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII Description Report on user store ESC] [US] q <0> The [ESC] [US] q <0> prints or returns information about the contents of and available space in user store. Note: A configuration option is available that locks the user store data. The configuration option prevents the occurrence of new user store data operation until the lock is manually reset and accidental deletion of the saved information. The user-defined character buffer and/or user data buffer may be redefined and used but cannot be stored. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. See [ESC] User-Store Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Page 132 Begin named macro record [ESC] [US] b <0> 1BH 1FH 62H <27> <31> <98> &%UB <0> none The [ESC] [US] b <0> command erases the current macro, initializes the macro buffer structure, and redirects the following data to the macro buffer. It uses the field as a reference. If the name already exists in the flash user store, the command is ignored. The command must be followed by the "End name macro record" command with the same name. If the data that follows is larger than the macro buffer (about 16K), the macro definition is terminated without saving any data. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description End named macro record [ESC] [US] e <0> 1BH 1FH 65H <27> <31> <101> &%UG <0> none The [ESC] [US] e <0> command ends the macro record operation and saves the macro to flash. It uses the field to verify the command end and must match the "Begin named macro record" command. If the name already exists in the flash user store or the macro memory is exceeded, the command is valid, and the field prints. If there is not enough room in the flash user store for the macro, the save is not performed, but the macro buffer is valid. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Save macro data in user store [ESC] [US] m <0> 1BH 1FH 6DH <27> <31> <109> &%UM <0> [GS] -… <0> is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated. The [ESC] [US] m <0> command saves the current macro buffer structure into the flash user-store area. It uses the field as a reference name. If the name already exists in the flash user store, the command does not store the data. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Save user-defined characters [ESC] [US] c <0> 1BH 1FH 63H <27> <31> <99> &%UC <0> [GS] 6 <0> is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated. The [ESC] [US] c <0> command saves the current user-defined character structure in the flash user-save storage area. It uses the field as a reference. If the name already exists in the flash user store, the command will not store the data. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. 28-07764 Rev C Page 133 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Load item from user store [ESC] [US] l <0> 1BH 1FH 6CH <27> <31> <108> &%UL <0> [GS] 0 <0> is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated. The [ESC] [US] l <0> command loads the referenced item into the appropriate structure. If the item referenced is a user-defined character set, it is loaded into the current user-character definition, which does not affect the active state of user-defined characters. If it is a macro, it is loaded into the macro buffer, but it is not inserted into the data stream. [ESC] g <0> inserts the macro buffer into the data stream. If the named item does not exist, the command does nothing. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT>n> on page 136. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Run macro data from user store [ESC] [US] r <0> 1BH 1FH 72H <27> <31> <114> &%UR <0> [GS] 0 <0> is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated. The [ESC] [US] r <0> command loads the referenced macro into the macro buffer. The macro buffer is then inserted into the data stream. If the named item does not exist or is not a macro, nothing happens. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Flag item as a start-up macro [ESC] [US] s <0> 1BH 1FH 73H <27> <31> <115> &%US <0> [GS] 0 <0> is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated. The [ESC] [US] s <0> command flags the referenced item to be processed at startup. Only one user character definition and one macro may be flagged to run at startup. Note: If a character definition is loaded at startup, it is automatically made active. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. [EM]T or &%UT on page136 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Page 134 See [ESC] Delete item from user store [ESC] [US] d <0> 1BH 1FH 64H <27> <31> <100> Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes IPCL EPOS Description &%UD <0> [GS] 1 <0> is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated. The [ESC] [US] d <0> command removes an item from user store and frees up space. If the item does not exist, the command does nothing. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT>n> on page 136. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Transfer all items from user store to extended user store. [ESC] [US] t <0> 1BH 1FH 74H <27> <31> <116> &%UX <0> None This command transfers the information in the base 16K user store to the extended user store. The base user store is erased if the transfer was successful. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT>n> on page 136. Function ASCII Or Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Flush information from user store or extended user store [ESC] [US] f ALL <0> User Store. [ESC] [US] f EXT <0> Extended User Store. 1BH 1FH 66H 00H <27> <31> <102> <0> &%UF [GS] 5 The [ESC] [US] f ALL <0> command clears all entries in user store and frees the data space. It must have the name, “ALL” (in uppercase) attached. If “EXT” is substituted for “ALL”, extended user store (If any) is cleared. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT>n> on page 136. 28-07764 Rev C Page 135 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Or Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Report on user store [ESC] [US] q <0> Print a user store report [ESC] [US] ? <0> Return a formatted user store report 1BH 1FH 71H <27> <31> <113> &%UQ <0> [GS] 3 The [ESC] [US] q <0> command prints a status report. The file name is ignored and may be omitted. The NUL must be present. The intention of the command is to aid in macro development. The terminating <0> may be replaced with an & or redefined. See [ESC] [EM]T or &%UT on page 136. Note: The report is also printed as part of the configuration report. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Example Page 136 Redefine User Store Termination Character [ESC] [EM] T 1BH 19H 54H <27> <25> <84> &%UT None This command allows the terminator used to signal the end of the name field in User Store commands to be modified. The value of is used (in addition to the <0>) for the terminator. The value of n may be from 0 to 255. The default value for the second terminator is &. If this command redefines the terminator to something other than &, the & will no longer function. If &%UT% were sent to the printer, the user store command to run macro "Demo" would be &%URDemo%. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes User Macros The user macro feature works by inserting the macro data buffer into the printer data stream when the print user-store data command is encountered. Macros can be any data normally sent to the printer including graphics. (Note: user-store maintenance and inquire commands may not be included in the macro definitions.) The printer stores macro data in a RAM-based storage buffer as it is received and processed. The storage buffer may then be saved to a flash-based user store or inserted into the print data stream. If a macro is recalled from user store, it is expanded into the macro buffer and replaces whatever is currently there. Programming Considerations The flash (nonvolatile) memory has a limited number of write cycle operations. Consequently, the number of saves should be limited. The buffer should not be saved on a transaction by transaction basis, but rather a maximum of once per day. The buffer is initially about 16K7 bytes long. All commands8 and print data are placed in the buffer and must be included in the size limits. The printer does not indicate when the buffer is full. The application must make sure that the buffer is not overfilled. The printer simply stops saving information when it is full. As the buffer fills, the input data is printed normally. The effect of the macro start command is to clear the buffer and to start to save the input data. The macro stop command stops saving data and initializes internal pointers for the next print. To store the data in the nonvolatile flash, it must be named and saved by one of the user-store save commands. When the macro buffer is inserted into the data stream, configuration commands (like font or pitch changes) remain in effect after the macro is processed. Illegal commands are placed in the buffer and take up space. Horizontal color graphics should be sent to the printer compressed. If the data is not compressed, it is saved in the macro buffer. If the buffer is saved into the user-store nonvolatile flash, there must be enough room in the user store for all of the data. As user-store space is used, the macro buffer will be larger than the available space in user store. Only the used space is saved, but it is possible to define a macro that does not fit in the remaining user-store space. 7 The actual buffer is smaller because of the overhead. IPCL commands are converted by the printer into an equivalent [ESC] code and then placed in the save buffer. The equivalent [ESC] code should be used to calculate the size of the save buffer data. 8 28-07764 Rev C Page 137 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] g <0> Process user macro ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] g <0> 1BH 67H 00H <27> <103> <0> &%GP [ESC] g <0> Description The [ESC] g <0> command prints the user-store data buffer. [ESC] g <1> Start macro record ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] g <1> 1BH 67H 01H <27> <103> <1> &%GS ESC] g <1> Description The [ESC] g <1> command clears the user-store data buffer and begins recording data. The next 2000 bytes (including characters and commands) are recorded. [ESC] g <2> Stop macro record ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] g <2> 1BH 67H 02H <27> <103> <2> &%GE [ESC] g <2> Description The [ESC] g <2> command stops recording user-store data information. The buffer is not saved into the nonvolatile memory. [ESC] g <3> Stop macro record and save ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] g <3> 1BH 67H 03H <27> <103> <3> &%GW [ESC] g <3> Description The [ESC] g <3> command stops recording graphic save information. The buffer is saved into the user-store nonvolatile memory under the name, "ESCg3_Save" Note: The [ESC] g <3> command is supplied for compatibility with the Series 80PLUS and 90PLUS printers. Page 138 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Bar Codes The iTherm® 280 Printer supports the ability to print bar codes. The printer offers a number of formats as defined below. The host does not need to form the graphic image for these bar codes. The host need only send the printer the information to be bar coded and a graphic is generated by the printer. In some cases, a check character is required by the format. In most cases, the printer generates the check character and inserts it correctly in the format. The printer uses internal graphic modes to form bar code images, and the images are adjusted for ink bleed. In general, the bar codes generated by sending graphic data to the printer are not as readable as the bar codes the printer generates. Bar codes are printed at a 203 x 203 resolution. Barcodes may be printed horizontally or vertically. When printed vertically the length of the barcode can be greater (i.e. more characters can be printed). You can not print human readable interpretation (HRI) characters in vertical mode. It is generally better to print vertical barcodes by printing horizontal barcodes in page mode rotated 90° or 270°. You can then mix HRI and other text with the barcodes. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Where n = 28-07764 Print bar code [ESC] b {information} [ETX] 1BH 62H ... 03H <27> <98> ... <3> &%25 ... [CR] Interleaved 2 of 5 &%39 ... [CR] Code 39 &%12 ... [CR] Code 128 &%28 . Code 128 (allows a two character length, preceding the information) &%UP ... [CR] UPC A &%UE ... [CR] UPC E &%EA .. [CR] EAN-13 &%E8 ... [CR] EAN-8 &%93 .. [CR] Code 93 &%CB .. [CR] Codabar [ESC] b or [GS] k The [ESC] b {information} [ETX] command prints information as a bar code. The bar code is centered on the print zone. 0 Interleaved 2 of 5 Numeric (0-9) only; must be even number of digits 1 Code 39 26 uppercase letters (A-Z); 10 digits (0-9) (See description for full 128 character set support) 2 Code 128 Three sets of 106 different characters (See description for character set selection) 3 UPC A Numeric (0-9) only; 11 digits 4 EAN-13 Numeric (0-9) only; 12 digits 5 UPC E Numeric (0-9) only; 11 digits 6 EAN-8 Numeric (0-9) only; 7 digits 7 Code 93 26 letters; 10 digits (0-9); and 7 special characters 8 Codabar 10 digits (0-9); 4 start/stop characters, A, B, C, and D; and 6 special characters. 9 PDF-417 2D alpha Numeric (See notes below) 12 EAN-14 Numeric (0-9) only 14 digits Rev C Page 139 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Note: You may print barcodes in page mode. If you rotate these barcodes 90° or 180° you can get significantly longer barcodes. Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 is a high-density, self-checking, continuous, numeric bar code. It is mainly used where fixed-length numeric fields are required. The data field must be an even number of characters. If an odd data field is sent to the iTherm® 280 printer, it will be zero padded. Due to space limitations, only 16 characters can be printed. Page 140 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Code 39 Code 39 is an alphanumeric bar code. It is a discrete, self-checking, variable-length code. The printer prints the complete data field. The number of characters that can be printed depends on the bar width scaling. If the bar code scale is set to 2, 17 characters may be printed per line. There are two modes of operation for the Code 39 barcodes. The first is in a variable length format. In this mode all characters sent to the printer will be printed up to the termination character. Only 0-9, A-Z -, period, and space may be printed. $, %, +, and / Characters may be used as escape characters for full 128 character support. If illegal characters are passed to the printer, they are converted to legal codes. (For example, a would be converted to A). In full 128 character mode, the printer will encode the full 128 character set. In this mode, the first character received must be the length. IE. [ESC]k<1>… where n specifies the number of characters to follow. The characters following n characters may be from 0to 127. Values greater than 127 are converted to printable characters by removing the 8th bit. The following table specifies the Code 39 character set. ASCII NUL SOH STX ETH EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US Code %U $A $B $C $D $E $F $G $H $I $J $K $L $M $N $O $P $Q $R $S $T $U $V $W $X $Y $Z %A %B %C %D %E ASCII SP ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? Code Space /A /B /C /D /E /F /G /H /I /J /K /L . /O 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 /Z %F %G %H %I %J ASCII @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ Code %V A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z %K %L %M %N %O ASCII ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ DEL Code %W +A +B +C +D +E +F +G +H +I +J +K +L +M +N +O +P +Q +R +S +T +U +V +W +X +Y +Z %P %Q %R %S %T Figure 14 Code 39 full 128 character encoding 28-07764 Rev C Page 141 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Code 128 Code 128 is an alphanumeric bar code. It is a high-density, variable-length, continuous code, which employs multiple element widths. Code 128 has three possible start codes. The start code defines the code set, Code A, B, or C that will be used to generate the barcode. The iTherm® 280 allows the code set to be specified, or it can be select by the printer based on the information in the data field. To specify code set: [ESC] b <2> {information} [ETX] If the first character in the data field is a start code as shown in Figure 15 below, the printer will print the complete data field from the selected set. Due to space limitations, only ten characters can be printed. The check digit is generated and printed by the printer. Characters are also specified as shown in Figure 15. To have the printer selected code set and automatically generate an optimal barcode, the value of Code should be the length. [ESC] b <2> {information} If the first character is from 1 to 31, the printer will automatically select Code A, B, or C depending on the data present. If the data is all numeric, the data can be printed as pairs. This effectively doubles the amount of data that can be printed. The check digit is generated and printed by the printer. Note: If the first character is greater than <31> and not <135> through <137>, the printer will discard the first character and print the data as defined in Code A.. Space is defined as a <0>, which makes programming difficult and causes control character conflicts for the printer. To solve the problem, the iTherm® 280 Printer subtracts 32 from all characters that are to be included in the bar code. In the Code 128 definition, an ‘A’ is <33>; however, the printer converts an ASCII ‘A’ (<65>) to a <33> internally. This sets Code 128C and the start codes off by 32. Barcode 128 consists of 107 unique symbols. 101 of the symbols take on different meanings based on the start code or an embedded shift code sequence. Code stick A consists of alphanumeric characters and ASCII control codes (see the table below). Code stick B consists of Alpha numeric with lower case alpha, Code stick C consists of numeric pairs. In automatic mode, any ASCII data from 0 to 127 could be entered. Values less than 32 will be encoded as Code stick A NUL- US, values from 96 through 127 will be encoded from Code stick B. Where ever possible numeric pairs will be encoded from Code stick C. In the past, FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, and FNC4 have not been accessible to the programmer. The EAN 128 barcode requires that FNC1 be made available. To provide EAN 128 compatibility, the acceptable character range has been expanded by 10 to include the ability to specify FNC1, FNC2, FNC3 and FNC4. In automatic mode, values of 130-132 will be accepted, however, the resulting barcode may be unreadable. Page 142 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide 128 Code FNC3 FNC2 Not Valid FNC4 FNC1 Start A Start B Start C Value in Decimal 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 Programming Codes Value in Hex 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 Figure 15 Expanded Function coding Note: In automatic mode, FNC4 is always specified as 133 regardless of what code stick is currently active. In most cases, the iTherm® supreme will generate the most compact barcode for you. However, if it is desirable to have complete control, the programmer should use manual mode. 28-07764 Rev C Page 143 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Code 128 Encoding Code A Space ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U Code Stick Code Code B C Space 00 ! 01 " 02 # 03 $ 04 % 05 & 06 ' 07 ( 08 ) 09 * 10 + 11 , 12 13 . 14 / 15 0 16 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25 : 26 ; 27 < 28 = 29 > 30 ? 31 @ 32 A 33 B 34 C 35 D 36 E 37 F 38 G 39 H 40 I 41 J 42 K 43 L 44 M 45 N 46 O 47 P 48 Q 49 R 50 S 51 T 52 U 53 Code 128 Value 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 iTherm Manual Encoding Decimal Hex Value Value 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 Code 128 Encoding Code A V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ NUL SOH STX ETH EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US FNC3 FNC2 Shift Code C Code B FNC4 Code Stick Code Code B C V 54 W 55 X 56 Y 57 Z 58 [ 59 \ 60 ] 61 ^ 62 _ 63 ` 64 a 65 b 66 c 67 d 68 e 69 f 70 g 71 h 72 i 73 j 74 k 75 l 76 m 77 n 78 o 79 p 80 q 81 r 82 s 83 t 84 u 85 v 86 w 87 x 88 y 89 z 90 { 91 | 92 } 93 ~ 94 DEL 95 FNC3 96 FNC2 97 Shift 98 Code 99 C FNC4 Code B Code Code A A FNC1 Start Code A Start Code B Start Code C Stop Code 128 Value 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 iTherm Manual Encoding Decimal Hex Value Value 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 100 132 84 101 133 85 102 103 104 105 - 134 135 136 137 - 86 87 88 89 Figure 16 Code 128 encoding values Page 144 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes UPC A UPC A is a fixed-length, numeric, continuous code that employs four element widths. The printer supports Universal Product Code Version A, E, EAN-8, and EAN-13. Version A encodes 11 digits. Typically, the UPC A format starts with a number system digit, fivedigit manufacturer’s code, five-digit product code, and a check digit. The printer makes no assumptions about any of the codes except the check digit. The printer prints an UPC bar code with the 11 digits sent to it and generates the check digit. If fewer than 11 digits are sent, the remaining digits will be zeros. The printer prints an UPC that is about 130% the size of the UPC nominal standard, which provides optimal readability. UPC E UPC E is a zero suppression version of UPC. The printer requires that the first digit is zero for number system zero. If it is not zero, the bar code is not printed. The printer does the compression based on the compression rules for UPC E, prints an UPC bar code based on the 11 digits sent to it, and generates the check digit. If fewer than 11 digits are sent, the remaining digits will be zeros. The printer prints an UPC that is about 130% the size of the UPC nominal standard, which provides optimal readability. EAN-13 EAN-13 is a fixed-length, numeric, continuous code that employs four element widths. The printer supports EAN-13, which is a superset of UPC that encodes 12 digits. Typically, the format starts with a number set digit, which defines how the next six digits are encoded. The next five digits have fixed encoding. The last is a check digit. The printer prints an EAN-13 bar code with the 12 digits sent to it and generates the check digit. If fewer than 12 digits are sent, the remaining digits will be zeros. The printer prints an EAN-13 bar code that is about 130% the size of the nominal standard, which provides optimal readability. EAN-8 EAN-8 is a fixed-length, numeric, continuous code that employs four element widths. The printer supports EAN-8, which is a superset of UPC that encodes seven digits. The printer prints an EAN-8 bar code with the seven digits sent to it and generates the check digit. If fewer than seven digits are sent, the remaining digits will be zeros. The printer prints an EAN-8 bar code that is about 130% the size of the nominal standard, which provides optimal readability. EAN-14 EAN-14 It is a high-density, fixed-length, numeric, continuous code, which employs multiple element widths. EAN-14, is a subset of Code 128 that encodes FNC1 and 14 digit pairs. If fewer than 14 digits are sent, leading zeros will be added to complete the code. Code 93 Code 93 is a variable-length, alphanumeric bar code. The complete data field is printed by the printer. Due to space limitations, only 10 characters can be printed. Codabar Codabar is a variable-length format, primarily used for numeric symbols. It offers 16 data characters, including the numeric digits zero through nine, and -, $, :, /, ., and +. Four unique start/stop characters, designated A, B, C, and D, are also available. Due to space limitations, only 12 characters can be printed. 28-07764 Rev C Page 145 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Note 1: A [CR] may also be used in place of the [ETX] to end the bar code data field. Note 2: Only information that is usable in a particular bar code will be printed. PDF 417 PDF 417 is a two dimensional barcode that will encode the full ASCII character set. As it encodes the full set including control characters, the length of the following data must be provided to the printer. The form of the command is as follows: [ESC]b<9> Where the data length is (nH * 256) + nL. The length is limited to be from 1 to 2048 characters. To control the formation of the barcode, the x and y aspect ratios, rows and columns, and error correction levels can be altered. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Where PDF 417 bar code control [ESC] [EM] E 1BH 19H 45H <27> <25> <69> None None This command alters the way PDF 417 barcodes are generated and printed. f = Feature to control and v = the value of the feature. f = C, 43H, 67 Set encoding columns. v = 1-30, 0 sets to auto. f = R, 52H, 82 Set encoding rows. v = 3-90, 0 sets to auto. f = X, 58H, 88 Set encoding X aspect. v = 2-6, 3 is default. f = Y, 59H, 89 Set encoding Y aspect. v = 2-32, 9 is default. f = E, 45H, 69 Set error correction level. If v between 1 and 40 it is interpreted as a percentage of the data. If v is between 48 and 56 it is set to a specific level of 0 to 8. If v = 0, it will return it to the default setting of 10%. Typically the row and columns should be set to 0 so that auto encoding will be used. The X and Y aspect represent the number of dots horizontally and vertically to form the smallest image element. Values of 2 for each produce very small elements, and is probably too small unless good paper is used. The defaults are 3 by 9, which produce easily readable barcodes. Error correcting levels are selected using one of two methods. The first is a fixed level. Page 146 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes v 48 Level Level 0 Code Word 2 49 50 51 52 Level Level Level Level 1 2 3 4 4 8 16 32 53 54 55 56 Level Level Level Level 5 6 7 8 64 128 256 512 The second way is to determine correction level based on the amount of data in the barcode. This is determined by calculating a correction ration based on the formula Cf = (v * 0.1 * Len) Cf 0-3 4-10 11-20 21-45 46-100 101-200 201-400 401 Up Level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Code Word 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Set bar code height [ESC] [EM] B 1BH 19H 42H <27> <25> <66> &%BH [GS] h The [ESC] [EM] B command sets the bar code height where *24 is the number dots. The default is n = 4, and results in a barcode that is about 0.47 inches high. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Set bar code width [ESC] [EM] W 1BH 19H 57H <27> <25> <87> &%BW [GS] w The [ESC] [EM] w command sets the minimum bar width. The value may be between 1 and 8. The default is 3. Note: A value of 1 may result in barcodes that are unreadable with some readers. 28-07764 Rev C Page 147 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function Set bar code justification, human readable interpretation (HRI) character print mode, and print direction ASCII [ESC] [EM] J Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 4AH Decimal <27> <25> <74> IPCL &%BJ EPOS none The power on default is center justified with HRI characters not printed. Description The [ESC] [EM] J command selects the operation of the bar code justification, HRI characters, and print direction. Where n bits n IPCL 76543210 ------xx ------00 ------01 ------10 --xx-----00-----01-----10-----11----x------ 0 1 2 00 01 02 0 16 32 48 00 16 32 48 0 00 -0------ 64 64 -100---- Justified Left Center Right HRI characters Not printed Printed above the bar code Printed below the bar code Printed above and below the bar code Vertical print mode. (Page mode may work better) Bar code printed in horizontal direction (default) Bar code printed in vertical direction Note 1: The [ESC] [EM] J command only affects bar code printing. Note 2: HRI is not available in vertical print mode. You may print normal barcodes in page mode, which will provide for HRI and significantly longer barcodes. Page 148 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Electronic Journal The iTherm® 280 has the capability to store electronic journal9 data in flash memory. There are two ways entries can be made into the electronic journal. The first is by selecting the journal station. The second is by requesting that print data be placed into the electronic journal. Before the electronic journal can be used, it must be configured and initialized. Configuring the Electronic Journal The iTherm® 280 has about10 1024K bytes of flash that can be assigned to the electronic journal or to extended user store. The 1024K is segmented in 64K segments, which may be assigned to either to electronic journal or extended user store. That is you can assign 2 segments or 128K to the electronic journal and the remaining segments will be assigned to extended user store. When electronic journal is in use, you can not reconfigure the configuration of the extended flash memory. If you want to reconfigure the flash, the electronic journal must be erased. To erase the electronic journal you must know the password that was assigned when it was initialized. When printers are initially configured by TransAct, the extended flash is erased and partitioned but not initialized. Before you use the electronic journal you must initialize it. CAUTION: You can use the extended user store without initializing the electronic journal. If any data has been stored in the extended user store, it will be lost if the extended flash is repartitioned. CAUTION: The printer does not stop if the electronic journal runs out of memory. If the printer were to stop there would be no way for the host to print and clear the journal. The host system should monitor the Journal with the [ENQ]<25> command. This command will return the electronic journal status and report how much memory is remaining (See page 154). When the free electronic journal space is less than a predetermined amount, the journal should be printed or retrieved and then reinitialized. Electronic Journal Security Electronic journal security is provided by applying a password to the erase feature of the electronic journal. Additionally, there is a factory set configuration that disables the ability for the operator to print the journal through the keypad. It is possible to assign a blank password to the electronic journal. If this is done either through the keypad or by host control, the manual print mode will be allowed to erase and reinitialize the journal. 9 It must be noted that the iTherm ® 280 does not maintain the current time or date. If a journal entry is to contain the time and/or date, the host system must transfer this as printable text. 10 The amount of free flash depends on the version of code installed and the amount of flash used for enhanced language support. 28-07764 Rev C Page 149 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes It is up to the end user of the iTherm® 280 to implement and use the level of security that is required. CAUTION: If you have initialized the electronic journal and don’t know the password, there is no way to erase the electronic journal without returning the printer for service. The warranty does not cover this. All iTherm® 280’s are shipped with the electronic journal partitioned and erased but not initialized. Page 150 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Initializing the Electronic Journal Once the electronic journal is partitioned, it can be initialized. Initializing the electronic journal sets the password and formats the flash to accept journal entries. Each entry may be any length up to 8K. Entries greater than 8K are truncated. Entries will be added to the electronic journal until it is full. If the electronic journal is full, entries will be lost. The [ENQ]<25> command can be used to query the state of the electronic journal. Electronic Journal Configuration and Reporting Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Initialize and Set Password [ESC][GS]I<0> 1BH 1DH 49H <0x00> <27> <29><73> <0> &%EI& This command initializes the electronic journal and sets the password that allows the electronic journal to be erased. The password may be up to 14 characters and may contain any alphanumeric characters. Note: The electronic journal can not be deleted without this password. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Erase the Electronic Journal [ESC][GS]E<0> 1BH 1DH 45H <0x00> <27> <29><50> <0> &%EC& This command erases all of the electronic journal. The password was set using the [ESC][GS]I command. Note: The electronic journal can not be deleted without this password. 28-07764 Rev C Page 151 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Print the Electronic Journal [ESC][GS]P< Sl>< Sh>< Ll>< Lh> 1BH 1DH 50H < Sl>< Sh>< Ll>< Lh> <27> <29><80> < Sl>< Sh>< Ll>< Lh> &%EP (L and S are 4 digits ie. 00100020 for 20 records starting at 10) This command prints all or part of the electronic journal. *256 + specifies the first record to be printed and *256 + specifies the number of records to print. If *256 + are 0, records from the specified start to the last record are printed. Setting both start and end to 0 will print the complete contents of the electronic journal. Note: The first record is identified as record 1. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Report the Electronic Journal [ESC][GS]R< Sl>< Sh>< Ll>< Lh> 1BH 1DH 52H < Sl>< Sh>< Ll>< Lh> <27> <29><82> < Sl>< Sh>< Ll>< Lh> &%EQ (L and S are 4 digits ie. 00100020 for 20 records starting at 10) This command reports all or part of the electronic journal. *256 + specifies the first record to be printed and *256 + specifies the number of records to report. If *256 + are 0, all records from the specified start to the end are reported. Setting both start and end to 0 will report the complete contents of the journal. Note: Page 152 The first record is identified as record 1. The report format will be as follows: [STX] Record number [SOH] Record Text [ETX] … [EOT] Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Where: Programming Codes Set the Electronic Journal Record Header [ESC][GS]F<0> 1BH 1DH 46H <27> <29><70> None This command allows the record separator that is printed between records to be changed. The default format is: \r\nRecord %d\r\n \r represents CR, \n represents LF, %d represents the position of the record number. Note: Note: Note: The %d must be present. This follows standard “C” programming conventions. Most standard “C” formatting print parameters may be used. The record header many be totally disabled by a configuration option. Function ASCII Or Print/Report an Electronic Journal Log [ESC][GS]L Print the report [ESC][GS]l Return the report Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 1BH 1DH 4CH or 6CH <27> <29><76> or <108> &%UL (No IPCL for returning the report) or or 28-07764 This command prints or returns a summary of the electronic journal. The format is as follows: Electronic journal is inactive. (The electronic journal is off, or not initialized) Electronic journal has xxxx Records and is full. Electronic journal has xxxx Records with yyyyyy bytes free. Rev C Page 153 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Query the Electronic Journal [ENQ]<25> 05H 19H <05> <25> None Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Where n Enable Dynamic Response [ESC] w 1BH 77H <27> <119> none [GS] a Defines the features that cause dynamic responses Where Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Dynamic status can be used to allow the host to sense status changes without sending repeated inquire commands. The operation of the dynamic response varies depending on the configuration of the printer. If the printer is configured for serial or USB operation the status is automatically returned to the host. If the printer is configured for parallel, IEEE 1284 operation, the HOST must initiate a reverse channel request to return the status. This is a real time status request that returns the current state of the electronic journal. Return Format: [NAK]<25><42> [NAK] EJ is not active. It is either off, not initialized or full. If nH*256 + nL is not zero, the EJ is available but not initialized and nH*256 + nLis the available space in K (1024) bytes. or [ACK]<25><42> [ACK] the EJ is active an available and nH*256 + nLis the available space in K (1024) bytes. Note Note Page 154 Cash Drawer 0 ACK/NAK <1> Cash Drawer 1 ACK/NAK <2> Paper low status ACK/NAK <3> Paper out status ACK/NAK <4> Electronic Journal (Low/Out) ACK/NAK<25> Validation Form present ACK/NAK <7> Mechanical Error Status ACK/NAK <14> Cover status ACK/NAK <8> For mechanical error status to function, the "Buffer Full Only" off line option should be selected. The electronic journal status follows the format of the [ENQ]<25> response and reports the amount of electronic journal memory remaining. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Printing/Reporting and Resetting the Electronic Journal The electronic journal may be printed on the receipt or reported to the host. The printed report will print each journal entry with an entry separator defined by the user (or, if not defined, with a default). The journal can be erased and reinitialized at any time. It is up to the host application to assure the electronic journal is reported or printed before it is erased. To provide some level of security on the erase process, the erase function is password protected. The password is set by the previous initialize command. See the [ESC][GS]I and E commands for further details. There are two ways to print the electronic journal: one is under host control, and the second is by entering journal print mode and using the keypad to control the printout. Journal Entering and using Journal Print Mode Journal print mode can be used to initialize, print then erase the electronic journal. To provide a level of security for the journal, if the electronic journal is initialized under software control and a password is provided, the electronic journal can not be erased in journal print mode. There is also a factory configured mode that completely disables this feature. To enter Journal Print Mode: 1. Press and release the * Button to switch the printer into STANDBY/OFF mode. (The POWER INDICATOR LIGHT will be not be illuminated.) 2. Press and hold the FEED Button. 3. While holding the FEED Button, press and release the * Button. 4. When the red, ERROR INDICATOR LIGHT blinks, release the FEED Button. 5. Follow the directions printed on the receipt to cycle through the options until Electronic Journal is selected. Press and hold the FEED button until Electronic journal mode is entered. Then select the desired option. The available options are: 1. Initialize Journal. (If the electronic journal is not initialized) 2. Print Complete Journal. 3. Erase Complete Journal. (If the electronic journal is not password protected) 4. Print Last 20 Records 5. Print First Record. 6. Skip 10 Records. 7. Back 10 Records. 8. Print remaining journal. 9. Print last record. When journal print is entered, the printer will print a short list of instructions, the available options, and a summery of the total number of records in the journal and the amount of space left. 28-07764 Rev C Page 155 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Journal Print Mode Options Initialize Journal If this option is offered, the journal has never been initialized. Selecting this option will initialize the journal with no password. Once initialized, the journal configuration can not be changed unless the journal is erased by command. Print Complete Journal. This option will print the complete journal log from record 1 to the end. The printer will use the default configuration and emulation to print the log. That is if the printer is configured for Ithaca PcOS emulation and set to 6 lpi, large draft 16 cpi, the printer will print the log with these defaults. If a journal entry has been saved with print mode settings they will take effect for all following entries. Erase Complete Journal. If the electronic journal is not password protected, this option will erase the complete journal and reinitialize it. Printing part of the journal. • Print Last 20 Records • Print First Record. • Skip 10 Records. • Back 10 Records. • Print Remaining Journal. • Print Last Record. These commands will allow part of the journal to be printed. For example if the last 10 journal entries are to be printed, select print last record, then back 10 and then print remaining journal. Security The security of the journal is up to the user. If the journal is host controlled, it should be password protected and if manual printing is not desirable, the printer should be configured so as to disable manual printing. The TransAct printer configuration utility will allow set and clear this feature. When iTherm® 280 printers leave the factory, the electronic journal is erased and is not initialized. Page 156 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Electronic Journal Entries There are two ways to place information in the electronic journal. The first is by selecting journal mode. The second is by requesting that validation or receipt information is copied into the electronic journal. If you select journal mode, information sent to the printer is not printed, but stored in the flash memory. The information is stored as records in a linked list. Whenever a “journal mode begin” command is received, a new record is started. When journal mode is exited, the record is finished, closed and the link updated. This journal mode is intended to be printed at a later time. No printer control codes are allowed in the journal. Only [CR], [HT] and [LF] commands are allowed. Any other control character will end the journal record. Use [EOT] or [NUL] to provide the most graceful exit from journal mode. The other way to place information in the electronic journal is with carbon copy mode. In this mode select information sent to the validation or receipt station is carbon copied into the electronic journal. A record is started with the “Electronic Journal Begin” command and ended with the “Electronic Journal End” command. There is an “Electronic Journal Suspend” and “Electronic Journal Resume” which allows some information not to be saved. [esc][P<12[esc]I<1>[esc]0[esc]a<1> [ESC][@<4><0><0><0><34><2>[ESC]c<1> QUICK MART[CR][LF] [ESC][@<4><0><0><0><17><1> 1234 Rt1 Anytown,CT[CR][LF] [esc]c<0>[esc]I<0> 203-123-4567[cr][lf] [esc][P<15>[esc]a<0>[CR][LF] [esc]l<3> Start journal record ---{Date:0} {Time:0:}--[cr][lf] ST# 2000 OP# 00067 TE# 021 0035[CR][LF] [esc]l<2> Suspend the record KLEENEX FAM D04 QTY 1 1.68 J[CR][LF] RITZ D01 QTY 1 2.50 D[CR][LF] CHIPS D01 QTY 1 1.50 D[CR][LF] STORAGE BAG D04 QTY 1 1.50 J[CR][LF] [esc]<1> Resume the record SUB TOTAL 8.68[CR][LF] SALES TAX 1.50[CR][LF] ------[CR][LF] TOTAL 10.18[CR][LF] CASH TEND 20.00[CR][LF] [ESC]c<1> CHANGE DUE 9.82[CR][LF] [ESC]c<0> [esc]l<0> End the record [esc]a<1>[LF][LF][ESC][@<4><0><0><0><34><2> THANK YOU [CR][LF] [ESC][@<4><0><0><0><17><1> FOR SHOPPING WITH US[cr][lf] [esc]a<0>[esc]d<15>[esc]v 28-07764 Rev C Page 157 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes The resulting journal entry would then only contain: ---{Date:0} {Time:0:}-ST# 2000 OP# 00067 TE# 021 0035 SUB TOTAL 8.68 SALES TAX 1.50 -----TOTAL 10.18 CASH TEND 20.00 CHANGE DUE 9.82 In carbon copy mode any printer control commands in the record data will be added to the journal record. As the records are printed, those commands will be used to format the print. Some care should be taken to assure that only format control command that you intend to be printed later get in the journal. Note: Information is gathered in packets or 16 bytes. If power is lost before the record is closed, up to 16 bytes of information may be lost. The link list will be repaired, with data loss, when power is next applied. Page 158 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Journal mode Journal mode is a station select command. All data sent to the printer, following the journal mode select command, is stored in the EJ as a single record. Any control commands sent to the electronic journal will end the journal entry. An EOT, NUL or any printer command will end journal mode. Typically an EOT, CAN or station select will be used to end the journal mode. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Electronic Journal Mode Begin [ESC]{ 1BH 7BH <27> <123> None The function enters journal mode. When in journal mode, commands are parsed and any command that is not appropriate is removed, causes journal mode to exit, or is saved. The following commands are ignored: [ESC][BEL] [ESC][EM] [ESC]! [ESC]4 [ESC]8 [ESC]9 [ESC]? [ESC]C [ESC]v The following commands cause the journal to stop and will be processed again after the journal information is saved. [ESC][FS] [ESC][FF] [ESC][GS] [ESC][US] [ESC]" [ESC]$ [ESC]* [ESC]@ [ESC]= [ESC]> [ESC]K [ESC]L [ESC]Y [ESC]Z [ESC]f [ESC]j [ESC]k [ESC]l [ESC]m [ESC]o [ESC]t [ESC]u [ESC]y [ESC]{ [ESC]~ The following commands are processed and not placed in the journal: [ESC]q [ESC]w [ESC]x [BEL] All other commands are placed in the journal, and will be processed when the journal is printed. The [EOT] (4 or 4H) and CAN (24 or 14H) will cause the journal to stop and will not be processed again. In typical operation, a station select command should be used to exit journal mode. Note that any station select including another Journal select will close the journal entry. If a Journal select is processed in Journal mode, the current record will be closed, and a new record opened. 28-07764 Rev C Page 159 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Carbon Copy Journal Mode Carbon copy mode allows information sent to the receipt or validation station to be copied into the electronic journal. An electronic journal entry is started with a “Start Carbon Copy” mode command and continues until a station select command is received or a “Stop Carbon Copy” command is received. The carbon copy operation may be suspended and restarted by a “Carbon Copy Suspend” and “Carbon Copy Resume” command. (Note: “Carbon Copy Suspend” and “Carbon Copy Resume” commands do not generate new electronic journal records.) Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Electronic Carbon Copy Begin [ESC]l <3> 1BH 6CH<3> <27> <108><3> &%EB Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Electronic Carbon Copy Suspend [ESC]l <2> 1BH 6CH<2> <27><108><2> &%ES Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Electronic Carbon Copy Resume [ESC]l <1> 1BH 6CH<1> <27><108><1> &%ER Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Electronic Carbon Copy End [ESC]l <0> 1BH 6CH<0> <27> <108><0> &%EE Page 160 This command begins a carbon copy journal entry. This command temporarily suspends carbon copy journal entry. This command resumes a temporarily suspended carbon copy journal entry. This command ends a carbon copy journal entry. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Miscellaneous Control [ESC] 8 Disable paper out sensor ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] 8 1BH 38H <27> <56> &%PF none Description The [ESC] 8 command temporally disables the paper out sensor. The printer does not stop printing or go off-line when it senses it is out of paper. The inquire commands still return paper out status. [ESC] 9 Enable paper out sensor ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] 9 1BH 39H <27> <57> &%PO none Description The [ESC] 9 command enables paper sensing and is intended to reverse the effect of the disable paper out sensor command. If the printer is out of paper when the command is issued, it goes off-line. [ESC] X Set left/right print margins ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] X 1BH 58H <27> <88> none [ESC] l, [ESC] Q Description The [ESC] X command sets left and right print margins in characters from the home position. Where n1 = left margin and n2 = right margin, the absolute position depends on the current print pitch. If the left and right margins are set to the right of the current horizontal position, the new margins become valid in the same line. If the left margin is set to the left of the current horizontal position and the right margin set to the right of the current horizontal position, the right margin setting becomes valid in the same line, but the left margin setting becomes valid in the next line. When the left and right margins are set to the left of the current horizontal position, both left and right margin settings appear to become valid in the next line because an auto-CR is performed by the subsequent data. 28-07764 Rev C Page 161 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [CAN] Clear print buffer ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [CAN] 18H <24> &%RP [CAN] Description The [CAN] command clears the print buffer and any unprinted information in the printer received before it. If the input buffer is not being processed because the printer is out of paper or a form is not inserted, the [CAN] command will not be processed until after the error is cleared. The [CAN] command does not restore default conditions; it only clears the print buffer. [ESC] q Query marker ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] q 1BH 71H <27> <113> none none Description The [ESC] q command returns a status to the host when it is processed. [SOH] The [ESC] q command may be placed in the print data and, when processed by the printer, will return a progress status marker. The value of can be any 8-bit value. It is returned to the host unaltered. The intent is for it to be a sequence number. The command can be used to track the print progress of the printer or verify that data has been printed. Response Note: The [ESC] q command is a line terminator that causes the printer to print all previous data. If a normal line terminator like a [CR] is not supplied, right justify and auto-center do not function correctly. All data is left justified. [ESC] q does not perform a [CR] or [LF] function. Page 162 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide [ESC] x Open cash drawer ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL [ESC] x 1BH 78H <27> <120> &%D1 (Cash Drawer 1) &%D2 (Cash Drawer 2) [ESC] p EPOS Programming Codes Description The [ESC] x command charges the cash drawer, , for 150 ms. Where = <1> (01H) or 1 (31H) for Cash Drawer 1 <2> (02H) or 2 (32H) for Cash Drawer 2 The time period that drawer is activated can be changed in the configuration menu. Activation time ranges from 25 ms to 250 ms. Note 1: Cash drawer open commands are processed as part of print data. They are not immediate commands and are not processed until found in the input buffer by the print processor. Note 2: Cash Drawer 2 is factory configurable in one of two modes. Either pin 2 or 3 is active depending on an internal jumper setting. The factory default is pin 3. Cash Drawer 1 is always on pin 2. The cash drawer status is defined as an open circuit for drawer closed. [ESC] v Perform Auto Cut ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] v 1BH 76H <27><118> &%FC &%PC [ESC] i or [ESC] m Description The [ESC] v command operated the auto cutter. Note: The auto cutter is optional. If the auto cutter is not installed this command will be ignored. [ESC] @ Initialize the printer ASCII [ESC] @ Hexadecimal 1BH 40H Decimal <27> <64> Description 28-07764 The [ESC] @ command initializes the printer. character font and line spacing, are canceled. Rev C All settings, including Page 163 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [BEL] Audio alert ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [BEL] 07H <7> &%BL [BEL] Description When enabled, the [BEL] command starts the audio alert sequence. The default is a single sound, lasting the period of time defined by the audio alert setting. If the audio alert is off, it does not function. [ESC] [BEL] Configure audio alert ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] [BEL] 1BH 07H <27> <7> None None Description The [ESC] [BEL] command alters the way the audio alert sounds. The default is a single sound lasting the period of time defined by the audio alert setting. The [ESC] [BEL] command allows the sound to be altered. Where is the number of alert cycles is the on time of the alert cycle in ten Ms intervals is the off time of the alert cycle in ten Ms intervals [ESC] p 5 Enable/disable paper feed ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range [ESC] p 5 1BH 70H 35H <27> <112> <53> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 Description The [ESC] p 5 command enables or disables the FEED button. When the least significant bit (LSB) of = one, the FEED button is disabled; when it is zero, the button is enabled. To prevent problems caused by accidentally pressing the FEED button, use the command to disable it. The FEED button is temporarily enabled, regardless of how the command is set during the wait time set by the [GS] z 0 command for paper insertion and during the recovery confirmation time. Bit 0 = 1 the FEED button is disabled Bit 0 = 0 the button is enabled. Where Page 164 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] p 4 Select paper sensor(s) to stop printing ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range [ESC] p 4 1BH 70H 34H <27> <112> <52> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 Description The [ESC] p 4 command selects the sensors that tell the printer to stop printing. The default setting occurs when only the Paper Out sensor stops printing. When the paper roll near-end sensor is enabled and the sensor detects a near-end condition during printing, the printer completes the current line and then automatically goes off-line. Replacing a new paper roll restarts the printing. When the paper roll near-end sensor is disabled and a paper near-end condition is detected during printing, the paper out LED comes on, but the printer continues to print. Note: The ITherm® does not allow the Paper Out sensor to be disabled. It is always on. is defined as follows: Bit 0,1 7 On/Off Off On - Hexadecimal Decimal Function 00H <0> Paper roll near-end sensor disabled 01H,02H,03H <1>,<2>,<3> Paper roll near-end sensor enabled 00H <0> Undefined Table 14 Paper Sensor Commands [ESC] p 3 Select paper sensor(s) to output paper-end signals ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range [ESC] p 3 1BH 70H 33H <27> <112> <51> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 Description The [ESC] p 3 command selects the paper sensor that outputs a paper-end signal to the parallel interface when a paper-end is detected. The default setting is when all sensors are enabled. ( = 15). It is possible to select multiple sensors to output signals. If any of the sensors detect a paper end, the paper end signal is output. The command is only available with a parallel interface. The paper-end sensor is an option. If the sensor is not equipped, the settings of bits 0 and 1 of the command are not effective. 28-07764 Rev C Page 165 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Bit 0 1 2 3 4-7 On/Off Off On Off On Off On Off On - Hexadecimal Decimal Function 00H <0> Paper roll near-end sensor disabled 01H <1> Paper roll near-end sensor enabled 00H <0> Paper roll near-end sensor disabled 02H <2> Paper roll near-end sensor enabled 00H <0> Paper roll end sensor disabled 04H <4> Paper roll end sensor enabled 00H <0> Paper roll end sensor disabled 08H <8> Paper roll end sensor enabled Undefined Table 15 Paper Sensor Commands [ESC] < Enable print suppress and data pass through ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] < 1BH 3CH <27> <60> &%PT [ESC] = Description The [ESC] < command provides print suppress and data pass through features. Bit 0 Printer select Bit 1 Pass through On Bits 2 - 7 Undefined If Bit 0 is clear, the printer stops processing data. If Bit 1 is set, the data is passed through the printer and sent out on the serial port. Where Note 1: The pass through command is preprocessed. It is processed as soon as it is received. The printer may continue to print while previously received data is processed. The printer must be on-line and ready to activate the command. Note 2: Pass through should only be used with serial printers. If the printer is configured for parallel operation, the data is still pass through on the IEEE 1284 port. In most cases this is not useful. Note 3: When Ithaca® Series 50 Printer compatibility is being used, these commands do not function. Series 50 Printer pass through must be used. Note 4: Multi-drop is not operational during suppress and pass through. If a multi-drop address is present in the pass through data, it is not processed. Page 166 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ESC] y Set control feature commands ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Where n [ESC] y 1BH 79H <27> <121> &%Y0-9 or &%YX (for numbers greater than nine) [ESC] y 0 Reinitializes the printer and forces Citizen mode 1 Reinitializes the printer and forces Star mode 2 Reinitializes the printer and forces iTherm® 280 mode 3 Reinitializes the printer and forces extended EPOS mode 4 Disables IPCL commands 5 Enables IPCL commands 6 Disables inquire processing (All command preprocessing is disabled.) 7 Enables inquire processing 8 Enables extended diagnostics 9 Print Current Configuration 10 Not used 11 Overlays the current character chart with Group 2 OCR MA Characters 12 Replaces the OCR characters with normal characters 13 Not used 14 Forces head maintenance 15 Print Current totals 16 Enable Test Font 17 Requests the printer to enter remote OFF. 18 Requests the printer to exit remote OFF. 20 Print alignment settings Description The [ESC] y command enables and disables command set features. It is possible that the IPCL commands will interfere with print data. If this occurs, the IPCL can be disabled with an [ESC] y <4> command. Note 1: Once IPCL commands are disabled, the Enable IPLC command will not be a valid IPCL code. Note 2: [ESC] y <0>, <1>, <2>, and <3> allow the printer to switch between emulation modes. When the switch takes place, the current print buffer is printed, and the printer reinitializes. These commands do not permanently change the configuration. A power on reset restores the mode that was configured in menu mode. A reset by command or from the INIT pin does not restore the mode. 28-07764 Rev C Page 167 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Note 3: [ESC] y <6> and <7> enable and disable the inquire process. These commands are not processed as they are received, but are buffered then processed. The buffering process allows inquire commands sent after a disable to be answered. In addition, inquires sent after an enable may not be answered. (See additional notes 3 and 4 on the next page). Note 4: The printer has a resident OCR-MA font. It is defined and mapped per ANSI X3.111-1986. Once mapped into a code page, it can be removed by issuing an [ESC] y <12> command or a code-page select command. Note 5: In EPOS mode, the [ESC] y command is active. [ESC] ~ Extended Configuration and Control ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] ~ 1BH 7EH <27> <126> none [ESC] ~ Description The [ESC] ~ commands are extended diagnostics commands. They must all be preceded with an enabling command. These commands (in general) are not intended to be used by the end user. Page 168 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Remote Power Control The iTherm® 280 Printer has a remote power control command that instructs it to enter OFF mode. When the command is issued, the printer performs print cartridge maintenance and enters OFF mode. Unlike pushing the * button, remote power mode leaves the communications active. All commands except the exit power down command are ignored. [ESC] y Remote Power Control ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Where n [ESC] y 1BH 79H <27> <121> &%YX17 or &%YX18 [ESC] y 17 Requests the printer to enter remote OFF. 18 Requests the printer to exit remote OFF Description Inquiry (ENQ) commands are accepted and answered in remote power down mode. The printer reactivates if the * button is pressed or a power up command is received. Note 1: If power is lost after the power down command is issued, the printer remembers it is in power down mode but does not reactivate the communications link. The * button must be pushed to return the printer to full operation. Note 2: This command is not available in STAR mode. 28-07764 Rev C Page 169 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Documented Extended Control commands The iTherm® 280 has a number of Extended Control commands designed to make operation and maintenance of the printer easier for the host application. For further details, refer to the ITherm® Extended Control discussion in Chapter 8. [SOH] Begin multi-drop control ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL Where [SOH] 01H <1> none is the printer address. Addresses of A, B, or C are configurable. Description The printer must be addressed in multi-drop mode. [SOH] is the addressing command. If the printer is configured with an address of ‘A,’ it operates when addressed. When any other address is sent to the printer, it enters print suppress mode. An address of ‘Z’ is n universal address that activates the printer. Page 170 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Printer Status Status Inquire The iTherm® 280 Printer is designed for use as part of an automated system where the host computer makes every attempt to correct problems with the printer. In addition, the host application requires that it be able to obtain more information from the printer than is typical of normal computer printers. For example, a normal computer printer does not have cash drawers, such additional features require that the standard printer protocol be extended to deal with the added features of a point-of-sale (POS) printer. All inquire commands are processed as they are received (preprocessed or real time) and require a response from the printer. Consequently, parallel, IEEE 1284 bidirectional communications, USB or bidirectional serial operation is required. The iTherm® 280 Printer looks at and evaluates all commands as they are received, and does not respond to inquire commands that happen to be embedded in graphics or other commands. (Refer to the buffer and preprocessor descriptions in later sections.) In all cases, inquire commands are responded to by an acknowledged (ACK) or a not acknowledged (NAK) and then the command ID, which allows the host application to make multiple requests and receive identifiable responses. If the printer is configured for serial or USB operation the status is automatically returned to the host. If the printer is configured for parallel, IEEE 1284 operation, the HOST must initiate a reverse channel request to return the status. Serial and USB Mode Inquire All inquire (ENQ) commands require a response from the printer. During serial operation, all inquire commands are responded to by an acknowledged (ACK) or not acknowledged (NAK), the command ID, and in some cases status. Most status responses sequences contain a length field to help decode and separate responses. In general the printer should be configured for “Buffer Full Only” off-line operation if inquire commands are used. This prevents the printer from using flow control for anything but buffer full. The programmer must take on the responsibility for assuring that inquire commands are used to maintain status of the printer. The printer always accepts serial data even when it is off-line. The printer has reserve buffer space that allows additional information to be received even if the printer is signaling buffer full or off-line. Because inquire commands are processed before they go into the buffer, the printer responds even when it is busy printing. In serial mode, the response to an inquiry should be received by the host before another inquire command is issued to the printer. When the printer receives an inquiry, it generates a response. If inquiries are sent to the printer too quickly, the printer spends all of its time responding and does not have time to print. 28-07764 Rev C Page 171 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes IEEE 1284 Mode Inquire In parallel, IEEE 1284 mode, status information can be returned to the host through the IEEE 1284 reverse channel. After the host makes an inquire request, it activates IEEE 1284 mode 0 reverse channel and waits for a response from the printer. The response to the inquire is identical to serial mode in format. The printer always accepts IEEE 1284 reverse-channel requests but does not accept inquire commands when off-line. It is possible to obtain status when off-line by placing the printer in dynamic response mode before the printer goes off-line. The IEEE 1284 reverse channel responds to status changes even when the printer is off-line. In general, the printer should be configured for “Buffer Full Only” off-line operation if inquire commands are used. This prevents the printer from using flow control for anything but buffer full. The programmer must take on the responsibility for assuring that inquire commands are used to maintain status of the printer. Inquire Commands [ENQ] Inquire printer status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ENQ] 05H <5> none [GS] r or [DLE] [ENQ] or [DLE] [EOT] Description The [ENQ] command inquires about the printer’s status and returns a result. Note: When the printer is off-line, inquires may not be accepted. [ENQ] <1> Inquire Cash Drawer 1 status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <1> 05H 01H <5> <1> Cash Drawer 1 Status ACK <1> (06H 01H) Cash Drawer 1 is closed. NAK <1> (15H 01H) Cash Drawer 1 is open. Cash drawer status is defined as open circuit being drawer closed. [ENQ] <3> Inquire receipt paper low status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <3> 05H 03H <5> <3> Receipt paper low ACK <3> (06H 03H) Receipt paper is present. NAK <3> (15H 03H) Receipt paper is low. Page 172 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ENQ] <4> Inquire receipt paper out status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <4> 05H 04H <5> <4> Receipt paper exhausted ACK <4> (06H 04H) Receipt paper is present NAK <4> (15H 04H) Receipt paper is exhausted [ENQ] <8> Inquire cover open status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <8> 05H 08H <5> <8> Cover open/closed status ACK <8> (06H 08H) The cover is closed NAK <8> (15H 08H) The cover is open [ENQ] <9> Is the buffer empty? Clear the IEEE 1284 buffer. ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function [ENQ] <9> 05H 09H <5> <9> The [ENQ] <9> command allows the host to know when the print buffer is empty. If IEEE 1284 is active, the command also clears the response buffer. ACK <9> (06H 09H) The buffer is empty. NAK <9> (15H 09H) The buffer is not empty. Response [ENQ] <10> ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response Request printer reset [ENQ] <10> 05H 0AH <5> <10> Reset printer Serial Parallel ACK <10> (06H 0AH) No response The command was accepted. NAK <10> (15H 0AH) The command was rejected. Description The ENQ <10>, EPOS DLE ENQ commands and the INIT pin all have the same effect and are referred to as reset commands. To prevent data loss, the printer tries to finish printing the buffered data. When operator intervention with the printer is required for any reason, data loss results. The reset operation is saved until the printer goes idle. In the case of a slip request command or any command that waits for the operator, the printer is idle. If the printer is idle and a reset command is received or pending, the printer resets, and the buffer clears. If the host resets an operator intervention operation, any remaining buffered data is cleared. 28-07764 Rev C Page 173 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes When the printer receives a reset command, the printer goes off-line and/or busy until the reset completes. In serial mode, the printer may have information in its high-speed buffer that was received after the reset command but before the reset was processed. If the host application continues to send information to the printer after a reset command, some of that information may be processed before the reset is processed. In parallel mode, the printer goes busy after the reset is received but before the next byte is accepted. The printer accepts an [ENQ] <10> in parallel mode. It, however, is not acknowledged. If both the serial and parallel ports are active, the serial reset is not acknowledged either because the reset operation removes the parallel response. In IEEE 1284 mode, the response buffer is cleared by a reset command, which prevents responses in IEEE 1284 mode as well. Note: If reset inhibit is set in the configuration menu, this command is ignored. [ENQ] <11> Inquire power cycle status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <11> 05H 0BH <5> <11> Has the printer been power cycled since the last request? ACK <11> (06H 0BH) Printer has been power cycled since the last [ENQ] <11> NAK <5> (15H 0BH) Printer has not power cycled since the last [ENQ] <11> Description The first time after a reset, the command returns [ACK] <11>, after that the command returns [NAK] <11>. The command allows the application to determine if the printer has been power cycled and needs to be reinitialized. The [ENQ] <10> command and the INIT signal on the parallel port both cause the printer to return power up status. [ENQ] <14> Inquire Mechanical error status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <14> 05H 0EH <5> <14> Error status ACK <14> (06H 0EH) NAK <14> (15H 0EH) No mechanical errors Mechanical error has occurred (Use [ENQ]<22> to identify the error) Note: For this status request to function, the "Buffer Full Only" off-line option should be selected. Page 174 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide [ENQ] <15> ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Note Response Where : : Programming Codes Inquire printer state [ENQ] <15> 05H 11H <5> <15> The [ENQ] <15> command returns the current printer state [ENQ] <17> also returns the current printer state, but it should not be used as it conflicts with XON/XOFF flow control. [ACK] <15> … <15> is the echo of the command ID. is the number of return bytes + 40 (28H) (to prevent confusion with XON/XOFF). bit 0 = 1 always bit 1 = Cover is closed. bit 2 = Receipt paper is out. bit 3 = 0 bit 4 = Printer is waiting in an error mode. Use [ENQ]<22> to identify the specific error and [ENQ]<10> to recover bit 5 = 0 bit 6 = 1 always bit 7 = 0 always bit 0 - 5 = 0 always bit 6 = 1 always bit 7 = 0 always Note: For this status request to function, the "Buffer Full Only" off-line option should be selected. 28-07764 Rev C Page 175 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ENQ] <20> Inquire all printer status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <20> 05H 14H <5> <20> The [ENQ] <20> command returns all status flags [ACK] <20> … Where <20> is the echo of command ID. is the number of return bytes + 40 (28H) (to prevent confusion with XON/XOFF). bit 0 = Cash Drawer 1 is open. bit 1 = Cash Drawer 2 is open bit 2 = Receipt paper is out. bit 3 = 0 bit 4 = Receipt paper error occurred. (low or out) bit 5 = 0 bit 6 = 1 always bit 7 = 0 always bit 0 = 1 always bit 1 = Cover is closed. bit 2 = Buffer is empty. bit 3 = Printer has been power cycled, Reading this does not affect the state of the power-cycled flag. (Use [ENQ] <11> to reset the power cycled bit.) bit 4 = Printer is waiting in an error mode. Use [ENQ]<22> to identify the specific error and [ENQ]<10> to recover bit 5 = 0 bit 6 = 1 always bit 7 = 0 always bit 0 = 1 always (Receipt Station) bit 1 = 0 bit 2 = 0 bit 3 = 0 bit 4 = Undefined bit 5 = Printer is blocking print (Cover is open or out of paper.) bit 6 = 1 always bit 7 = 0 always bit 0 = Printer supports receipts. bit 1 = Printer supports inserted forms. bit 2 = Printer supports multiple colors bit 3 = Printer supports cutter. bit 4 = Printer supports partial cuts. bit 5 = 0 bit 6 = 1 always bit 7 = 0 always Percentage of ink remaining on Head 1 (0-100) + 40 (28H) Percentage of ink remaining on Head 2 (0-100) + 40 (28H) Current multi-head alignment (0-16, 8 = 0 offset) : : : : : : : Page 176 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ENQ] <21> Inquire printer ID ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <21> 05H 15H <5> <21> The [ENQ] <21> command returns the printer IEEE 1284 ID string. [ACK] <21> {ID string} Where <21> is the echo of the command ID and is the number of return bytes in the ID string {ID string} is the IEEE ID return string, which follows: MFG:Ithaca-Periph.; CMD:PJ1000CL,IPCL; CLS:PRINTER; MDL:1000 PcOS; DES:Ithaca-Peripherals iTherm® 280; REV:PE1200-01.16 OPTS:$20xy Where x is a bit field defined as follows: bit 0 = 1 Red paper support bit 1 = 1 Green paper support bit 2 = 1 Blue paper support bit 3 = Always 0 bit 4 = Always 1 bit 5 = Always 1 bit 6 = Always 0 bit 7 = Always 0 The y is a bit field defined as follows: bit 0 = 0 bit 1 = Knife is installed. bit 2 = 0 bit 3 = Always 0 bit 4 = Always 1 bit 5 = Always 1 bit 6 = Always 0 bit 7 = Always 0 28-07764 Rev C Page 177 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ENQ] <22> Inquire Error status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <22> 05H 17H <5> <22> The [ENQ] <22> command reports on the error status. [ACK] <22> Where <22> is the echo of the command ID. is the number of return bytes + 40 (28H) (to prevent confusion with XON/XOFF). : Bit status as follows: bit 0 = Cover is open. bit 1 = Receipt Paper is Low bit 2 = Receipt paper is out. bit 3 = Ink is Low (This is set if either cartridge is low) bit 4 = Either or Both Cartridges are removed. bit 5 = The Auto-Cutter has faulted. bit 6 = 1 always bit 7 = An serious error has occurred. Note 1: If bit 7 is set, a serious error has occurred. The printer is not able to recover from type of error without operator intervention. If bit 7 is set without bit 5 (Auto-cutter fault) then the print carriage has faulted, which is probably caused by a paper jam or a component failure. The host system may issue an [ENQ]<10> (Reset Request command) to attempt to recover. The Reset Request will reset the printer to an initial power up state. All data will be lost. Note 2: When a serious error occurs (bit 7 set) the printer enters a static state. Status responses will reflect the state of the printer when the error occurred. Note 3: For this status request to function during a serious error, the "Buffer Full Only" off line option should be selected. Page 178 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes [ENQ] <23> Inquire user-store status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <23> 05H 17H <5> <23> The [ENQ] <23> command reports on the user-store status. [ACK] <23> <0> Where <23> is the echo of command ID. The report is a null terminated string with the following format: 12345[CR][LF](Free user store) 12345 Type Name…[CR][LF] (First entry) etc. 12345 Type Name…[CR][LF] (Last entry) <0> Type The type field describes the type of information. M = macro C = character definition [ENQ] <24> Inquire Color status ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Function Response [ENQ] <24> 05H 18H <5> <24> The [ENQ] <24> command reports Color Cartridge status. [ACK] <24> Where <24> Is the echo of command Secondary Paper Color 0 = Not installed, 1 = Red, 2 = Green, 4 = Blue Primary Paper Color 1 = Red, 2 = Green, 4 = Blue 16 = Black Pen Status bit 0 = Not defined bit 1 = Not defined bit 2 = Secondary Cartridge not installed bit 3 = Primary Cartridge not installed bit 4 = Secondary Cartridge low on ink. bit 5 = Primary Cartridge low on ink. bit 6 = 1 always bit 7 = 0 always [ESC] [EM]P ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 28-07764 Activate Periodic Status Back [ESC] [EM] P 1BH 19H 50H <27> <25> <80> None None This command activates the periodic status back feature. It will automatically return an [ENQ]<20> status (See page Error! Bookmark Rev C Page 179 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Where not defined.) on a periodic bases. The value of n is the period in 100 MS intervals. This command is saved through power cycles. Once set it need not be set again, however you can set it the same value repeatedly as it is only saved if it is changed. In general it should not be changed on a regular bases. n = Interval in 100 MS increments. IE 20 = 2 Seconds. Setting the value to 0 disables the feature. Note: Periodic status back can also be activated with the [ESC][EM]p command, however it is not save during a power cycle. [ESC] [EM]p ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Where Where Page 180 Activate Periodic Status Back [ESC] [EM] p 1BH 19H 70H <27> <25> <112> None None This command temporarily disables and enables the periodic status back feature if previously activated with the [ESC][EM]P command. n = 0 disables PSB and n = (non zero) Enables PSB at the interval defined by the [ESC][EM]P command. If not previously activated with the [ESC][EM]P command, this command will activate it but not save the value through a power cycle. n = Interval in 100 MS increments. IE 20 = 2 Seconds. Setting the value to 0 disables the feature. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes ESC/POSTM Codes The EPOS codes that are supported by the iTherm® 280 Printer are listed in this section. TransAct Technologies, Inc. has no control over how Epson extends or changes these control codes, and can make no guarantees as to the operation of our printer when it replaces an Epson printer. The TM-T90 and EPOS emulation’s are intended to make it as easy as possible to replace an Epson printer with an iTherm® 280 Printer. The iTherm® 280 Printer provides two Epson emulations. The first emulation is as close as possible to the TM-T90 Printer and tries to make the iTherm® 280 Printer a drop in replacement. However, when the iTherm®280 Printer is in Epson TM-T90 emulation mode, it is subject to the same limitations as a TM-T90 Printer. The second Epson emulation is EPOS mode. It extends and enhances the TM-T90 emulation to remove some of the restrictions and give access to some of the iTherm® 280 Printer features not addressed by the TM-T90. It is intended that the standard Ithaca® PcOS emulation be used for new applications. The following section lists all TM-T90 and EPOS commands that are processed. They are as close as possible to Epson’s definitions. The user must remember that the iTherm® 280 EPOS emulation, unlike the TM-T90 emulation, is not designed as a drop in replacement for an Epson printer. The iTherm® 280 Printer is designed to bring new and unique features and functionality’s to a point-of-sale receipt printer. These features are not always compatible with Epson printers. Note: The Epson emulation does not support Unicode, Double Byte or downloaded True Type fonts. Differences between Epson TM T90 and iTherm® 280 In a few minor ways, the operation and programming iTherm® 280 is not identical to a TM-T90. The following is a summary of key differences. Page Mode The page mode in the iTherm® 280 operates in the same way as the TM-T88 and the TM-T90, however, the page size can be larger if the ESC/POS emulation is selected. Undocumented Epson Commands There are a number of undocumented commands in Epson printers. Where TransAct is aware of these commands, they have been duplicated in the iTherm® 280 Printer. Real-time Status The iTherm® 280 Printer is available in serial and parallel versions. Epson supports parallel operation through a parallel to serial interface. Consequently, the response times for the iTherm® 280 Printer are generally faster. The iTherm® 280 Printer implements the IEEE 1284 nibble-mode standard. If an application requires real-time status from the printer, the IEEE 1284 bi-directional protocol must be used. The iTherm® 280 Printer does not support byte mode. If the iTherm® 280 Printer is used in an IEEE 1284 28-07764 Rev C Page 181 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes compliant system, byte mode should be an extension and the default should be nibble mode. The iTherm® 280 Printer supports the EPOS real-time status commands [DLE] [ENQ] and [DLE] [EOT] and are preprocessed by the printer. The printer supports all the response bit fields as defined by the TM-T88 and TM-T90 Printers. See the descriptions below. The iTherm® 280 Printer looks at and evaluates all commands as they are received and does not respond to [DLE] [ENQ] or [DLE] [EOT] commands that happen to be embedded in graphics or other commands. (Refer to the buffer and preprocessor descriptions in later sections.) Page 182 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM-T88 Commands Print and Feed Commands Command LF 0AH CR 0DH ESC d 1BH,64H ESC J 1BH,4AH Line Spacing Commands Name Print and line feed Print and carriage return Print and feed lines Print and feed paper vertical units Page 191 191 191 192 Command ESC 2 1BH,32H ESC 3 1BH,33H Character Commands Name Select default line spacing, 1/6 lpi Set line spacing Page 193 193 Command ESC SP 1BH,20H ESC ! 1BH,21H ESC % 1BH,25H ESC & 1BH,26H ESC 1BH,2DH ESC ? 1BH,3FH ESC E 1BH,45H ESC G 1BH,47H ESC M 1BH,4DH ESC R 1BH,52H ESC V 1BH,56H ESC t 1BH,74H ESC { 1BH,7BH GS ! 1DH,21H GS B 1DH,42H Panel Button Commands Name Set right-side character spacing Select print mode(s) Select/cancel user-defined character sets Define user-defined characters Turn underline mode on/off Cancel user-defined characters Turn emphasized mode on/off Turn double-strike mode on/off Select character font Select an international character set Turn on/off 90° rotation mode Select character code table Turn upside-down printing mode on/off Select character size Turn white/black reverse printing mode on/off Page 193 199 193 194 199 194 199 200 194 195 200 198 200 201 198 Command ESC c 5 Name Enable/disable panel buttons Page 202 Name Select paper sensor(s) to stop printing Page 203 1BH,63H, 35H Paper Sensor Commands Command ESC c 4 ESC c 3 28-07764 1BH,63H, 34H 1BH,63H, 33H Select paper sensor(s) to output paper out signals Rev C 204 Page 183 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM-T88 Commands Print Position Commands Command HT ESC $ ESC D ESC \ ESC a GS L GS T GS W Bit-image Command Name Set horizontal tab positions Set absolute print position Set horizontal tab positions Set relative print position Select justification Set left margin Set print position to the beginning of the line Set printing area width Page 206 205 207 205 206 207 205 207 Name Select bit-image mode Print raster bit image Page 209 209 Command DLE EOT 10H,04H DLE ENQ 10H,05H GS a 1DH,61H GS r 1DH,72H Bar Code Commands Name Real-time status transmission Real-time status request to printer Enable/disable Automatic Status Back (ASB) Transmit status Page 213 213 210 212 Command GS H 1DH,48H GS f 1DH,66H GS h 1DH,68H GS k 1DH,6BH GS w 1DH,77H Mechanism Control Commands Name Select printing position of HRI characters Select font HRI characters Set bar code height Print bar code Set bar code width Command GS V Name Select cut mode and cut paper Command ESC * GS v 0 09H 1BH,24H 1BH,44H 1BH,5CH 1BH,61H 1DH,4CH 1DH,54H 1DH,57H 1BH,2AH 1DH,76H,30 H Status Commands Page 184 1DH,56H Rev C Page 222 222 221 220 220 Page 223 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM-T88 Commands Miscellaneous Commands Command DLE DC4 <1> DLE DC4 <2> DLE DC4 <8> ESC = ESC @ ESC p GS ( A 10H,14H,01H 10H,14H,02H 10H,14H,08H 1BH,3DH 1BH,40H 1BH,70H 1DH,28H,41 H GS I 1DH,49H GS P 1DH,50H GS b 1DH,62H GS c 1DH,63H GS g 0 1DH,67H,30 H GS g 2 1DH,67H,32 H Macro Function Commands Name Generate pulse in real-time Execute power-off sequence Clear buffers Select peripheral device status Initialize printer Generate pulse Enter Test Mode Page 225 225 225 226 224 225 228 Transmit printer ID Set horizontal and vertical motion units Turns smoothing mode on/off Print counter Initialize maintenance counter 224 224 201 228 228 Transmit maintenance counter value 229 Command GS : 1DH,3AH GS ^ r t m 1DH,5EH Page Mode Commands Name Start/end macro definition Execute macro Page 230 230 Command FF CAN ESC FF ESC L ESC S 0CH 18H 1BH,0CH 1BH,4CH 1BH,53H Page 89 217 220 218 218 ESC T ESC W GS $ 1BH,54H 1BH,57H 1DH,24H GS \ 1DH,5CH Name Print and return to standard mode Cancel print data in page mode Print data in page mode Select Page mode Switches from page mode to standard mode Select print direction in page mode Set printing area in page mode Set absolute vertical print position in page mode Set relative vertical print position in page mode Name Define single user-defined bit-image Print single user-defined bit-image Page 234 235 218 218 220 220 User-defined Memory Commands Command GS * GS / 1DH,2AH 1DH,2FH Table 16 Supported TM-T90 Commands 28-07764 Rev C Page 185 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Undocumented TM-T88 Commands Command ESC I ESC m ESC u ESC v Name Auto Cut Auto Cut Transmit Peripheral Device Status Transmit Paper status 223 223 214 215 Table 17 Undocumented TM-T90 Commands Page 186 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM-T90 Commands Print and Feed Commands Command LF CR ESC d ESC e ESC J ESC K Name Print and line feed Print and carriage return Print and feed lines Print and reverse feed lines Print and feed paper vertical units Print and reverse feed [ x (1/144)] inches Print and reverse feed Page 191 191 191 191 192 192 Command ESC 2 1BH,32H ESC 3 1BH,33H Character Commands Name Select default line spacing, 1/6 lpi Set line spacing Page 193 193 Command ESC SP ESC ! ESC % ESC & ESC ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC ? ESC E ESC G ESC M ESC R ESC V ESC [ T ESC ^ ESC r ESC t ESC { GS ! GS # GS B Name Set right-side character spacing Select print mode(s) Select/cancel user-defined character sets Define user-defined characters Turn underline mode on/off Set italics mode Reset italics mode Cancel user-defined characters Turn emphasized mode on/off Turn on/off double-strike mode Select character font Select an international character set Turn on/off 90° rotation mode Select character code table Print control character Select color Select character code table Turn on/off upside-down printing mode Set character size Insert euro character Turn white/black reverse printing mode on/off Page 193 199 193 194 199 201 201 194 199 200 194 195 200 196 198 198 198 200 201 198 198 Name Enable/disable panel buttons Page 202 0AH 0DH 1BH,64H 1BH,65H 1BH,4AH 1BH,4BH ESC j 1BH,6AH Line Spacing Command 1BH,20H 1BH,21H 1BH,25H 1BH,26H 1BH,2DH 1BH,34H 1BH,35H 1BH,3FH 1BH,45H 1BH,47H 1BH,4DH 1BH,52H 1BH,56H 1BH,5BH, 54H 1BH,5EH 1BH,72H 1BH,74H 1BH,7BH 1DH,21H 1DH,23H 1DH,42H 192 Panel Button Commands Command ESC c 5 1BH,63H, 35H Table 18 Supported EPOS Commands 28-07764 Rev C Page 187 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM-T90 Commands Paper Sensor Commands Command ESC c 4 ESC c 3 1BH,63H, 34H 1BH,63H, 33H ESC c 1 1BH, 63H, 31H ESC c 0 1BH, 63H, 30H Print Position Commands Command BS HT ESC $ ESC < ESC D ESC Q ESC U ESC \ ESC a ESC l GS L GS T 08H 09H 1BH,24H 1BH,3CH 1BH,44H 1BH,51H 1BH,55H 1BH,5CH 1BH,61H 1BH,6CH 1DH,4CH 1DH,54H GS W 1DH,57H Bit-image Commands Command ESC * GS v 0 Status Commands 1BH,2AH 1DH,76H,30H Command DLE EOT DLE ENQ ESC u ESC v GS a 10H,04H 10H,05H 1BH, 75H 1BH, 76H 1DH,61H GS r 1DH,72H Page 188 Name Select paper sensor(s) to stop printing. Select paper sensor(s) to output paper out signals. Select paper types for command settings Select paper types for printing Page 203 204 217 216 Name Set back space Set horizontal tab positions Set absolute print position Return home Set horizontal tab positions Set right margin in characters Turn on/off unidirectional printing mode Set relative print position Select justification Set left right margin in characters Set left margin Set print position to the beginning of the line Set printing area width Page 206 206 205 208 207 208 207 205 206 208 207 205 Name Select bit-image mode Print raster bit image Page 209 209 Name Transmit real-time status Real-time status request to printer Transmit peripheral status Transmit paper status Enable/disable automatic status back (ASB) Transmit status Page 213 227 214 215 210 Rev C 207 212 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM-T90 Commands Bar Code Commands Command GS H 1DH,48H GS f 1DH,66H GS h 1DH,68H GS k 1DH,6BH GS w 1DH,77H Mechanism Control Commands Name Select printing position of HRI characters Select font HRI characters Set bar code height Print bar code Set bar code width Page 222 222 221 220 220 Command GS V 1DH,56H ESC I 1BH,69H ESC m 1BH,69H BEL 07H ESC BEL 1BH,07H Miscellaneous Commands Name Select cut mode and cut paper Set partial knife cut Set partial knife cut Sound buzzer Sound buzzer Page 223 223 194 223 223 Command DLE DC4 <1> 10H,14H,01H DLE DC4 <2> 10H,14H,02H DLE DC4 <8> 10H,14H,08H ESC = 1BH,3DH ESC @ 1BH,40H ESC p 1BH,70H GS ( A 1DH, 28H,41H GS I 1DH,49H GS P 1DH,50H GS b 1DH,62H GS c 1DH,63H GS g 0 1DH,67H,30H GS g 2 1DH,67H,32H Macro Function Commands Name Generate pulse in real-time Execute power-off sequence Clear buffers Select peripheral device status Initialize printer Generate pulse Enter test mode Transmit printer ID Set horizontal and vertical motion units Turns smoothing mode on/off Print counter Initialize maintenance counter Transmit maintenance counter value Page 225 225 225 226 224 225 228 224 224 201 228 228 229 Command GS : 1DH,3AH GS ^ r t m 1DH,5EH GS _ 1DH,5FH Page Mode Commands Name Start/end macro definition Execute macro Delete start-up macro definition Page 230 230 231 Command FF CAN ESC FF ESC L ESC S 0CH 18H 1BH,0CH 1BH,4CH 1BH,53H ESC T ESC W GS $ 1BH,54H 1BH,57H 1DH,24H GS \ 1DH,5CH Name Print and return to standard mode Cancel print data in page mode Print data in page mode Select Page mode Switches from page mode to standard mode Select print direction in page mode Set printing area in page mode Set absolute vertical print position in page mode Set relative vertical print position in page mode 28-07764 Rev C Page 89 162 220 218 218 218 218 220 220 Page 189 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM-T90 Commands User-defined Memory Commands Command GS - … GS * GS / GS 3 1DH,2DH, … 1DH,30H, … 1DH,31H, … 1DH,2AH 1DH,2FH 1DH,33H GS 5 1DH,35H GS 6 GS 7 1DH,36H 1DH,37H GS 0 GS 1 … Name Define user-defined bit image Page 231 Print user-defined bit image 233 Erase single entry from nonvolatile memory Define single user-defined bit-image Print single user-defined bit-image Query nonvolatile memory pool information Erase all entries from nonvolatile memory Save user-defined character set Select user-defined character set 233 234 235 235 233 235 235 Extended Electronic Journal Commands Electronic Journal Commands Command [ESC][GS]I <0> [ESC][GS]E <0> [ESC][GS]P< Sl> < Ll>< Lh> [ESC][GS]R< Sl> < Sh>< Ll>< Lh> Page 190 1BH 1DH 50H Name Electronic journal initialize and set password Electronic journal erase the electronic journal Print the electronic journal 1BH 1DH 52H Report the electronic journal 1BH 1DH 49H 1BH 1DH 45H Rev C Page 151 151 152 152 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes TM-T88 / TM-T90 and ESC/POSTM Command Descriptions The TM-T90 and EPOS emulation’s are grouped together. The TM-T90 emulation is a subset of the EPOS emulation. The EPOS-only commands are noted. Print and Feed Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Print and Line Feed [LF] 0AH <10> The [LF] command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds one line. The amount of paper fed per line is based on the value set using the line spacing command. The default setting is 1/6 inch. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Print and Carriage Return [CR] 0DH <13> When auto line feed is enabled, [CR] functions in the same way as [LF]. When auto line feed is disabled, [CR] prints the data in the print buffer and does not feed the paper. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Print and Feed Lines [ESC] d 1BH 64H <27> <100> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] d command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds lines. The amount of paper fed per line is based on the value set using the line spacing command. The maximum paper feed amount is 40 inches. The default setting of the paper feed amount is 1/6 inch. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Print and Reverse Feed Lines [ESC] e 1BH 65H <27> <101> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] e command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds lines in the reverse direction. The amount of paper fed per line is based on the value set using the line spacing command. The maximum reverse paper feed amount is 48/144 inch. The default setting of the paper feed amount is 1/6 inch. 28-07764 Rev C Page 191 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Print and Feed Paper [ESC] J 1BH 4AH <27> <74> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] J command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds the paper [n x (1/144)] inches, which means that the printer can feed the paper in half-dot units. The command is used to temporarily feed a specific length without changing the line spacing set by other commands. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Print and Reverse Feed Lines [ESC] K 1BH 4BH <27> <75> 0 ≤ n ≤ 48 The [ESC] K command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds the paper [ x (1/144)] inches in the reverse direction. Consequently, the printer can feed the paper in half-dot units in the reverse direction. The command is used to temporarily feed a specific length without changing the line spacing set by other commands. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Print and Reverse Feed [ESC] j 1BH 6AH <27> <106> 0 ≤ n ≤ 48 The [ESC] j command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds the paper one line in reverse. Page 192 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Line Spacing Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Select Default Line Spacing [ESC] 2 1BH 32H <27> <50> The [ESC] 2 command sets the line spacing to 1/6 inch, which is equivalent to 12 dots. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Set Line Spacing [ESC] 3 1BH 33H <27> <51> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] 3 command sets the line spacing to [ x (1/144)] inches. The default setting of the paper feed amount is 1/6 inch ( = 24). The line spacing can be set in half-dot units. Character Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Set Right-Side Character Spacing [ESC] SP 1BH 20H <27> <32> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] SP sets the right-side character spacing in [ x (1/160)] inches. It is used to change the spacing between characters. The default right-side character spacing is set to zero. ( = 0). Right-side character spacing can be set in half-dot units. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Select/Cancel User-Defined Character Set [ESC] % 1BH 25H <27> <37> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] % command selects or cancels the user-defined character set. When the least significant bit (LSB) of is one, the user-defined character set is selected. When is zero, the internal character set is selected, which is the default setting. 28-07764 Rev C Page 193 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Define User-Defined Characters [ESC] & [x1 d1 … d(y x x1)] … [xk d1 … d(y x xk)] 1BH 26H y c1 c2 [x1 d1 … d(y x x1)] … [xk d1 … d(y x xk)] <27> <38> y c1 c2 [x1 d1 … d(y x x1)] … [xk d1 … d(y x xk)] y=2 32 ≤ c1 ≤ c2 ≤ 126 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 (9 x 9 font) 0 ≤ x ≤ 9 (7 x 9 font) 0 ≤ d1 … d(y x x) ≤ 255 The [ESC] & [x1 d1 … d(y x x1)] … [xk d1 … d(y x xk)] command defines user-defined characters from character code to . and are the configurations of user-defined characters. specifies the number of bytes in the vertical direction. specifies the number of bytes in the horizontal direction. Character codes ranging from ASCII code 20H (32) to 7EH (126) can be defined by and . Up to 19 user-defined characters can be defined. Data () specifies a bit printed to one and not printed to zero. At the default, user-defined characters are not defined, and the internal character set is printed. Once the user-defined characters have been defined, they are available until [ESC] @ or [ESC] ? is executed; the user-defined characters are redefined; the power is turned off; or the printer is reset. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Cancel User-Defined Characters [ESC] ? 1BH 3FH <27> <63> 32 ≤ n ≤ 126 The [ESC] ? command cancels the user-defined characters defined for character code . After the user-defined characters are canceled, the internal character set is printed. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Select Character Font [ESC] M 1BH 4DH <27> <77> 0,1,48,49 The [ESC] M command selects one-byte character font. 0, 48 1, 49 Page 194 Function Page 0 [PC437 (U.S.A. and Standard Europe)] Page 1 [PC850 (Multilingual)] Table 19 Select Character Font Table Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Default Description Programming Codes Select an International Character Set ESC R 1BH 52H <27> <82> 0 ≤ n ≤ 74 = 0 The ESC R command selects an international character set, , from the following table. International Character Sets Country ASCII French German British Danish I Swedish I Italian Spanish I Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin American French Canadian Dutch Swedish II Swedish III Swedish IV Turkish Swiss I Swiss II Cyrillic II-866 Polska Mazovia ISO Latin 2 Serbo Croatic I Serbo Croatic II Multilingual Norway Portugal Turkey 28-07764 Epson ID Country 0 Greek 437 1 Greek 928 2 Greek 437 CYPRUS 3 ECMA-94 4 Canada French 5 Cyrillic I-855 6 Cyrillic II-866 7 East Europe Latin II-852 8 Greek 869 9 Windows East Europe 10 Windows Greek 11 Latin 5 (Windows Turkey) 12 Windows Cyrillic 13 Hungarian CWI 14 Kamenicky (MJK) 15 ISO Latin 4 (8859/4) 16 Turkey_857 17 Roman-8 18 Hebrew NC (862) 19 Hebrew OC 20 Windows Hebrew 21 KBL- Lithuanian 22 Ukrainian 23 ISO Latin 6 (8859/10) 24 Windows Baltic 25 Cyrillic-Latvian 26 Bulgarian 27 Icelandic-861 28 Baltic 774 29 Arabic Table 20 International Character Sets Rev C Epson ID 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 49 50 51 52 54 55 56 57 58 60 61 62 63 66 67 68 69 72 73 74 93 Page 195 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Default = Description Code Page 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 91 93 437 774 850 852 855 857 858 860 861 862 863 865 Page 196 Select Character Code Table ESC [ T 1BH 5BH 54H <27> <91> <84> = 1 181 (Code Page 437) The ESC [ T command selects a code page, , from the character code table. Country USA (Slashed 0) USA (Unslashed 0) British German French Swedish I Danish Norwegian Dutch Italian French Canadian Spanish Swedish II Swedish III Swedish IV Turkish Swiss I Swiss II Welsh Arabic USA Baltic 774 Multilingual East Europe Latin II-852 Cyrillic I-855 Turkey 857 Multilingual Euro Portugal Icelandic-861 Hebrew NC (862) Canada French Norway Decimal 64 0,65 0,66 0,67 0,68 0,69 0,70 0,71 0,72 0,73 0,74 0,75 0,76 0,77 0,78 0,79 0,80 0,81 0,91 0,93 1,181 3,6 3,82 3,84 3,87 3,89 3,90 3,92 3,93 3,94 3,95 3,97 Rev C Hex 0H,040H 0H,041H 0H,042H 0H,043H 0H,044H 0H,045H 0H,046H 0H,047H 0H,048H 0H,049H 0H,04AH 0H,04BH 0H,04CH 0H,04DH 0H,04EH 0H,04FH 0H,050H 0H,051H 0H,05BH 0H,05DH 1H,0B5H 3H,006H 3H,052H 3H,054H 3H,057H 3H,059H 3H,05AH 3H,05CH 3H,05DH 3H,05EH 3H,05FH 3H,061H 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Code Page 866 869 895 1008 1009 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1024 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1072 28-07764 Programming Codes Country Decimal Cyrillic II-866 3,98 Greek 869 3,101 Kamenicky (MJK) 3,127 Greek 437 3,240 Greek 928 3,241 Greek 437 CYPRUS 3,243 Turkey 3,244 Cyrillic II-866 3,245 Polska Mazovia 3,246 ISO Latin 2 3,247 Serbo Croatic I 3,248 Serbo Croatic II 3,249 ECMA-94 3,250 Windows East Europe 3,251 Windows Greek 3,252 Latin 5 (Windows Turkey) 3,253 Windows Cyrillic 3,254 Hungarian CWI 4,0 ISO Latin 4 (8859/4) 4,2 Ukrainian 4,3 Roman-8 4,4 ISO Latin 6 (8859/10) 4,5 Hebrew NC (862) 4,6 Hebrew OC 4,7 Windows Hebrew 4,8 KBL- Lithuanian 4,9 Windows Baltic 4,10 Cyrillic-Latvian 4,11 Bulgarian 4,48 Table 21 Character Code Pages Rev C Hex 3H,062H 3H,065H 3H,07FH 3H,0F0H 3H,0F1H 3H,0F3H 3H,0F4H 3H,0F5H 3H,0F6H 3H,0F7H 3H,0F8H 3H,0F9H 3H,0FAH 3H,0FBH 3H,0FCH 3H,0FDH 3H,0FEH 4H,000H 4H,002H 4H,003H 4H,004H 4H,005H 4H,006H 4H,007H 4H.008H 4H,009H 4H,00AH 4H,00BH 4H,030H Page 197 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Print Control Character [ESC] ^ 1BH 5EH <27> <94> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] ^ command allows characters from zero to 31 codes to be printed. During normal operation, characters from zero to 31 are control characters. Control code translation is turned off for the following character. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Insert Euro Character GS # 1DH 23H <29> <35> The GS # command allows an application to replace any character in the currently active character set with the Euro character. The character to be replaced is defined by . For example, if the currently active character set is code page 850 (multilingual) and the 0D5H character is to be the Euro character, 1DH 23H replaces the character at 0D5H with the Euro symbol. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Turn Color Mode ON/OFF [ESC] r 1BH 72H <27> <114> = 0, 1, 48, 49 The [ESC] r command turns on or off color mode. When = 1 or 49, color mode is turned on, and when = 0 or 48, color mode is turned off. The default setting is = 0. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Select Character Code Table [ESC] t 1BH 74H <27> <116> 0 ≤ n ≤ 5; = 254, 255 The [ESC] t command selects a page, , from the character code table as follows. The alphanumeric characters (20H to 7FH) are the same for each page. The graphic characters (80H to FFH) are different for each page. The default setting is page 0. 0 1 2 3 4 5 255 Page 198 Character Code Table Page 0 [PC437 (U.S.A. and Standard Europe)] Page 1 [PC850 (Multilingual)] Page 2 [PC850 (Multilingual)] Page 3 [PC860 (Portuguese)] Page 4 [PC863 (Canadian-French)] Page 5 [PC865 (Nordic)] Page 255 [Space page] Table 22 Character Code Table Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Bit 0 1,2 3 4 5 6 7 Programming Codes Select Print Mode(s) [ESC] ! 1BH 21H <27> <33> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] ! command selects print modes using as follows. The default character font is 7 x 9. The defaults for the other print modes are set to = 1. Off/On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Hexadecimal 00H 01H 00H 08H 00H 10H 00H 20H 00H 80H Decimal Function <0> Select 9 x 9 character font. <1> Select 7 x 9 character font. Undefined <0> Emphasized mode is not selected. <8> Emphasized mode is selected. <0> Double-height mode is not selected. <16> Double-height mode is selected. <0> Double-wide mode is not selected. <32> Double-wide mode is selected. Undefined <0> Underline mode is not selected. <128> Underline mode is selected. Table 23 Print Modes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Turn ON/OFF Underline Mode [ESC] - 1BH 2DH <27> <45> = 0, 1, 48, 49 The [ESC] - command turns on or off underline mode. When = 1 or 49, underline mode is turned on, and when = 0 or 48, underline mode is turned off. The default setting is = 0. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Turn ON/OFF Emphasized Mode [ESC] E 1BH 45H <27> <69> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] E command turns on or off emphasized mode. When the least significant bit (LSB) of = 1, emphasized mode is turned on; when it is 0, emphasized mode is turned off. The default setting is = 0. Emphasized and double-strike printing appear the same. 28-07764 Rev C Page 199 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Turn ON/OFF Double-Strike Mode [ESC] G 1BH 47H <27> <71> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] G command turns on or off double-strike mode. When the least significant bit (LSB) of = 1, double-strike mode is turned on; when it is 0, double-strike mode is turned off. The default setting is = 0. Double-strike and emphasized printing appear the same. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Turn ON/OFF Upside-Down Print Mode [ESC] { 1BH 7BH <27> <123> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] { turns on or off upside-down printing mode. When the least significant bit of = 1, upside-down printing mode is turned on; when it is 0, upside-down printing mode is turned off. The default setting is = 0. When upside-down mode is turned on, the printer prints 180° rotated characters from right to left. The line printing order is not reversed, so the order of the data transmitted is important. The command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Turn ON/OFF 90° Rotation Mode ESC V 1BH 56H <27> <86> = 0, 1, 2, 48, 49, 50 The ESC V command turns on/off 90° clockwise rotation mode. The command is only enabled in standard mode. In page mode, an internal flag is activated, and the command is enabled when the printer returns to standard mode. 0, 48 1, 49 2, 50 Page 200 Function Turns off all rotation modes Turns on 90° clockwise rotation mode Turns on 90° counterclockwise rotation mode Table 24 Rotation Modes Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Where Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Programming Codes Set Character Size GS ! 1DH 21H <29> <33> The GS ! command sets the horizontal and vertical scaling. The upper nibble is the horizontal scale, and the lower nibble is the vertical scale. The minimum size is x1, and the maximum size is x2. xxxx0000 Vertical scale 1 xxxx0001 Vertical scale 2 0000xxxx Horizontal scale 1 0001xxxx Horizontal scale 2 Begin Italics [ESC] 4 1BH 34H <27> <52> The [ESC] 4 command begins italics print mode. Note: Italics are not available in all print modes. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Description End Italics [ESC] 5 1BH 35H <27> <53> The [ESC] 5 command ends italics print mode. The [ESC] % H command ends italic print mode. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Turns smoothing on/off [GS] b 1DH 62H <29> <98> The [GS] b command turns smoothing mode on or off. • When the LSB of n is 0, smoothing mode is turned off. • When the LSB of n is 1, smoothing mode is turned on. 28-07764 Rev C Page 201 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Panel Button Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Where Page 202 Enable/Disable Paper Feed [ESC] c 5 1BH 63H 35H <27> <99> <53> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] c 5 command enables or disables the FEED Button. When the least significant bit (LSB) of = one, the FEED Button is disabled; when it is zero, the button is enabled. To prevent problems caused by accidentally pressing the FEED Button, use the command to disable it. The FEED Button is temporarily enabled, regardless of how the command is set during the wait time set by the [GS] z 0 command for paper insertion and during the recovery confirmation time. Bit 0 = 1 the FEED Button is disabled Bit 0 = 0 the button is enabled. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Paper Sensor Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Select Paper Sensor(s) to Stop Printing [ESC] c 4 1BH 63H 34H <27> <99> <52> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 Description ESC c 4 n selects whether to stop printing or not when the paper low is detected. There are three sensors in the TM-88 or TM-90 that are simulated in the iTherm® 280: the paper roll low, paper roll end sensor, and validation sensor. The paper roll low sensor is enabled when either bit 0 or bit 1 is on. The paper roll end sensor is enabled when either bit 2 or bit 3 is on. The validation sensor is enabled when either bit 6 or bit 7 is on. When a paper low or a paper out is detected, printing stops after printing the current line. The printer goes off line after printing stops. Installing a new roll starts printing again. The default setting is n=12. If the paper roll low sensor or paper roll end sensor is disabled and a paper out is detected, printing does not stop. The printer does not go off line, and the Paper Out LED comes on. When the validation sensor is enabled and a paper-end is detected, the printer ejects the paper after printing as much as possible and enters the paper waiting state. When the validation sensor is disabled and a paper-end is detected, the printer does not stop printing and eject the paper. It is possible to select multiple sensors to stop printing. Then when any sensor detects a paper-end, printing stops. When a paper sensor is enabled with this command, printing stops only when the corresponding paper is selected for printing. Print sheet can be selected by using ESC c 0. Note: The iTherm® 280 does not allow the paper out sensor to be disabled. The paper sensor(s) used to stop printing are selected by using n as follows: Bit 0 1 2- 3 4-5 6 7 Off/On Off On Off On — — Off On Off On Hex 00 01 00 02 — — 00 40 00 80 Decimal 0 1 0 2 — — 0 64 0 128 Function Paper roll low sensor disabled. Paper roll low sensor enabled. Paper roll low sensor disabled. Paper roll low sensor enabled. Paper roll end sensor enabled (always on) Undefined. Validation sensor disabled. Validation sensor enabled. Validation sensor disabled. Validation sensor enabled. Table 25 Paper Sensor Commands 28-07764 Rev C Page 203 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Bit 0 1 2 3 4-5 6 7 Select Paper Sensor(s) to Output Paper-End Signals [ESC] c 3 1BH 63H 33H <27> <99> <51> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 ESC c 3 n selects whether to output paper-end signals or not to a parallel interface. The default setting is n=15. The paper roll low, paper roll end, and validation sensors can be selected. When the sensors are selected to output signals and any sensor detects a paper-end, the paper-end signal is output. When all sensors are disabled, and a paper out is detected, status is always a paper present. The paper roll low sensor is enabled when either bit 0 or bit 1 or both is on. The paper roll end sensor is enabled when either 2 or 3 or both bits is on. The validation sensor is enabled when either 6 or 7 or both bits are on. This command is enabled only with a parallel interface and is ignored with a serial interface. The paper sensor(s) used to output paper-end signals are selected by using n as follows: Off/On Off On Off On Off On Off On — Off On Off On Hex 00 01 00 04 00 04 00 08 — 00 40 00 80 Decimal Function 0 Paper roll low sensor disabled. 1 Paper roll low sensor enabled. 0 Paper roll low sensor disabled 2 Paper roll low sensor enabled. 0 Paper roll end sensor disabled. 4 Paper roll end sensor enabled. 0 Paper roll end sensor disabled. 8 Paper roll end sensor enabled. — Undefined. 0 Validation sensor disabled. 64 Validation sensor enabled. 0 Validation sensor disabled. 128 Validation sensor enabled. Table 26 Paper Sensor Commands Note: The electronic journal will not stop the printer. Bits 0,1,2 and 3 all control the receipt station. Page 204 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Print Position Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Set Print Position to the beginning of print line [GS] T 1DH 54H <29> <84> 0≤n≤1 48 ≤ n ≤ 49 The GS T command sets the print position to the beginning of the print line. 0, 48 1, 49 Function Sets the print position after the data in the print buffer is deleted. Sets the print position after the data in the print buffer is printed When printing is specifies (n=1,49), the printer prints the data in the print buffer and executes a line feed based on the line feed amount set. When deleting is specified (n=0,48), the printer cancels the print data in the print buffer, and keeps other data or setting values except for the print data. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description 28-07764 Set Absolute Print Position [ESC] $ 1BH 24H <27> <36> 0 ≤ nl ≤ 255 0 ≤ nh ≤ 255 The ESC $ command sets the print starting position from the beginning of the line. Set Relative Print Position [ESC] \ 1BH 5CH <27> <92> 0 ≤ nl ≤ 255 0 ≤ nh ≤ 255 The ESC \ command sets the print starting position based on the current position and the distance from the current position to [(nl + nh x 256) x horizontal unit]. When standard more is selected, the horizontal motion unit set by GS P is used. When page mode is selected, the horizontal or vertical motion unot set by GS P is used for the print direction set by ESC T. Rev C Page 205 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Select Justification [ESC] a 1BH 61H <27> <97> 0≤n≤2 48 ≤ n ≤ 50 The [ESC] a command aligns all the data in one line to a specified position. Left justification is selected when = 0 or 48, centering is selected when = 2 or 50. The default setting is left justification. ( = 0). The command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Set Back Space [BS] 08H <8> The [BS] command moves the print buffer one character width to the left. The pointer position cannot be moved to the left of the left margin. [BS] does not cause the buffer to be printed; the following data is OR’ed with the previous data. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Set Horizontal Tab [HT] 9H <10> The [HT] command moves the print position to the next horizontal tab position. The command is used to align character columns. The command is ignored unless another horizontal tab position has been set. Page 206 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description 28-07764 Programming Codes Set Horizontal Tab Positions [ESC] D NUL 1BH 44H 00 <27> <68> <0> 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 0 ≤ k ≤ 32 The [ESC] D NUL command sets the horizontal tab positions. specifies the column number for setting a horizontal tab position. The command deletes any previously set, horizontal tab positions. Up to 32 tab positions can be set. The default tab positions are at intervals of eight characters for 7 x 9 font. Set Left Margin GS L 1DH 4CH <29> <76> 0 ≤ nl ≤ 255 0 ≤ nh ≤ 255 The GS L command sets the left margin using nl and nh. The left margin is set to [(nl + nh × 256) × horizontal motion unit)] from the beginning of the line. In standard mode, the command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line. In page mode, an internal flag is activated, and the command is enabled when the printer returns to standard mode. Set Printing Area Width GS W 1DH 57H <29> <87> 0 ≤ nl ≤ 255 0 ≤ nh ≤ 255 The printing area width is set to [(nl + nh × 256) × horizontal motion unit)] from the left margin. In standard mode, the command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line. In page mode, an internal flag is activated, and the command is enabled when the printer returns to standard mode. Turn ON/OFF Uni-Directional Printing Mode [ESC] U 1BH 55H <27> <85> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] U command turns on/off unidirectional printing mode. When the least significant bit (LSB) of = 1, unidirectional printing is turned on. When LSB = 0, unidirectional printing is turned off, and i-directional printing is turned on. Unidirectional printing can be turned on when printing double-high characters to ensure that the top and bottom of the characters are aligned. = 0 is the default setting. Rev C Page 207 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Set Left Margin [ESC] l 1BH 6CH <27> <108> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] 1 command sets the left margin using . The left margin is set to characters from the beginning of the line. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Set Right Margin [ESC] Q 1BH 51H <29> <81> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] Q command sets the right margin using . The right margin is set to characters from the beginning of the line. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Return Home [ESC] < 1BH 3CH <27> <60> The [ESC] < command moves the print head to the home position. Page 208 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Bit-Image Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Select Bit-Image Mode [ESC] *
              1BH 2AH
              <27> <42>
              = 0, 1, 32, 33 0 ≤ nl ≤ 255 0 ≤ nh ≤ 3 0 ≤ d ≤ 255 k = nl + nh x 256 for = 0 or 1 k = (nl + nh x 256) * 3 for = 32 or 33 Description [ESC] *
              command selects a bit-image mode using for the number of dots specified by (nl + nh x 256) in mode 0 or 1 and (nl + nh x 256)*3 in mode 32 or 33 and indicates the bit image data. Set a bit to one to print a dot, or set a bit to zero to not print a dot. Use the command to print a predefined picture or logo. The modes selectable by are listed below. 0 1 32 33 28-07764 Mode 8-dot single density 8-dot double density 24 dot single density 24 dot double density Vertical Direction Horizontal Direction Dot Density Dot Density Number of Dots 80 dpi 160 dpi 120 dpi 240 dpi 200 400 300 600 Number of Dots 101 dpi 8 101 dpi 8 101 dpi 24 203 dpi 24 Table 27 Print Density Selection Rev C Page 209 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Status Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Bit 0 1 2 3 - Enable/Disable Automatic Status Back (ASB) [GS] a 1DH 61H <29> <97> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [GS] a command selects a status for ASB transmission. ASB is enabled if any status item is selected. The printer automatically transmits a 4-byte status message whenever the status changes. Multiple status items can be enabled or disabled. When = 0, ASB is disabled. The default depends on the offline mode configuration. If offline buffer full only is set the ASB is defaulted on. When the printer is disabled by the [ESC] = command and ASB is enabled, the printer transmits a 4-byte status message every time the status changes. The paper roll low sensor is an option. If the printer is not equipped with the paper low sensor, bits 0 and 1 of the third byte are always on, with paper adequate status. Bit 3 of the second byte is always, “No error.” The status items are selected using as follows: Off/On Off On Off On Off On Off On - Hex 00H Decimal <0> Status for Automatic Status Back (ASB) Drawer kick-out connector pin 3 status disabled 01H <1> Drawer kick-out connector pin 3 status enabled 00H <0> On-line/off line disabled 02H <2> On-line/off line enabled 00H <0> Error status disabled 04H <4> Error status enabled 00H <0> Paper roll sensor status disabled 08H <8> Paper roll sensor status enabled Undefined Table 28 Automatic Status Back (ASB) Values for Note: This command and the Automatic Status Back feature are licensed from Epson, and is only available in the Full Epson Emulation of the firmware. Problems with this command are frequently caused by not using the correct version of the firmware. Contact Transact sales and/or technical support for this added cost option. Page 210 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Programming Codes Off/On Hex Decimal Status for Automatic Status Back (ASB) Off 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Off 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Off 00H <0> Drawer kick-out connector pin 3 low On 04H <4> Drawer kick-out connector pin 3 high Off 00H <0> On-line On 08H <8> Off line On 10H <16> Not used; fixed to On Undefined Off 00H <0> Paper is not being fed by the FEED Button On 40H <64> Paper is being fed by the FEED Button Off 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Table 29 Automatic Status Back (ASB) First Byte (Printer Information) Off/On Off On Off On Off Off On Off Hex 00H 04H 00H 08H 00H 00H 20H 00H Decimal <0> <0> <0> <4> <0> <8> <0> <0> <32> <0> Status for Automatic Status Back (ASB) Undefined Undefined No mechanical error Mechanical error occurred No Auto-cutter error Auto-cutter error occurred Not used; fixed to off No unrecoverable error11 Unrecoverable error occurred No temporary abnormality of the print head temperature (high temperature) On 40H <64> Temporary abnormality of the print head temperature (high temperature) occurred Off 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Table 30 Automatic Status Back (ASB) Second Byte (Error Information) 11 The iTherm® 280 can not recover from mechanical errors without flushing the input buffer. All print data will be lost if a mechanical error occurs. 28-07764 Rev C Page 211 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5,6 7 Bit 0-3 4 5,6 7 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5,6 7 Page 212 Off/On Hex Decimal Status for Automatic Status Back (ASB) Off 00H <0> Journal memory adequate On 01H <1> Journal memory low (Less than 8K) Off 00H <0> Paper low sensor: paper adequate On 02H <2> Paper low sensor: paper low Off 00H <0> Journal memory adequate On 04H <4> Journal memory exhausted. Off 00H <0> Paper out sensor: paper present On 08H <8> Paper out sensor: paper not present Off 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Undefined Off 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Table 31 Automatic Status Back (ASB) Third Byte (Paper Sensor Information) Off/On Hex Decimal Status for Automatic Status Back (ASB) Undefined Off 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Undefined Off 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Table 32 Automatic Status Back (ASB) Fourth Byte (Paper Sensor Information) Transmit Status [GS] r 1DH 72H <29> <114> 1≤n≤2 49 ≤ n ≤ 50 The [GS] r command transmits the status specified by as follows: paper sensor status as one byte of data when = 1 or 49, and drawer kick-out connector status when = 2 or 50. The paper present status of bits 2 and 3 for the paper sensor status is not transmitted because the printer goes off line when a paper out is detected by the paper out sensor. The paper roll low sensor is an option. If the sensor is not installed, bits 0 and 1 for the paper sensor status are always in the “Paper adequate” status. Off/On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Off Hex 00H 01H 00H 02H 00H 04H 00H 08H 00H 00H Decimal Status <0> Journal Memory adequate <1> Journal Memory low (Less than 8K) <0> Paper low sensor: paper adequate <2> Paper low sensor: paper low <0> Journal Memory adequate <4> Journal Memory exhausted. <0> Paper out sensor: paper present <8> Paper out sensor: paper not present <0> Not used; fixed to Off Undefined <0> Not used; fixed to Off Table 33 Paper Sensor Status ( = 1, 49) Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Bit 0 Off/On Off On Off Off 1-3 4 5,6 7 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function Transmit printer status Transmit off line status Transmit error status Transmit paper roll sensor status Table 35 Values for the Status Function, 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 7 28-07764 Hex Decimal Status 00H <0> Drawer kick-out connector pin 3 low 01H <1> Drawer kick-out connector pin 3 high Undefined 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Undefined 00H <0> Not used; fixed to Off Table 34 Drawer Kick-out Connector Status ( = 2, 50) Transmit Real-Time Status [DLE] [EOT] 10H 04H <16> <4> 1≤n≤4 The [DLE] EOT command transmits the specified status in real time. The command is executed if the printer is off line, the print buffer is full, or an error occurs. If the printer goes off line due to a paper-end condition, bit 5 of the printer status (waiting for on-line recovery) is on from the time the paper roll is inserted to the time the printer goes on-line. See the [GS] z 0 command for details of the on-line recovery wait time. The paper roll low sensor is an option. If the printer does not have a paper low sensor, bits 2 and 3 of the paper roll sensor status will always be “Paper adequate.” Bit 3 of the second byte is always “No error occurred.” Bit 0 1 2 Programming Codes Off/On Off On Off On Off On On Off Hexl 00H 02H 00H 04H 00H 08H 10H 00H Decimal Status <0> Not used; fixed to off <2> Not used; fixed to on <0> Drawer kick-out connector pin 3 low <4> Drawer kick out connector pin 3 high <0> On-line <8> Off line <16> Not used; fixed to on Undefined Undefined <0> Not used; fixed to off Table 36 Printer Status ( = 1) Rev C Page 213 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bit 0 1 2,3 4 5,6 7 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Bit 12 Off/On Off On Off Hexl 00H 02H 00H On On Off On Off On Off 08H 10H 00H 20H 00H 40H 00H Decimal <0> <2> <0> Status Not used; fixed to off Not used; fixed to on Undefined Paper is not being fed by the FEED Button <8> Paper is being fed by the FEED Button <16> Not used; fixed to on <0> No paper out stop <32> Printing stops due to paper out <0> No error <64> Error occurs <0> Not used; fixed to off Table 37 Off line Status ( = 2) Off/On Off On Off On Off On On Off On Off Off Hex 00H 02H 00H 04H 00H 08H 10H 00H 20H 00H 00H Decimal Status <0> Not used; fixed to off <2> Not used; fixed to on <0> No mechanical error <4> Mechanical error occurred <0> No auto-cutter error <8> Auto-cutter error occurred <16> Not used; fixed to on <0> Unrecoverable error occurred12 <32> Recoverable error occurred <0> Not used; fixed to off <0> Not used; fixed to off Table 38 Error Status ( = 3) Off/On Off On Off On On Off On Off Hex Decimal Status 00H <0> Not used; fixed to off 02H <2> Not used; fixed to on 00H <0> Paper low sensor: paper adequate (0CH) (<12>) Paper low sensor: paper low 10H <16> Not used; fixed to on 00H <0> Paper out sensor: paper adequate 60H <96> Paper out sensor: paper not present 00H <0> Not used; fixed to off Table 39 Paper Roll Sensor Status ( = 4) Transmit Peripheral Status [ESC] u 1BH 75H <27> <117> n=0 The [ESC] r command transmits peripheral status has been replaced by the [GS] r command. The iTherm® 280 return cash drawer status as specified below. Off/On Hex Decimal Status ® The iTherm 280does not allow buffer recovery on unrecoverable errors. Following the recovery process will not restore the data buffers. Page 214 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide 0 1–7 Off On Off 00H (03H) 00H Programming Codes <0> (3) <0> Pin 3 is Low Pin 3 is High Not used; fixed to Off Table 40 Peripheral Status ( = 0, 48) Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Transmit Paper Sensor Status [ESC] v 1BH 76H <27> <118> The [ESC] v command has been replaced by the [GS] r command. The [ESC] v command transmits paper status has been replaced by the [GS] r command. The iTherm® 280 return paper status as specified below. If the Electronic Journal is enabled, Journal Low and Out are supported by this command Electronic Journal Disabled Bit 0,1 Off/On Hex Off 00 On 02H 2,3 Off 00 On 04H 4 Off 00 5 Off 00 On 04H 6 ON 20H 7 Off 00 Electronic Journal Enabled Decimal <0> <2> <0> <4> <0> <0> <4> <64> <0> Bit 0 Decimal <0> <1> <0> <2> <0> <4> <0> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 28-07764 Off/On Off On Off On Off On Off Hex 00H 01H 00 02H 00 04H 00 On 08H Off Off On ON Off 00 00 04H 20H 00 Status Receipt Paper present Receipt Paper Low or not present Cover is closed Cover is open Not used, fixed Off Slip is present Slip is not present Fixed On Not used, fixed Off Status Journal Space adequate > 8K Journal Space Low < 8K Receipt Paper present Receipt Paper Low or not present Cover is closed Cover is open Journal is active and not full (Cover Closed) <8> Journal Full and has been disabled (or Cover Open) <0> Not used, fixed Off <0> Slip is present <4> Slip is not present <64> Fixed On <0> Not used, fixed Off Table 41 Paper Status Rev C Page 215 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Printing Paper Command Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Bit 0 1 2 3 4–7 Select Paper Type for Printing [ESC] c 0 1BH 63H 30H <27> <99> <48> n = 1, 1 ≤ n ≤ 3, 8 ≤ n ≤ 11 ESC c 0 n selects paper type(s) for printing. User’s have the option to select either Paper roll or validation paper. Both bits 0 and 1 indicate paper roll and if either of them is available, the paper roll is selected as the print sheet. Validation and paper roll can be selected simultaneously, but in this case, be sure to use a pressure sensitive paper so that the printing result is on the paper roll. At this time, the setting values for validation are available for ESC 2, ESC 3, GS L, and GS W. This command is enabled only when processed at the beginning of a line. When previously disabled validation paper is enabled, the printer waits for the validation to be inserted. When previously enabled validation paper is disabled, the printer ejects the paper. The default setting is n = 1. The paper type(s) are selected for printing by using n as follows: Off/On Off On Off On Off On Off On — Hex 00 01 00 02 00 04 00 08 — Decimal 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 — Function Electronic Journal disabled. Electronic Journal enabled Paper roll disabled. Paper roll enabled. Slip Paper Disabled (EPOS only) Slip Paper enabled (EPOS only) Validation paper disabled. Validation paper enabled. Undefined. Note: The TM88 and TM90 do not support the electronic journal. The electronic journal may be printed and reported in the same way as the Ithaca PcOS emulation. The full range of [ESC][GS] journal control commands are available in EPOS mode. See the section on initializing, printing and reporting the electronic journal starting on page 151. In EPOS mode, the electronic journal and the paper roll may be both selected. As there is limited space in the electronic journal, the amount of data sent the journal should be limited. Note: In EPOS emulation the iTherm® 280 printer will recognize the Epson Slip Select command and enter Validation mode. Page 216 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Select Paper Type for Command Settings [ESC] c 1 1BH 63H 31H <27> <99> <49> n = 1, 1 ≤ n ≤ 3, 8 ≤ n ≤ 11 Description ESC c 1 n selects paper type(s) for setting. Paper roll and validation paper are available. Both bits 0 and 1 indicate paper roll and if either of them is available, the paper roll is selected as the print sheet. The commands that need to select paper types for setting are ESC 2, ESC 3, GS L, and GS W. The value of n is used as follows: Bit 0 1 2 3 4–7 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Off/On Off On Off On — Off On — Hex 00 01 00 02 — 00 08 — Decimal 0 1 0 2 — 0 8 — Function Not Used. Not Used. Paper roll disabled. Paper roll enabled. Undefined. Validation paper disabled. Validation paper enabled. Undefined. Select Paper Type for Command Settings [ESC] f 1BH 66H <27> <116> 0 ≤ t1 ≤ 15 0 ≤ t2 ≤ 64 ESC f t1 t2 sets the time that the printer waits for validation paper to be inserted to t1 × 1 minutes, and the time from detection of the validation to the start of printing to t2 × 0.1 seconds. When t1=0, the validation waiting time is not set and the printer continues waiting for a validation to be inserted. The default validation waiting time is not set, and the start operation time is set to 10 seconds (t1=0, t2=10). This setting alone, however, does not cause the printer to immediately start waiting for a validation to be inserted. The setting becomes effective when validation paper is used. DLE ENQ is used to cancel the validation waiting state. Page Mode Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description 28-07764 Cancel Print Data in Page Mode [CAN] 18H <24> CAN In page mode, deletes all the print data in the current printable area. Rev C Page 217 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Select Page Mode [ESC] L 1BH 4CH <27> <76> ESC L Switches from standard mode to page mode and starts the page mode definition. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set Printing Area in Page Mode [ESC] W xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH 1BH 57H xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH <27> <87> xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH 0 ≤ (xL + xH x 256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ xL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xH ≤ 255) 0 ≤ (yL + yH x 256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ yL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yH ≤ 255) 1 ≤ (dxL + dxH x 256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ dxL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ dxH ≤ 255) 1 ≤ (dyL + dyH x 256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ dyL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ dyH ≤ 255) Description ESC W sets the position and the size of the printing area. • Horizontal starting position = [(xL + xH × 256) × (horizontal motion units)]. • Vertical starting position = [(yL + yH × 256) × (vertical motion units)]. • Horizontal printing area width = [(dxL + dxH × 256) × (horizontal motion units)]. • Vertical printing area width = [(dyL + dyH × 256) × (vertical motion units)]. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Select Standard Mode [ESC] S 1BH 53H <27> <83> ESC S Switches from page mode to standard mode with out printing the page. All page definition is lost. Function Select Page Mode Entry Direction ASCII [ESC] T Hexadecimal 1BH 54H Decimal <27> <84> Description ESC T Select print direction in page mode This command may also be issued during page definition. When issued in page mode it resets the orientation and entry position but does not cause the currently defined image to be erased or printed. Where x = 0 for standard orientation (Direction A). x = 1 for 270° Rotation (Direction B) x = 2 for 180° Rotation (Direction C) x = 3 for 90° Rotation (Direction D) Page 218 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Receipt or Inserted Form B>>>>> 28-07764 C>>>>> Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description D>>>>> A>>>>> Initial entry location Print and return to standard mode (in page mode0 [FF] 0CH <12> [FF] In page mode, prints the data in the print buffer collectively and returns to standard mode. Rev C Page 219 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Print data in page mode [ESC][FF] 1BH,0CH <27><12> [ESC][FF] Prints the page as it is currently defined and reenters page mode without deleting the page definition. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Set Absolute Vertical Print Position in Page Mode [GS]$ 1DH,24H <29><36> GS $ sets the absolute vertical print starting position to [nL + nH x 256) x (vertical or horizontal motion units)] in page mode. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set Relative Vertical Print Position in page mode [GS] \ 1BH 5CH <27> <92> 0 ≤ nl ≤ 255 0 ≤ nh ≤ 255 The [GS] \ command sets the print starting position based on the current position and the distance from the current position to [(n l + nh × 256) × vertical or horizontal unit. Description Bar Code Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal 2 ASCII Print Bar Code GS k
              NUL Mode 1 between 0 and 6 1DH 6BH
              00 <29> <107>
              0 GS k
              Mode 2 between 65 and 73 = Length of Hexadecimal 1DH 6BH
              Decimal <29> <107>
              1 Range 0 ≤ m ≤ 6 (k and d depend on the bar code system used.) 2 65 ≤ m ≤ 73 (n and d depend on the bar code system used.) Description The GS k
              NUL command selects a bar code system and prints the bar code. If is between 65 and 73, the length must be specified. If is between 0 and 6, the data must be null terminated. (See the descriptions below.) 1 Mode 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 2 3 4 1 Page 220 5 Bar Code System UPC A UPC E JAN-13 (EAN-13) JAN-8 (EAN-8) Code 39 Number of Characters 11 ≤ k ≤ 12 11 ≤ k ≤ 12 12 ≤ k ≤ 13 7≤k≤8 1≤k ITF 1 ≤ k (even number) Rev C Remarks 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 90 d = 32, 36, 37, 43, 45, 46, 47 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes 1 6 Codabar 1≤k 2 2 2 2 2 65 66 67 68 69 UPC A UPC E JAN-13 (EAN-13) JAN-8 (EAN-8) Code 39 11 ≤ k ≤ 12 11 ≤ k ≤ 12 12 ≤ k ≤ 13 7≤k≤8 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 2 70 ITF 2 71 Codabar 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 (even number) 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 2 2 72 73 Code 93 Code 128 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 68 d = 32, 36, 37, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 90 d = 32, 36, 37, 43, 45, 46, 47 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 68 d = 32, 36, 37, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58 0 ≤ d ≤ 127 0 ≤ d ≤ 127 Table 42 Bar Code System Based on [Description for 1] indicates the character code to be printed. A null (00 Hex) character ends the bar code definition. [Description for 2] indicates the number of bytes of bar code data to be processed immediately following . Additionally, indicates the character code to be printed. The following apply to both GS k
              NUL GS k
              : If the horizontal width exceeds the printing area, the printer only feeds the paper. These commands feed as much paper as necessary to print the bar code according to the GS h command. These commands are enabled only when no data exists in the print buffer. When data does exist in the print buffer, the printer processes the data following as normal data. After printing a bar code, the print position is set at the beginning of the line. These commands are not effected by print modes (emphasized, underline, character size, etc.) Note: Barcode 39 allows the “*” character to be used as a start and stop flag. If the “*” is used, the length specified must be at least as long as the desired barcode. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Default Description Set Bar Code Height GS h 1DH 68H <29> <104> 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 0.90 inch high The GS h command sets the height of the bar code. The bar code height is set to n/180 inch. Function Select Printing Position of HRI Characters ASCII GS H Hexadecimal 1DH 48H 28-07764 Rev C Page 221 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Decimal Range Description <29> <72> 0 ≤ n ≤ 3, 48 ≤ n ≤ 51 The GS H command selects the printing position of HRI (Human Readable Interpretation) characters when printing a bar code. selects the printing position as follows. 0, 48 1, 49 2, 50 3, 51 Printing position Not printed Above bar code Below bar code Both above and below the bar code Table 43 Printing Position of HRI Characters Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description 0, 48 1, 49 Select Font for HRI Characters GS f 1DH 66H <29> <102> = 0, 1, 48, 49 The GS f command selects a font for the HRI (Human Readable Interpretation) characters used when printing a bar code. selects a font from the following table. Font Font A (14 x 12) Font B (12 x 12) Table 44 Font for Human Readable Interpretation (HRI) Characters Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Set Bar Code Width GS w 1DH 77H <29> <119> 2≤n≤6 The GS w command sets the size of the bar code as follows. N Multi-level bar code 2 3 4 5 6 Module width (mm) 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.626 0.751 Page 222 Binary-level bar code Thin element width (mm) Thick element width (mm) 0.250 0.626 0.375 1.001 0.500 1.251 0.626 1.627 0.751 2.002 Table 45 Horizontal size of the bar code Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Mechanism Control Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Select cut mode and cut paper [GS] V 1DH 56H <29> <86> When = 1 or 49, is not used and a partial cut is performed. When = 66, [GS] V executes a partial cut (one point left uncut) after paper is fed [cutting position ( x approximately 1/144 inch)]. When using the command, there is a gap between the auto-cutter position and the print position. The [GS] V command is only effective when input at the beginning of a line. The [GS] V command executes paper feeding to the manual cutting position. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Partial knife cut [ESC] i 1BH 69H <27> <105> The [ESC] i command performs a partial knife cut. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Perform a partial knife cut [ESC] m 1BH 6DH <27> <109> The [ESC] m command performs a partial knife cut. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Sound buzzer [BEL] 07H <07> The [BEL] command sounds the internal buzzer, if equipped. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Sound buzzer [ESC] BEL 1BH 07H <27> <07> The [ESC] BEL command sounds the internal buzzer, if equipped. 28-07764 Rev C Page 223 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Miscellaneous Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Default Description Set Horizontal and Vertical Motion Units [GS] P x y 1DH 50H x y <29> <80> x y 0 ≤ x ≤ 255 x = 180, y = 360 The GS P x y command sets the horizontal and vertical motion units to 1/x inches and 1/y inches, respectively. When x and y are set to zero, the default setting of each value is used. Note: This feature is licensed from Epson, and is only available in the Full Epson Emulation of the firmware. Problems with this command are frequently caused by not using the correct version of the firmware. Contact Transact sales and/or technical support for this added cost option. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Initialize the Printer [ESC] @ 1BH 40H <27> <64> The [ESC] @ command initializes the printer. All settings, including character font and line spacing, are canceled. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Transmit Printer ID [GS] I 1DH 49H <29> <73> 1≤n≤3 49 ≤ n ≤ 51 The [GS] I command transmits the printer ID specified by below. Each printer ID consists of one byte of data. Description 1,49 2,50 3,51 Bit 0 1 2,3 4 5,6 7 Function Printer ID Printer model ID Type ID ROM version ID Off/On Off Off On Off Off Hex 00H 00H 02H 00H 00H Hex ID 0DH 20H or 32D13 2H or 2D. Table 46 Printer ID Decimal Function <0> No two-byte character code <0> Not Auto-cutter equipped <2> Auto-cutter equipped Undefined <0> Not used; fixed to off Undefined <0> Not used; fixed to off Table 47 Type ID ( = 2 or 50) Generate Pulse 13 The Epson Type ID and ROM version are based on the Epson TM-88 documentation and a sample printer. This value can be reconfigured to any 8 bit value. Page 224 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Programming Codes [ESC] p 1BH 70H <27> <112> = 0, 1, 48, 49 0 ≤ t1 ≤ 255 0 ≤ t2 ≤ 255 The [ESC] p command sends a pulse (on time = x 2 msec) to the specified connector pin. When = 1 or 48, the pulse is sent to drawerkick-out connector pin 2. When = 0 or 48, the pulse is sent to drawer-kickout connector pin 2; when = 1 or 49, the pulse is sent to drawer-kick-out connector pin 5. Generate Pulse in real time [DLE] [DC4] <1> 10H 14H <1> <16> <20> <1> 0≤m≤8 0≤t≤8 The [DLE] [DC4] <1> command sends a pulse specified by in realtime to the connector pin specified by as follows: Connector pin Drawer kick-out connector pin 2 Drawer kick-out pin 5 0 1 Note: This feature is licensed from Epson, and is only available in the Full Epson Emulation of the firmware. Problems with this command are frequently caused by not using the correct version of the firmware. Contact Transact sales and/or technical support for this added cost option. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Execute power-off sequence [DLE] [DC4] <2> 10H 14H <2> <16> <20> <2> a=1 b=8 Description The [DLE] [DC4] <2> command executes the printer power-off sequence as follows: Stores the values of the maintenance counter. Transmits the following power-off status (Header + Status + NUL) Power off status Header Status NUL Hex 3BH 30H 00H Decimal 59 48 0 Amount of data 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Executes the printer power off Function ASCII 28-07764 Clear buffer(s) [DLE] [DC4] <8> d1…d7 Rev C Page 225 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description 10H 14H <8> d1…d7 <16> <20> <8> d1…d7 d1=1, d2=3, d3=20, d4=1, d5=6, d6=2, d7=8 The [DLE] [DC4] <8> command clears all data stored in the receive buffer and the print buffer. Transmits the following three bytes of data Hex 37H 25H 00H Header Flag NUL Decimal 55 37 0 Amount of data 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Enters in standard mode Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Bit 0 1 2-7 Select Peripheral Device Status [ESC] = 1BH 3DH <27> <61> 1≤n≤3 The [ESC] = command selects the device to which the host computer sends data, based on the value of listed below. Off/On Off On Off On - Hex Decimal Function 00H <0> Printer disabled 01H <1> Printer enabled 00H <0> Customer display disabled 02H <2> Customer display enabled Undefined Table 48 Peripheral Device Bit Definitions Note: Epson Customer display is not supported by the iTherm® 280 printer. Page 226 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Where Programming Codes Real-Time Request to Printer [DLE] [ENQ] 10H 05H <16> <5> = 0, 2 The [DLE] ENQ command responds to a request from the host computer specified by as shown below. The command is also executed when the printer is disabled. When the printer stops printing due to a paper-end condition, = 0 is only effective when the printer is waiting for on-line recovery from the time the paper roll is inserted to the time the printer goes on-line. The on-line recovery wait time is confirmed by the printer status of ASB or the [DLE] EOT command. = 2 is only effective when a recoverable error occurs. The printer can recover from an error without turning off the power. Whether an error occurs or not can be confirmed by the ASB status or the error status of the [DLE] EOT command. 0 Recovers to on-line 2 Recovers from an error after clearing the receive and print buffers Note: This feature is licensed from Epson, and is only available in the Full Epson Emulation of the firmware. Problems with this command are frequently caused by not using the correct version of the firmware. Contact Transact sales and/or technical support for this added cost option. 28-07764 Rev C Page 227 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Where Where Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Enter Test Mode [GS] ( A <2> <0> 1DH 28H 41H <2> <0> <29> <40> <65> <2> <0> This command places the printer into test mode based on the parameters and . may be 0, 1, 2, 48, 49, or 50. It is intended to select the print station. The iTherm® 280 will accept any of these values 1 or 49 Selects Hex Dump mode. You must press the * Button to exit this mode 2 or 50 Selects Printer Configuration print out. 3 or 51 Selects Rolling ASCII test pattern. You must press * Button to exit this mode. Print counter [GS] c: 1DH 63H <29> <99> Sets the serial counter value in the print buffer and increments or decrements the counter value. • After setting the current counter value in the print buffer as print data (a character string), the printer counts up or down based on the count mode set Function Initialize maintenance counter ASCII [GS] g 0 m nl nh: Hexadecimal 1DH 67H 30H Decimal <29> <103> <48> Description Initializes the resettable maintenance counter to 0. • nl, nh specifies the maintenance counter number as (nl + nh x 256) Counter number Counter [Unit] Hex 14 15 32 46 Number of line feeds: Roll paper Number of energizing head: Roll paper Number of autocutter operation Print operation time Decimal 20 21 50 70 • Frequent write command executions by this command may damage the NV memory. Therefore, it is recommended to write to the NV memory no more than 10 times a day. • While processing this command, the printer is BUSY while writing data to the NV counter memory and stops receiving data. Therefore it is prohibited to transmit data including the real-time commands during the execution of this command Page 228 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function Transmit maintenance counter ASCII [GS] g 2 m nl nh: Hexadecimal 1DH 67H 32H Decimal <29> <103> <50> Description Transmits the value of the specified maintenance counter. • nl, nh specifies the maintenance counter number as (nl + nh x 256) Counter number Hex Decimal 14 20 14 20 14 20 14 20 14 20 14 20 14 20 14 20 Counter [Units] Kind of counter Number of line feeds: roll paper Number of times energizing head: roll paper Number of autocutter operations Printer operation time Number of line feeds: roll paper Number of times energizing head: roll paper Number of autocutter operations Printer operation time can be reset cumulative • The contents of the maintenance counter are as follows: Hexadecima Decimal Amount of data Header 5FH 95 1 byte Data 30H-39H 48-57 1-10 bytes NUL 00H 0 1 byte • During the transmission of block data values in the maintenance counter, the printer ignores the real-time commands. Also, the printer does not transmit ASB even when the ASB is enabled. Therefore, the user cannot confirm changes in the printer status during these periods. • The counter values may be different from the actual counts depending on time differences at power off or the occurrence of an error. 28-07764 Rev C Page 229 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Macro Function Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Start/End Macro Definition [GS] : 1DH 3AH <29> <58> The [GS] : command starts or ends macro definition. Macro definition starts when the command is received during normal operation and ends when it is received during the macro definition. The macro definition can contain up to 2048 bytes. If the definition exceeds 2048 bytes, the excess data will not be stored. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Execute Macro GS ^ r t m 1DH 5EH r t m <29> <94> r t m 0 ≤ r ≤ 255 0 ≤ t ≤ 255 m = See below The GS ^ r t m command executes a macro definition. The r specifies the number of times to execute the macro. When Bit 1 of m is set, r is ignored, and the macro is executed infinitely. t specifies the waiting time for executing the macro; it is t × 100 msec for every macro execution. m specifies macro executing mode. When the LSB of m = 0, the macro executes r times continuously with the interval specified by t. When the LSB of m = 1, the printer remains idle and waits for the FEED Button to be pressed (after waiting for the period specified by t). After the button is pressed, the printer executes the macro once. The printer repeats the operation r times. When Bit 5 of m is set, the current macro definition is saved into the printer’s nonvolatile flash memory as a start-up macro without executing it. The macro definition is executed upon power-up using the parameters specified by the GS ^ r t m command. If the printer is powered-up into self-test mode, the macro definition will not be executed. A saved macro definition can be deleted with the GS _ command. Description Bit 0 Off/On Off Hexl 00 On 01 1-4 5 On 20 6 On 40 7 - - Page 230 Decimal 0 Function Macro executes r times continuously with the interval specified by t 1 FEED Button controlled operation with time interval t Undefined 32 Value given by r is ignored and macro is run infinitely 64 Save start-up macro definition to flash memory without executing Undefined Table 49 Macro Control Bit Definitions Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Programming Codes Delete Start-Up Macro Definition GS _ 1DH 5FH <29> <95> The GS _ command deletes a start-up macro definition previously created by the GS ^ command. If a start-up macro was not previously defined, the command will be ignored. User-defined Images and Graphics Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description 28-07764 Define user-defined bit image GS - <0> x y d1 … d(x x y x 8) 1DH 2DH <0> x y d1 … d(x x y x 8) <29> <45> <0> x y d1 … d(x x y x 8) 1 ≤ x ≤ 255 1 ≤ y ≤ 255 0 ≤ d ≤ 255 = a 15-byte maximum length name to identify the image GS - defines a bit-image for storage in the nonvolatile memory pool. The printer maintains an area of flash memory specifically designated for multiple bit-image storage. The area can contain as many bit-images as its size permits. (A printout of the amount of nonvolatile memory remaining can be obtained by performing a printer self test.) Each image is uniquely identified by the name given to it by the parameter. The name of the bit-image can be from one to 15 bytes long and contain any alphanumeric characters as well as spaces. The format of the bit-image is identical to that defined by the GS * command. The GS _ command must be entered in standard mode only at the beginning of a print line. Any image may be up to 2048 bytes long. If the size of the image is larger than the space remaining in the nonvolatile buffer, the image will not be saved. When the last byte of bit-image data is received and there is ample space in the nonvolatile buffer for the bit-image, the bit image will be saved. The following basic example demonstrates how to define an 8-bit x 8-bit block with the name “MY IMAGE”. A representation of the format of a downloaded bitimage is depicted below. Rev C Page 231 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Column one d1 dy +1 d2 dy +2 .... .... ... ... .... MSB → d n .... .... .... .... LSB dy ⇐ d(x×y×8) PRINT #1, CHR$(29),CHR$(45), PRINT #1, ”MY IMAGE”,CHR$(0); PRINT #1, CHR$(1),CHR$(1); PRINT #1, CHR$(255),CHR$(255),CHR$(255),CHR$(255); PRINT #1, CHR$(255),CHR$(255),CHR$(255),CHR$(255) Page 232 Rev C REM Enter the GS command REM Define the image name REM Image size (8 x 8 bits) REM Send 8 bytes of image REM data 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Print User-Defined Bit Image GS 0 <0> 1DH 30H 0H <29> <48> <0> = a 15-byte maximum length name to identify the image. GS 0 prints a bit-image from storage in the nonvolatile memory pool. The name of the bit-image can be from one to 15 bytes long and contain any alphanumeric characters as well as spaces. GS searches the nonvolatile memory pool for the first occurrence of the image identified by . If the image is found, it will be printed. If the image cannot be found, the command will be ignored. The following basic example demonstrates how to print the stored bit-image named “MY IMAGE”: PRINT #1 CHR$(29), CHR$(48) REM Enter the GS 0 command PRINT #1 “MY IMAGE”, CHR$(0) CHR$(0) REM Enter the image name Where selects a mode from the table below. Hex Decimal 00 01 02 03 0 1 2 3 Mode Normal Double-wide Double-high Quadruple Vertical Dot Density (dpi) 203 203 101 101 Horizontal Dot Density (dpi) 203 101 203 101 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Erase single entry from nonvolatile memory EPOS ONLY GS 1 <0> 1DH 31H 0H <29> <49> <0> = a 15-byte maximum alphanumeric name to identify the image GS 1 deletes a single entry (bit-image or character set) from storage in the nonvolatile memory pool. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Erase all entries from nonvolatile memory EPOS ONLY GS 5 1DH 35H <29> <53> GS 5 erases the entire contents of the nonvolatile memory pool and frees up the memory for new entries. No protection for the GS 5 command exists. All user store will be erased. Note 1 28-07764 Rev C Page 233 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Define Single User-Defined Bit-Image GS * x y d1 … d(x x y x 8) 1DH 2AH x y d1 … d(x x y x 8) <29> <42> x y d1 … d(x x y x 8) 1 ≤ x ≤ 255 1 ≤ y ≤ 48 0 ≤ d ≤ 255 The GS * x y d1 … d(x x y x 8) command defines a single downloaded bit-image using the number of dots specified by x and y in the RAM buffer area (volatile memory). The number of dots in the horizontal direction is x x 8. The number of dots in the vertical direction is y x 8. If (x x y x 8) exceeds the size of the buffer, the image is truncated. d indicates bit-image data and specifies a bit printed to one and not printed to zero. After a downloaded bit-image is defined, it may be saved to the nonvolatile flash storage buffer using the ESC ‘ command where it remains indefinitely. Otherwise, the image remains in the RAM buffer where it is available until ESC @ or ESC & is executed; the power is turned off; or the printer is reset. A representation of the format of a downloaded bit-image is depicted below. Column one d1 dy +1 d2 dy +2 .... .... ... ... .... MSB → d n .... .... .... .... LSB dy Page 234 ⇐ d(x × y × 8) Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Hex Print single user-defined bit-image GS / 1DH 2FH <29> <47> The GS / command prints a downloaded or stored bit-image using the mode specified by . selects a mode from the table below. Decimal 00 01 02 03 Programming Codes Mode Vertical Dot Density (dpi) 0 Normal 203 1 Double-wide 203 2 Double-high 101 3 Quadruple 101 Table 50 User-defined Bit-image Resolutions Horizontal Dot Density (dpi) 203 101 203 101 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Save User-Defined Character Set GS 6 <0> 1DH 36H 0H <29> <54> <0> = a 15-byte maximum alphanumeric name to identify the image. GS 6 <0> saves the current character set created by the [ESC] & command to the nonvolatile memory pool. If no character set has been defined, the command stores an empty definition structure. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Select User-Defined Character Set GS 7 <0> 1DH 37H 0H <29> <55> <0> = a 15-byte maximum alphanumeric name to identify the image. GS 7 <0> selects a previously saved user-defined character set. If the character set does not exist, the command is ignored. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Query Nonvolatile Memory Pool Information GS 3 1DH 33H <29> <51> The GS 3 command prints a summary of the user-store usage. It is intended to help with the generation and maintenance of user store. The report is printed as part of the configuration report. Note 1 28-07764 Rev C Page 235 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes Ithaca® Specific iTherm® 280 Commands The iTherm® 280 has a number of extended control commands designed to make operation and maintenance of the printer easier for the host application refer to the iTherm® 280 extended control discussion on page 170. Panel Button Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Where Enable/Disable Paper Feed [ESC] p 5 1BH 70H 35H <27> <112> <53> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] c 5 command enables or disables the FEED Button. Bit 0 = 1 the FEED Button is disabled Bit 0 = 0 the button is enabled. Paper Out/Low Sensor Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Where Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Where Paper Low Sensor [ESC] p 4 1BH 70H 34H <27> <112> <52> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] c 4 command determines if the printer stops printing when paper low is detected. 0 Printer continues to print with paper low. 1 Printer stops printing when paper low is detected. Paper Error Signal Control [ESC] p 3 1BH 70H 33H <27> <112> <51> 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 The [ESC] c 3 command controls how the paper error pin on the parallel interface operates. Bit 0 controls paper low operation. If Bit 0 = 1 Paper low will set the paper error pin. If Bit 0 = 0 Paper low will not effect the paper error pin. Bit 2 controls how paper out effects the paper error pin. If Bit 2 = 1 Paper out will set the paper error pin. If Bit 2 = 0 Paper out will not effect the paper error pin. Note: The paper out sensor will always stop printing. The default setting allows only paper out to control the paper error pin. The Epson section has the following description of the enable/disable paper feed command. Page 236 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Description 28-07764 Programming Codes The [ESC] c 5 command enables or disables the FEED Button. When the least significant bit (LSB) of = one, the FEED Button is disabled; when it is zero, the button is enabled. Rev C Page 237 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Programming Codes iTherm® Citizen Emulation The iTherm® 280 printer uses a subset of the Epson emulation for Citizen. iTherm® Star Emulation The iTherm® 280 printer has Star emulation that will allow the iTherm to replace most Star printers with similar features to the iTherm. Star used a real time cash drawer command that uses features patented by Epson. If you use the Star real time cash drawer command, you must use the added cost licensed firmware. iTherm® Axiohm Emulation The iTherm® 280 printer has an Axiohm emulation that closely matches the A793 and A794 printers. The Axiohm command set (for the most part) is a superset of the Epson emulation. Because several of the Axiohm commands make use of features that patented by Epson, you must use the added cost licensed firmware to use these commands. If you don’t need those commands and features, using the standard iTherm firmware will result in a lower cost printer. Page 238 Rev C 28-07764 chapter 7 iTherm® 280 Color Graphics 28-07764 Rev C Page 239 This page intentionally left blank Page 240 Rev C 28-07764 ITherm® 280 Color Graphics iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Printing Graphics The iTherm® 280 Printer has bit-image graphic capability and a full PC-compatible graphic character set. The bit image format is similar to that used on other personal computer printers. Three modes of operation are available. Single-density is the fastest mode. It makes a single unidirectional 60 dpi print pass. Full-speed double-density mode makes two passes with a half-dot offset. Full-speed double-density mode is half the speed of single-density mode, but it prints at 120 dpi. Half-speed double-density mode is half the speed of full-speed double-density; however, the print quality is enhanced. Character Graphics Character graphics is the term for joining individual characters together to produce a mosaic of characters that form a graphic image. The simplest method uses an * (or any other character) to form an image. For example, ITHACA® might be formed as follows. *** * * * *** *** * * * * * * * * ***** * * * * ** * * **** * * * * *** * * * * * *** ** * * **** * * * * Figure 17 Example of Character Graphics The extended character set of the printer supports line graphic characters that can be combined to form windows and other shapes. For the shapes to join from line to line, the spacing must be set properly. All characters are in a nine-dot-high character cell. The dots are 1/60 inch apart. Therefore, the line spacing should be 10/60 or 1/6 inch. The set fine line space command can be used to set the line spacing. If possible, the spacing should be reduced slightly to overlap the rows, which prevents any white spacing from appearing between the lines. The following example illustrates the use of extended character graphics. 28-07764 Rev C Page 241 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Color Graphics [ESC]: [ESC]3<27> [ESC]a<1> <201> <205><205><205><205><205><205><205><205><205> <205><205><205><205><205><205><205><205><205> <205><205><205><205> <187>[CR][LF] <186> ITHACA PRINTERS <186>[CR][LF] <186> <186>[CR][LF] <200> <205><205><205><205><205><205><205><205><205> <205><205><205><205><205><205><205><205><205> <205><205><205><205> <188>[CR][LF] [ESC]a<0> [ESC]0 [ESC][P<15> [CR][LF] ST# 2000 OP# 00067 TE# 021 0035[CR][LF] KLEENEX FAM D04 QTY 1 1.68 J[CR][LF] RITZ D01 QTY 1 2.50 D[CR][LF] CHIPS D01 QTY 1 1.50 D[CR][LF] STORAGE BAG D04 QTY 1 1.50 J[CR][LF] SUB TOTAL 7.18[CR][LF] SALES TAX 1 .50[CR][LF] ------[CR][LF] TOTAL 7.68[CR][LF] CASH TEND 20.00[CR][LF] CHANGE DUE 12.23[CR][LF] [CR][LF] Figure 18 Example Commands for a Sample Receipt Page 242 Rev C 28-07764 ITherm® 280 Color Graphics iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Figure 19 Sample Receipt When printing line graphics, the data path to the printer must be eight bits. Seven-bit serial protocols do not access the extended characters. The extended characters require that the form be reverse fed. Consequently, printing line graphics on the receipt may be less than acceptable. 28-07764 Rev C Page 243 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Color Graphics APA Graphics The printer is capable of all-points-addressable (APA) or horizontal graphics. Generating a graphic image by hand is time consuming and tedious. It is recommended that a graphic package be used to create a graphic image. The following procedure will help with the setup. Procedure for APA graphics: 1. Generate the graphic image in the program of your choice. APA graphics only support monochrome images. 2. Make sure the paper size chosen fits the printer (3 inches wide with 0.25-inch margins). If the paper size cannot be set, print a portion of the page. 3. Print the graphic to a file using a generic, IBM, graphic, 9-pin driver. The standard IBM resolutions are 240 x 216 dpi, 120 x 72 dpi, and 60 x 72 dpi. The iTherm® 280 Printer supports all three resolutions. For good resolution with reasonable speed, use 120 x 72 dpi. 4. Print the graphic image to a file. 5. Edit the resulting file to remove any unwanted form control, and insert the iTherm® 280 form control. 6. Make the resulting file available to your application, so it can be sent to the printer when required. Page 244 Rev C 28-07764 ITherm® 280 Color Graphics iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Color Graphics The iTherm® 280 is a two-color printer as rather than a full color printer. A full color printer forms the various colors of an image by mixing inks of different colors on the paper. The amount of each color determines the hue. Typically the paper is white and no ink produces a white. Mixing yellow and cyan produces a red and mixing cyan, magenta, and yellow in equal amounts produces a black or gray. If the printer has a forth cartridge, it will be black and conserves the color cartridges ink. The iTherm® 280 is a two-color printer. It has white (the paper), and two predefined colors. Typically one of the colors is black, and the other is a highlight color. The high light color is primarily used in text printing to highlight a line, and typically is red. When the iTherm® 280 generates graphics, both colors are used to generate the image. Because the program that generates the graphic image data should not need to be aware of the colors available in the printer, three color planes are sent to the printer. The printer is aware of what colors the cartridges are that will generate the image. The printer will converts the full color image information into a two color image. If the iTherm® 280 printer is configured with a black color and a highlight color, there is no point in the printers mixing the highlight color with black. If however, the iTherm® 280 printer is configured with two colors other than black, the printer attempts to mix the colors to generate black. (Note that in text mode the colors are not mixed.) This requires that there be two basic modes of color graphic generation. If the iTherm® 280 printer is configured with two colors, the printer will mix the two colors on the thermal paper, using the primary and the secondary color. Because there are three primary colors, the printer is unable to print full color. The printer follows the rules for mixing colors and it if the result is ambiguous (because of the missing color), the printer will print with the primary color. This results in a image made up of primary color dots, secondary color dots and mixed dots. The mixed dots color may not be black but a mixture of whatever colors are installed. In text mode, the primary color is assigned as the default color and the secondary color is assigned as the alternate highlight color. In most cases the darkest color should be initialized as the primary color. The Ithaca® Windows print driver provides the translation from Windows color to the three color planes. When a graphic is created for the iTherm® 280 Printer, the colors used must take into account that colors other than the highlight color will print black. The Ithaca® Windows driver helps adjust the color content and generates the desired print from a full color image14. 28-07764 Rev C Page 245 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Color Graphics Procedure for color horizontal graphics: There are many ways to generate graphics for the iTherm® 280 printer. The easiest is to use the PJColor program. (See the next section.) The other way is to use the Ithaca windows driver and capture the output to a file. To generate an image using the windows print driver: 1. Generate the graphic image in the program of your choice. Use colors consistent with the two colors installed in the printer. 2. Make sure the paper size you pick fits the printer (3 inches wide with 0.25-inch margins). 3. The iTherm® 280 print driver should be installed (even if the printer is not connected). 4. Set up the print driver to print the graphic to a file using whatever resolution is required. 5. Print the graphic image to a file. 6. Later, when you want to print the graphic, simply copy the file to the printer with your application. 7. You may also copy the graphic to the graphic save buffer and then request the printer to retrieve and print it without re-sending the graphic data. Optionally, process the color image with the Ithaca® color image processor14 in the PJColor program. The program can print the image or generate a printable file. 14 ® Ithaca Color Image Processor is patent pending Page 246 Rev C 28-07764 ITherm® 280 Color Graphics iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Figure 20 Receipt with graphics As with all graphics, the data path to the printer must be eight bits. Seven-bit protocols do not work. iTherm® 280 Universal Color Graphics Starting with Version 1.88 of the iTherm® 280 Printer firmware supports the ability to print two color graphics in all emulations. This support is an enhancement to the original TMU200, ESC/POS, Star, and Citizen printer emulations. The intent of Universal Color Graphic support is to allow the iTherm® 280 color graphics capability to be used in existing applications that do not support color graphics. There are several ways to add color graphics to an existing application. The easiest for you will depend on how much control you have over your application. At a minimum, you 28-07764 Rev C Page 247 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Color Graphics should be able to change the name printed on the top of a receipt. With the PJColor15 program you can store a named graphic into the printer an print it by changing the text name to match the stored graphic. For example, if your receipt has a name like "Joe's Market", you can save a graphic in the printer named "Joe's" and then change the "Joe's Market" to "&%URJoe's&" When the iTherm® 280 finds "&%URJoe's&", it is replaced with the stored graphic. Some applications allow a graphic file to be sent to the printer. In this case PJColor can generate the graphic file and then your application can send it to the printer. This file will support two color print. PJColor also has a feature that will allow you to generate a file that will define the graphic to be stored into the printer. You can then use this file to setup any number of printers with the same graphic. If you are using a windows print driver (other than the Transact iTherm® 280 driver) to support your printer, you will not be able to send color graphics to the printer through the print driver. The print driver will not support universal color graphics. You can however, store the graphic in the printer and use IPCL commands to print the stored graphic. (You must select a printer resident font for this to work.) The following is a short summary and how to description of these features. Print File Graphics PJColor can generate a print file that may be sent to the printer in any emulation and produce a two color print graphic. To generate a print file. 1) Start PJColor 2) Under Settings, Select the iTherm® 280 printer. Then select the emulation that machines the printer. 3) Select the resolution you would like to have the printer use to print the graphics. Low resolutions are faster, high resolutions produce better graphics. 4) Load the graphics Image you wish to print. 5) Select the communications port and configuration. 6) Adjust the image to produce the effect you would like. The lower graphic window displays an approximation of the printed image. 7) When you are satisfied with the graphic, press the "Print to a File" button. PJColor will ask what file you would like to receive the print data. 8) This file can be sent to the printer and the graphic will be printed. 15 The PJColor program has been enhanced to provide several ways to create color Logos and Coupons and make them available to the iTherm® 280 printer. Page 248 Rev C 28-07764 ITherm® 280 Color Graphics iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Store Graphics in the printer: PJColor can store a graphic in the iTherm® 280 Printer or generate a file that will store a graphic in the printer. To Store a graphic in the printer 1) Start PJColor 2) Under Settings, Select the iTherm® 280 printer. Then select the emulation that you will be setting the printer to. 3) Select the resolution you would like to have the printer use to print the graphics. Low resolutions are faster, high resolutions produce better graphics. 4) Select the communications port and protocol that is to be used to communicate to the printer. 5) Load the graphics Image you wish to print. 6) Adjust the image to produce the effect you would like. The lower graphic window displays an approximation of the printed image. 7) When you are satisfied with the graphic, press the "Store in Printer" button. PJColor will attempt to interrogate the printer and will display the graphics currently in the printer if any. (Note: If PJColor cannot communicate with the printer, only the "Save to File" option will be allowed.) 8) Make sure there is enough room in the printer for the graphic. 9) Insert a name in the "Macro Name" box. Keep it simple, this name will be used later to print the graphic. 10) Record the graphic in the printer. Print a stored graphic. In the data stream to the printer enter "&%URName&" and the graphic will print in place of the "&%URName&" data. The "Name" must be identical to the name entered earlier. Generate a file to store graphics into a printer To generate a file that will store a graphic into a printer, follow the same procedure to store a graphic in a printer up through step 8. Then: 1) Insert a name in the "Macro Name" box. Keep it simple, this name will be used later to print the graphic 2) Press the "Save to File" button. This will allow you to select a file where the stored universal graphic information is saved. 3) This file contains an "erase any previous graphic with the same name" command, "a save new graphic with this name" command and the graphics information. 4) This file can then be sent to the printer and the graphic will be saved in the printer. Note: If the target printer does not have enough room for the graphic information to be stored, the graphic will not be stored. 28-07764 Rev C Page 249 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Color Graphics How universal graphics is done The printer extends all the emulations to support two additional escape sequences and adds limited IPCL support. IPCL (Ithaca Printer Control Language) is an ASCII method of sending printer commands to the printer. In Ithaca PcOS emulation, IPCL command support is extensive. In other emulations, IPCL support is limited to the following commands. &%CR &%LF &%UAxxx &%CLx &%UBName& &%UGName& &%URName& &%UDName& &%USName& &%UFALL& &%UQ& &%UTx Insert a [CR] Insert a [LF] Feed xxx paper steps and cycle auto-cutter Select Color where x = 0 for the Primary or 1,2,3 for secondary Begin defining universal graphic "Name" End the definition of "Name" Run (print) universal graphic "Name" Remove universal graphic "Name" from nonvolatile memory Flag universal graphic "Name" to be run when the printer is turned on Erase all stored universal graphics. (Erases all User Store) Prints a directory of the universal graphics currently stored in the printer Changes the Name termination character from "&" to "x". "x" may range from 21H to 255H Note: The & used to flag the end of the Name string is not valid in PcOS Ithaca emulation mode. You should use <0> or define the terminator with the &%UTx command. The extended Escape sequences are [ESC][US]… and [ESC][FS]… The [ESC][US] commands are the same as the PcOS emulation. The [ESC][FS] commands are not intended to be used by the customer. They provide the universal graphics support. Because graphics would be very difficult to generate and are not supported by any graphics drives other than PJColor . How to use IPCL commands in text strings If your software allows you to pass text strings to the printer, you should be able to use the universal graphics commands. Most POS software allows user customization of the text message printed at the beginning and the end of the receipt. To use the Universal IPCL commands simply place them in a text string like the following example; note that your results may vary depending on the operation system, software and the ability to pass ASCII Characters. Load and store named graphic image • First you must create the graphic image using the PJColor Color Image Converter and save the image to a file. See the section “Generate a file to store graphics into a printer” above. Page 250 Rev C 28-07764 ITherm® 280 Color Graphics • • • iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Send the following text strings to the printer using whatever means is available to you. &%UBLogo& Begin defining macro "Logo" &%UGLogo& End the Definition of "Logo" &%UMLogo& Save Macro "Logo" to nonvolatile memory A graphic image named “Logo” should now be stored in the nonvolatile memory. To verify the image is present, use the “&%UQ&” IPCL command or the PJColor Color Image Converter to print the name and size of the stored images. Recall and print stored named graphic image • Send the following text string to the printer using whatever means is available to you. &%URLogo& Run Macro "Logo" (Print the macro) Cautions Universal graphics information is stored in the same place as user defined characters and user defined macros. If you are using an emulation such as ESC/POS that supports macros and/or user defined characters, universal graphics will compete for space with these functions. In addition, the "&%UFALL&" (Erase universal graphics) will also erase any user defined graphics and macros. If you are using the Ithaca PcOS emulation, these commands are identical with the User Store commands except for the terminator character. You may change the NUL terminator to "&" with "&%UT&" if you find the "&" easier. 28-07764 Rev C Page 251 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Color Graphics Universal Color Command Descriptions &%UB & Begin named universal graphic record IPCL &%UB & Description The &%UB & command initializes the universal graphic buffer structure, and redirects the following data to the universal graphic buffer. It uses the field as a reference. If the name already exists in the flash user store, the command is ignored. The command must be followed by the "End name universal graphic record" command with the same name. If the data that follows is larger than the universal graphic buffer (about 16K), the universal graphic definition is terminated without saving any data. &%UG & End named universal graphic record IPCL &%UG & Description The &%UG & command ends the universal graphic record operation and saves the universal graphic to flash. It uses the field to verify the command end and must match the "Begin named universal graphic record" command. If the name already exists in the flash user store or the universal graphic memory is exceeded, the command is invalid, and the field prints. &%UR & Run universal graphic data from user store IPCL &%UR & Description The &%UR & command loads the referenced universal graphic into the universal graphic buffer. The universal graphic buffer is then inserted into the data stream. If the named item does not exist or is not a universal graphic, the iTherm® 280 ignores the command. &%US & Flag item as a start-up universal graphic IPCL &%US & Description The &%US & command flags the referenced item to `be processed at startup. Only one user character definition and one universal graphic may be flagged to run at startup. &%UD & Delete item from user store IPCL &%UD & Description The &%UD &command removes an item from user store and frees up space. If the item does not exist, the iTherm® 280 ignores the command. &%UFALL& Flush information from user store IPCL &%UFALL& Description The &%UFALL& command clears all entries in user store and frees the data space. It must have the name, “ALL” (in uppercase) attached. Page 252 Rev C 28-07764 ITherm® 280 Color Graphics iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide &%UQ& IPCL Description Report on user store &%UQ& The &%UQ& command prints a status report. The intention of the command is to aid in universal graphic development. &%UT IPCL Description Redefine User Store Termination Character &%UT This command allows the terminator used to signal the end of the name field in User Store commands to be modified. The value of is used for the terminator. The value of n may be from 0 to 255. If &%UT% were sent to the printer the User Store command to run universal graphic "Demo" would be &%URDemo%. Example &%CL IPCL Description Where n: &%UA IPCL Description Where m: 28-07764 Set Print Color &%CL This command allows various colors to be selected on printer emulations that do not support color text. 0 Print with the Left cartridge (Typically Black) 1, 2, 3 Print with the Right cartridge (Typically Red, Blue, or Green) Cycle Auto-Cutter &%UA This command feeds m/96 inches of paper and cycles the auto cutter. m = m1 * 100 + m2 *10 + m3 Rev C Page 253 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Color Graphics iTherm® 280 Coupon-Cut-Logo Feature The iTherm® 280 printer has a feature that will allow a coupon and or logo graphic to printed as part of the existing auto cutter command. To activate this feature, it must first be configured. Configuration consists of specifying in what order the Coupon-Cut-Logo is processed and optionally, how much paper is to be feed after the new cut operation. Once configured, the Coupon and/or logo must be defined and loaded into the printer. The “Universal Graphics” feature should be used to define and load the graphic. The Coupon is named “Coupon”, and the Logo is named “Logo”. They may be saved in any resolution and of any size. They also need not be all graphics. The existing application cut command will be replaced by the Coupon-Cut-Logo operation. Configuration options are as follows: Cut Command Logo: Cut-Logo Coupon-Cut Logo-Cut Cut-Coupon Coupon-Cut-Logo Logo-Cut-Coupon Cut-Logo-Coupon Cut-Coupon-Logo Logo-Coupon-Cut Coupon-Logo-Cut Disabled Perform Feed to cut, then cut, and then print the Logo. Print the Coupon, Feed to Cut, and Cut. Print the Logo, Feed to Cut, and Cut. Perform Feed to cut, then cut, and then print the Coupon. Print the Coupon, Feed to cut, Cut, ad then print the Logo. Print the Logo, Feed to cut, Cut, ad then print the Coupon. Perform the Feed to cut, Print the Logo and then the Coupon. Perform the Feed to cut, Print the Coupon and then the Logo. Print the Logo, then the Coupon, feed to cut and Cut. Print the Coupon, then the Logo, feed to cut and Cut. Perform the Normal cut. Cut Command Logo Feed: 0 to 80 mm. Page 254 Rev C 28-07764 chapter 8 Unicode and Fonts 28-07764 Rev C Page 255 This page intentionally left blank Page 256 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Unicode and Fonts Fonts Your TransAct® ITherm 280 printer uses outline and/or stroke based scalable fonts. These fonts provide you with additional font options as well as improved character appearance, while functioning transparently within legacy applications. Such fonts represent a substantial improvement to the so-called bitmap fonts that are traditionally used for thermal printers, which are based on a pixel by pixel definition of characters. With a fixed size and fixed character spacing, these bitmap fonts were limited to specific magnification factors from 2-8X, and required scaling and smoothing at larger font sizes. Moreover, such scaling and smoothing operations were often unsuitable for complex fonts such as Asian characters, where changes to pixel layout actually risk changing character meanings. To take full advantage of scalable fonts, the ITherm 280 supports additional commands and features, including: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Character size selection by points Character pitch selection by points Variable character spacing if desired Custom fonts Unicode support for international language support Enhanced code page support for ASCII based applications. Character Generation The font technology in the ITherm 280 printer uses standard outline fonts (sometimes referred to as TrueType fonts) or stroke fonts. Both technologies are scalable, however each has unique advantages. Outline characters Outline characters use points along the edge of the character to describe the character. The character generator defines the edge and then fills in the enclosed space to define the character. This type of character generation produces very well formed characters and produces the best looking characters. However, it requires more storage than stroke fonts, and is best for non-Asian fonts. 28-07764 Rev C Page 257 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Stroke-based characters With stroke based characters, the points stored are along the center line. Less than half the points are needed to render stroke based characters. This improves character-generation performance and uses less space. This type of character generation is fast and efficient, and is ideally suited for Asian fonts. Character Definition True Type and Stroke fonts are designed as a complete font with character cell size and character position in the cell based on the overall font design. Typical the characters are defined as vectors and stored as coordinates on a character cell grid. The grid is in an arbitrary design unit and may be up to 4096 units on a side. In most systems character sizes is specified as a point size where the point size refers to the character height. The character width is typically variable and designed to produce the optimal appearance. The font rendering system must take the requested point size and generate a character based on the original design units and produce a character that is the correct size and position for the printer. In most font designs, the vertical point size includes white space between lines. The font designer defines the height of the character cell in design units for all characters then defines a character origin that will be used for all the characters in the font. The designer then defines individual character sizes based on how the font is supposed to look and all the characters that are to be included. Characters are then positioned in the cell based on this origin. All characters in the font are then based on the same rules. The white space between lines in defined to be above the character. The information available at print time is listed above. The complete cell is not provided, only the escapement, black width and depth and the x and y offsets to the origin are available. The printer cannot arbitrarily shorten the cell height that was defined by the font designer even though the provided character may fit in a smaller space. Using these rules, may result in characters that at first appear too small with excessive white space between lines, however this is how the font was designed. The printer must allow the minimum line spacing based on the Page 258 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts point selection and not on the actual character height of any given characters. Second guessing the font designer can have very bad results when character are encountered that use the full cell. Asian fonts require slightly different rules for character placement and are not as one would expect. The Asian ideographs are positioned on center of mass, rather than on a baseline. The Latin data in Asian typefaces must be built on the same rules. As a result, when Latin characters are scaled the expected baselines do not line up. Asian fonts are also fixed pitch, however, Latin character in the font are basically ½ the width of the typical Asian character. Character Size The character generation engine used in the ITherm 280 internally uses a standard point based system to specify the character size. One point is 1/72 of an inch. Therefore a 72 point character would form a character suitable to generate one line per inch printing. The typical application might refer to a 12 point character. This is the character height and not the width. The character width typically varies on character by character bases; for example, the lower case “i” is much narrower than the upper case “W”. Font selection commands for selecting character sizes in legacy applications are also supported. For printers such as the ITherm 280, two or three character sizes are generally predefined with a dot matrix size of 10x24 or 13x24 dots, and this fixed size may then be double or tripled to provide larger characters when needed. To supply legacy support, the ITherm 280 will automatically select the appropriate character size to support the legacy font and character scaling commands. In the ITherm 280, the horizontal and vertical point size may be set independently. Typically this type of printer would print a tall, narrow, mono-spaced character. Tall narrow mono-spaced character provides a very readable print with easy column alignment while using less paper than standard type fonts. This type of font is sometimes referred to as a condensed font. Selecting Character Size The ITherm 280 provides two ways to specify character size. The legacy or classic font selection method is based on dot matrix size. The second method is based on the standard type points system. The advantage of the type point system is that the print produced by the printer will match what is displayed by the host system, as both use the same system for describing the characters produced. Legacy or Classic Method With the classic method, the application selects a character size and then sets the character spacing by adding or removing dot spaces between the characters. Using the scaled font, the ITherm 280 provides 3 basic predefined character sizes. The smallest is a 10x24 dot-like16 font and is typically printed in pitches from 16 to 20 characters per inch (CPI). The next larger font is 13 x 24 dot-like, and is typically printed in pitches from 14 to 16 CPI. The largest font is 14 x 24 dot-like font and is typically printed at pitches from 10 to 14 CPI. The ITherm 280 always prints at 203 dots per inch (dpi) and always uses the scalable font to form characters. The resulting characters are not necessarily exactly the dot size indicated, but 16 Characters are dot-like because they are not guaranteed to be exactly at an exact dot equivalent. They are spaced in a fixed character cell that provides equivalent spacing and alignment as a fixed character size, however the actual character size is defined by the font designer. 28-07764 Rev C Page 259 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts are always spaced in a fixed dot cell provided that the legacy commands are used. Adding or subtracting space between characters achieves different character pitches with a fixed character cell size. As each dot has a fixed size and position, only specific pitches are possible. Character spacing may also be selected by requesting a print pitch based on characters pre inch. Once again, the results are not exact. If the requested spacing is zero, the character spacing will be defined by the character definition, and will result in variable spacing. Line spacing The legacy commands select line spacing as lines per inch. With scalable characters, the lines per inch is a minimum spacing. If a character is larger then the spacing between lines, the line spacing will be increased to allow enough room for the characters on that line. Selecting character size by points. In addition to the legacy or classic method of character size selection, the ITherm 280 allows selection by point size. Point sizes from 4 to 72 points may be selected for both the horizontal and vertical axes. If a horizontal point size of zero (0) is selected for the horizontal spacing the characters are printed using variable spacing based on the character definition, using the vertical point size for the horizontal point size. To provide fine control over character size, two commands are available, one of which specifies the size in points, and the other of which specifies the size in ¼-point increments. If the font is a stroke font, the boldness of the characters is controlled through variations in individual stroke width. Internal Fonts The ITherm 280 is provided by default with a standard WGL4 outline-based font, and optionally with an additional GB18030 stroke-based font. Additional user defined outline or stroke fonts may be used as required. The default font provided with the ITherm 280 is called “Andale Mono Regular” from Monotype. This is a fixed-pitch font that produces good results when compared to legacy bitmap fonts. As another alternative, the printer may be ordered with a variable-pitch font, which will allow variable-pitch printing. Character Cache The ITherm 280 supports a high speed character cache that can cache character bitmaps, outlines, tiles, or bands of characters. The caching technique is based on a least-recently used (LRU) algorithm. The Cache contains an entry for each size of character used. The amount of space in the cache used by each character is dependant on the size of the character. At power up, the character cache is empty. The first ticket will require that all characters to be printed be generated from the vector data. This will typically make the first ticket slightly slower than subsequent tickets. It is also possible to define a user defined font with different metrics that will cause the cache to be flushed when any of the user characters are being accessed. If this should occur, the user defined font should be changed to match the other fonts in the printer. Page 260 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Custom Fonts The ITherm 280 supports TrueType fonts. There are several companies that will provide custom character sets. The ITherm 280 uses fonts provided by Monotype. You can contract Monotype through their website www.fonts.com, or by phone in U.S. & Canada (toll-free 1-800424-8973, directly at 1-781-970-6020), or the United Kingdom (Free Phone 0800 371242, direct +44 (0)1737 765959.) Stacked or Linked fonts The ITherm 280 also uses a font stacking technology where fonts are linked together. This means that as each character is looked up, the first font in the stack containing the character is then printed. For example, if a customer would like to replace several standard characters with custom characters, a user defined font can be provided that would, if first in the link, replace the characters n the standard font. It may also be desirable to stack fonts to provide a precedent for how individual characters are looked up. For example: • An application may wish to alter the appearance of several characters for security. • It might be necessary to define a group of special symbols for a specific application. • It might be necessary to supplement a font with special characters like OCR characters. To provide this flexibility, the ITherm 280 has the ability to link up to 8 fonts together. When this is done, the first font in the link is searched first. If the character is not defined, the next font in the link is searched. This process is continued until the character is found or the last font is searched. There are two ways to define a linked font. This first is to define a default linked font in the POR.INI file. If it link font is defined in the POR.INI file, it will be selected as the default power on font. Selecting font 0 will select the linked font provided that a link font is defined. It is also possible to dynamically define a linked font. This requires that the fonts to be linked be aliased to a font id in the POR.INI file. Defining a linked font does not necessarily activate it. If the linked font was not already active, it must be selected by selecting font 0. Font Storage The ITherm 280 supports a Flash file system used to store fonts, custom graphic and custom macros. A file system interface is provided for this system, where the host application may download files. In addition, TransAct Technologies provides a file loading tool that runs on Windows® based systems. To allow flexible and easy support for all kinds of fonts, fonts are stored in the ITherm 280 printer as a standard font file. These files are typically not visible to the user, however; TransAct Technologies provides a support tool that will allow the user to load their own font directly from Windows and change the way fonts are printed. It is also possible for the host application to load fonts into the printer. The printer can contain up to 99 unique and selectable fonts. Any font may be selected at any time. In addition up to 8 fonts may be linked or stacked together. Some standard character size 28-07764 Rev C Page 261 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts and character pitch commands are supported as legacy commands. The appearance of the print using those commands has been optimized using the TransAct WGL4 font. If you elect to use your own font, or the GB18030 font, you may wish to use the scalable font control commands to select the character size and spacing rather than the legacy commands. TransAct Technologies provides a basic WGL4 font with the printer. This may be supplemented or replaced with a GB18030 Chinese font upon request. The printer will accept TrueType and compressed stroke fonts as defined by Monotype. If required, the customer may supplement the TransAct supplied fonts with their own custom fonts. WARNING: If you elect to load fonts into the printer you must have proper rights to that font. Do not download a font to the printer if you do not have the right to use the font as a downloaded printer font. Unicode As computer systems started to address more and more international environments, the classic ASCII standard with code pages became unworkable. Several competing systems were developed. however it was clear that a standard needed to be developed. In 1991 Version 1.0 of the Unicode standard was developed, to standardize how and where characters are to be addressed in an expanded addressing scheme. In 2000 Version 3.0 of the Unicode standard was published and generally accepted. The ITherm 280 follows this standard for character placement and encoding17. Note: If a custom font is used that is not in Unicode order, the order of the font will be used as if it were in Unicode order. Any subsequent character mappings will assume to be in Unicode order and may not produce the desired effects. Unicode Encoding The ITherm 280 Printer supports Unicode character addressing using Unicode Transform Format or UTF as defined in the Version 3.0 Unicode Specification. There are several forms of UTF encoding. UTF-16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255. UTF-16 essentially sends two 8-bit bytes that form a 16-bit address to access the desired character. Basic UTF-16 does not define the byte order. If you wish to use UTF-16 and allow the printer to determine the byte order, you must send the byte order mark (0xFEFF) before you send any characters. To prevent loss of byte order synchronization, you should periodically send the byte order mark to resynchronize the printer with your application. If UTF-16 is selected, all data sent to the printer must be 16 bits. All commands and command parameters are also 16 bit, however only values between 0 and 255 are valid. Note that 24 bit encoding is not supported. UTF-16BE uses the big-endian method of sending the two bytes. This method sends the high byte first and then the low byte. It is not required to send the byte order mark (0xFEFF) for the correct byte order to be initialized. However, to prevent loss of byte order synchronization, you should periodically send the byte order mark to resynchronize the printer with your application. If 17 The Version 3.0 Unicode standard defines a 24 bit addressing method that is not supported by the Epic TM TM 430 . The Epic 430 is limited to a 16-bit address value. Values greater than 65535 will be truncated to 16 bits. Page 262 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts UTF-16BE is selected, all data sent to the printer must be 16 bits. All commands and command parameters are also 16 bit, however only values between 0 and 255 are valid. UTF-16LE uses the little-endian method of sending the two bytes. This method sends the low byte first and then the high byte. It is not required to send the byte order mark (0xFEFF) for the correct byte order to be initialized. However, to prevent loss of byte order synchronization, you should periodically send the byte order mark to resynchronize the printer with your application. If UTF-16LE is selected all data sent to the printer must be 16 bits. All commands and command parameters are also 16 bit, however only values between 0 and 255 are valid. UTF-8 uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence (MBCS) to identify the desired Unicode character. This encoding method is less straightforward but preserves some of the 8-bit character of ASCII encoding.. This method uses unique bit sequences at the MSBs of a byte to determine its location and meaning within the MBCS encoding. See the table below for more information. If UTF-8 is selected all data sent to the printer must be encoded. All command parameters over 127 must be encoded in UTF-8. UTF-8TXT uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence (MBCS) to identify the desired Unicode character. This encoding method is identical to UTF-8 except command parameters over 127 are not UTF-8 encoded. They must be sent unmodified as 8-bit values. Note: Extended UTF encoding past 65534 is not supported in UTF-16 or UTF-8. Only Unicode addresses from 0 to 65534 are supported by the ITherm 280 Printer. Scalar Value 1st Byte 000000000xxxxxxx 0xxxxxxx 00000yyyyyxxxxxx 110yyyyy Zzzzyyyyyyxxxxxx 1110zzzz NOTE: 4 byte encoding is not supported. 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 10xxxxxx 10yyyyyy 10xxxxxx UTF-8TXT is probably the easiest mode to use. It allows normal 8 bit commands and graphics while still supporting the full Unicode character encoding range. Typically ITherm 280 Printers are shipped set to this mode. 28-07764 Rev C Page 263 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Unicode Encoding Example 3 Byte output Example Hex Character Code: FA11 FA 11 - Original Hex Code(s) 11111010 000100001 - Converted to Binary 1111 1010 00 0100001 - Underlined by section (ending of output byte) Section A 4 digits 1110 1111 Section B 6 digits Section C 6 digits 10 101000 10 010001 - 3 (8bit) Binary numbers EF A8 91 - 3 Hex Bytes to Output <239> <168> <145> - 3 decimals to output Page 264 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Bitmap Fonts It is possible to use bitmap fonts with the ITherm 280 Printer. Bitmap fonts are fixed pitch and are not scalable. They will only function as legacy fonts. The printer is optionally supplied with 4 legacy bitmap fonts. They are in a 10x24, 12x24 draft font format and a 16x24 near letter quality format. They are defined as follows: BMFont0 = chr10x24.bft 10 x 24 draft font with typical spacing of 16 characters per inch BMFont1 = chr12x24.bft 12 x 24 draft font with typical spacing of 14 characters per inch BMFont2 = chr16x24.bft 16 x 24 NLQ font with typical spacing of 12 characters per inch BMFont4 = ocr16x24.bft 16 x 24 OCR font with typical spacing of 12 characters per inch It is possible to define a custom bitmap font. Transact supports a bitmap font compiler that will convert a bitmap font picture file into a compressed bitmap file that may be loaded into the printer as a bitmap (.bft) font file. The input to the program is a text file in a predefined format consisting of a font description and then character definitions consisting of the character ID and then the character definition. The format is as follows: (Note lines preceded with # characters are comments. # 11 by 24 font with a base line at 22 # F=X is not used in Thermal Products W=11 H=24 B=22 F=0 ; N=0000 U=0000 NULL 01 ........... 02 ........... 03 ........... 04 ........... 05 ........... 06 ........... 07 ........... 08 ........... 09 ........... 10 ........... 11 ........... 12 ........... 13 ........... 14 ........... 15 ........... 16 ........... 17 ........... 18 ........... 19 ........... 20 ........... 21 ........... 22 ........... 23 ........... 24 ........... ; N=0001 U=0020 SPACE 01 ........... 02 ........... 28-07764 Rev C Page 265 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts 03 ........... 04 ........... 05 ........... 06 ........... 07 ........... 08 ........... 09 ........... 10 ........... 11 ........... 12 ........... 13 ........... 14 ........... 15 ........... 16 ........... 17 ........... 18 ........... 19 ........... 20 ........... 21 ........... 22 ........... 23 ........... 24 ........... ; N=0002 U=0021 EXCLAMINATION MARK 01 ........... 02 ........... 03 ...00...... 04 ...00...... 05 ...00...... 06 ...00...... 07 ...00...... 08 ...00...... 09 ...00...... 10 ...00...... 11 ...00...... 12 ...00...... 13 ...00...... 14 ...00...... 15 ...00...... 16 ...00...... 17 ........... 18 ........... 19 ........... 20 ..0000..... 21 ..0000..... 22 ..0000..... 23 ........... 24 ........... ; N=0003 U=0022 QUOTATION MARK 01 ........... 02 ........... 03 .00..00.... 04 .00..00.... Page 266 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts 05 .00..00.... 06 .00..00.... 07 .00..00.... 08 ........... 09 ........... 10 ........... 11 ........... 12 ........... 13 ........... 14 ........... 15 ........... 16 ........... 17 ........... 18 ........... 19 ........... 20 ........... 21 ........... 22 ........... 23 ........... 24 ........... ; N=0004 U=0023 NUMBER SIGN 01 ........... 02 ........... 03 ........... 04 .....00.... 05 ..00.00.... 06 ..00.00.... 07 ..00.00.... 08 ..00.0000.. 09 ..0000000.. 10 0000000.... 11 0000.00.... 12 ..00.00.... 13 ..00.00.... 14 ..00.0000.. 15 ..0000000.. 16 0000000.... 17 0000.00.... 18 ..00.00.... 19 ..00.00.... 20 ..00.00.... 21 ..00....... 22 ........... 23 ........... 24 ........... The characters must be in sequential order and must be assigned Unicode character codes. N=0001 is a sequence number in hex and is not used in controlling character generation or order. U=0021 is the Unicode address in hex and the characters must be in ascending Unicode address order. 28-07764 Rev C Page 267 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts File system and the POR.INI file The ITherm 280 Printer supports a file system to support TransAct Technologies fonts and allow the user to load and link custom fonts. The POSFile tool provides a Windows interface to the printer and will allow fonts and configuration files to be loaded into the printer. This tool can read and write the POR.INI file, however the TransAct supplied fonts can not be read or deleted from the printer. TrueType18 and Compressed Stroke Fonts19 are supported by the ITherm 280 Printer. Userdefined TrueType fonts many be defined and loaded into the printer, however, once in the printer they can not be extracted. (This protects the copyrights on the font.) The POR.INI file is used to control how fonts are encoded, named, identified and linked, as well as allowing how the font to be printed is controlled. In addition the POR.INI file defines how each legacy font is defined and printed. The POR.INI file is divided into sections: • [encoding] This section defines how the printer encodes the character set. It may be ASCII with code page, or Unicode. If ASCII is selected the default code page is selected and/or defined in this section. • [font]This section defines how the scalable fonts are named and generated. You can control the font cache size and partitions, the Hinting, link fonts and font abstractions. • [bmfont] This section defines and abstracts any bitmap font definitions. • [Legacy] This section defines how the previously defined fonts are used to generate legacy fonts for each emulation. The following is an example of the POR.INI file: ; Default System Configuration. [encoding] mode = UTF8TXT ;NOTE: A code page is only used in ASCII mode. ;To specify a code page, use one of the following forms: ;CodePage = 437 ;CPFile = CP8959-1.cpm ;To remap Unicode characters, define a UniRemap.cpm file. ;UniMapfile = UniRemap.cpm [font] ;Optionally specify the Cache Partitions ;Fontcache = 320,256,64 ;True Type font hinting may be disabled by setting Nohint to 1 ;Nohint = 0 ;Specify Linked fonts starting with LinkFont1. ;LinkFont1 will be searched first. ;You may specify up to 8 fonts in a linked font. ;if Link Fonts are defined, they will be Font0. 18 19 Some but not all features of Open Type fonts are supported. Open Type fonts are not recommended. Compressed Stroke fonts are supplied by MonoType Inc. Page 268 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts LinkFont1 = TactMOD.ttf LinkFont2 = TactWGL.ttf LinkFont3 = TactGB18030.ccc ;From 1 to 99 fonts may be defined Font1 = TactMOD.ttf Font2 = TactWGL.ttf Font3 = TactGB18030.ccc Font4 = TactOCR.ttf ;The brush size effects only stroke fonts. Brush = 100 [legacy] ;EmulationMode = Font,Horizontal,Vertical,Width. ; Where: ; If Font = 0 Use Linkfont else 1-4 above. ; If Font is 100 or greater use BMFont (Font - 100). BMFonts only used Width. ; Horizontal and Vertical are in 8th points, Width in Dots. Epson1 = 0,56,72,10 Epson2 = 0,64,72,14 PcOS1 = 0,56,72,10 PcOS2 = 0,64,72,14 PcOS3 = 0,80,80,18 PcOS4 = 0,80,80,20 PcOSOCR = 4,80,80,20 [bmfont] ;There may be up to 8 bitmap fonts. ;Bitmap fonts are fixed sizes and have no options BMFont0 = chr10x24.bft BMFont1 = chr13x24.bft BMFont2 = chr15x24.bft BMFont3 = chs15x24.bft BMFont4 = ocr15x24.bft Font1 through Font99 may be defined, and the font number is the alias used by the set font command, e.g. Font23 is selected by doing a select font 23 command. Font 0 is reserved for selecting the linked font. The printer may contain one default linked font. A linked font is a method of allowing the user to replace characters in a standard font with custom characters, described in more detail in an earlier section. The POR.INI file is one way of defining a linked font. In the above POR.INI file link the link font consists of User, TactWGL, and the TactGB18030 fonts. When a character is to be printed, the user font will be searched followed by TactWGL and then the TactGB18030 font. The first font containing the character will define the character. Bitmap fonts are not recommended, they should only be used if an exact bitmap is required. Bitmap fonts are not scalable like true type fonts, only the normal 2X, 3X and so on scaling is available. TransAct Technologies can upon request and signing an NDA provide tools to allow the customer to develop there own bitmap fonts. These fonts must be in Unicode order but only need support the specific characters needed in the font. NOTE: When loaded and made available the legacy select font commands should select the bitmap font by adding 100 to the font ID. For example to use BMFont0, select font 100 in the Legacy font definition. (Note: Only the font ID is used from the legacy font definition if a bitmap font is selected.) 28-07764 Rev C Page 269 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Legacy font definitions define the Size, spacing, font, quality and spot size to be used to generate a legacy font. For example the PcOS [esc] I<0> font select command will select PcOS1 font. (Note that the font select and the Font ID are offset by one.) The font size is defined in 1/8th point units. This gives a lot of control of the size. Because the ITherm 280 printer prints discreet dots that are relative large (from a font point view), changes in character size will appear to jump. That is small changes in size will not appear to alter the character and them an 1/8th point change will make a dramatic change. If you wish to change the font and/or the character size select a size in the middle of the step. Even though small changes don’t appear to have an effect, small changes do occur in the font generation and a value in the middle works best. The X and Y Spot size effects how the characters are generated. The spot size is equivalent to selecting a paint brush. A small spot is a small paint brush and therefore requires a lot mot brush strokes to form the character. As the dots printed by the printer are always the same size, defining a small spot will cause more dots to be used to form the character. Depending on how the font was defined, it is advantageous to select a large brush size and affectively reduce the number of dots in the character. There are no real guidelines for selecting Spot size. You have to play with it until you get acceptable results with your font. If you select a high quality print mode. This value can be set to nominal. (Nominal is 100). Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Select Font All [ESC] + 3 1BH 2BH 31H <27> <43> <51> The [ESC] + 3 command selects the font for printing. This command is used to select a previously loaded font based on its alias. Note: Selecting font 0 will select the linked font. If the selected font does not exist, the previous font will remain in effect. Note: Selecting font 100 will select bit map font 0. 101 is bitmap font 1 and so on. Up to 7 bitmap fonts may be present. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Define a Stacked or Linked Font All [ESC] + S … <0> 1BH 2BH 53H <27> <43> <83> The [ESC] + S command defines but does not select a stacked or linked font set. This command will define a linked list of previously loaded and aliased fonts into a linked font stack. The font ID is the same ID as in the select font command. Up to 8 fonts may be linked. The last entry must be 0. If the font does not exist, it will not be made part of the link. Note: You must select font 0 to activate the linked font. Note: You can not use bitmap fonts as part of a linked font.. Page 270 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Select Font by name All [ESC] + N <0> 1BH 2BH 31H <27> <43> <51> The [ESC] + N command selects the font for printing by file name. This command is used to select a previously loaded font by its file name. If the selected font does not exist, the previous font will remain in effect. Note: This command may be undesirable because it embeds in the application a file name that you may wish to change in the future. By using the Alias ID the font name may change, but the application will remain constant. Note: This command may be used to load and select a bitmap font. If a bitmap font is selected with this command, it will define bitmap font 7 and select it. Once loaded, it may be reselected by selecting font 107. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Initiate Unicode UTF-16BE Encoding All [ESC] + H 1BH 2BH 48H <27> <43> <72> The [ESC] + H command will put the printer into UTF-16BE character encoding mode of operation. If you wish to access characters above 255, you must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF-16BE. UTF-16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255, sending two 8-bit bytes that form a 16-bit address to access the desired character. UTF-16BE uses the big-endian method of sending the two bytes. This method sends the high byte first and then the low byte. Note: Once selected, all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding, even for non-print commands. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Initiate Unicode UTF-16LE Encoding All [ESC] + L 1BH 2BH 4CH <27> <43> <76> The [ESC] + L command will put the printer into UTF-16LE character encoding mode of operation. If you wish to access characters above 255, You must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF-16LE. UTF-16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255, sending two 8-bit bytes that form a 16-bit address to access the desired character. UTF-16LE uses the little-endian method of sending the two bytes. This method sends the low byte first and then the high byte. Note: Once selected, all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding, even for non-print commands. Function 28-07764 Initiate Unicode UTF-8 Encoding (MBCS) Rev C All Page 271 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description [ESC] + M 1BH 2BH 4DH <27> <43> <77> The [ESC] + M command will put the printer into UTF-8 character encoding mode of operation. If you wish to access characters above 255, You must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF-8. UTF-8 uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence (MBCS) to identify the desired Unicode character. This encoding method is less straightforward. This method uses unique bit sequences at the MSBs of a byte to determine its location and meaning within the MBCS encoding. See the table below for more information. Note: Once selected, all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding, even for non-print commands. Scalar Value 1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 000000000xxxxxxx 00000yyyyyxxxxxx zzzzyyyyyyxxxxxx 0xxxxxxx 110yyyyy 1110zzzz 10xxxxxx 10yyyyyy 10xxxxxx Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Initiate Unicode UTF-8 Text only Encoding (MBCS) All [ESC] + T 1BH 2BH 54H <27> <43> <84> The [ESC] + T command will put the printer into UTF-8 Text only character encoding mode of operation. This mode is identical to the UTF-8 mode described above, except commands and there parameters are not UTF encoded. For example the following command would be used to select underline on: [ESC] W 128. If true UTF-8 encoding were in effect, the 128 parameter would be UTF encoded to [ESC] W 194 128. With UTF-8 Text only mode this command is simply [ESC] W 128. Note: This command also applies to graphic data being sent to the printer. The graphic data is a command and not text. It is not UTF-8 encoded. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Page 272 Initiate Normal 8-bit ASCII Character Encoding All [ESC] + A 1BH 2BH 41H <27> <43> <65> The [ESC] + A command will put the printer into normal character encoding mode of operation. One byte = one character. In this mode international characters must be selected by selecting the appropriate code page for translation. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Font Size and Spacing The font typically defines the character size and line spacing. The typical font is proportional spaced. That is the spacing between characters varies. This is not always the most desirable mode of operation. To give the programmer some additional control over character spacing and line height, the Accutherm Supreme provides a width and height override command. The following table converts dots to CPI (Characters Per Inch) points and ¼ points and is useful in calculating point size settings. Dots 1/203” 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 41 48 51 68 101 28-07764 Characters per Inch (CPI) 25.38 22.56 20.30 18.45 16.92 15.62 14.50 13.53 12.69 11.94 11.28 10.68 10.15 9.67 9.23 8.83 8.46 8.12 7.81 7.52 7.25 7.00 4.95 4.23 3.98 2.99 2.01 Rev C Points 1/72” 2.84 3.19 3.55 3.90 4.26 4.61 4.97 5.32 5.67 6.03 6.38 6.74 7.09 7.45 7.80 8.16 8.51 8.87 9.22 9.58 9.93 10.29 14.54 17.02 18.09 24.12 35.82 ¼ Points 1/288” 11.35 12.77 14.19 15.61 17.02 18.44 19.86 21.28 22.70 24.12 25.54 26.96 28.37 29.79 31.21 32.63 34.05 35.47 36.89 38.31 39.72 41.14 42.56 68.10 72.35 96.47 143.29 Page 273 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Font Size and Spacing command interactions There are interactions between some of the following commands and some of the legacy font selection commands. These interactions need to be considered when developing a application for this printer. This printer uses a font rendering engine that relies on the font to provide character size and spacing information. Unfortunately, legacy applications assume all characters are the same and that the character size and spacing is fixed. To force the characters rendered by the font rendering engine to conform to legacy modes of operation, some post generation processing is performed to reposition the characters into a fixed size cell. The set minimum character height and width ([ESC] + P and [ESC] + p), the set character spacing ([ESC] + I, [ESC] + i, [ESC] + J and [ESC] + j), the set minimum line spacing ([ESC] + V and [ESC] + v), and the legacy font select and spacing commands all interact. The set minimum character height and width ([ESC] + P and [ESC] + p) commands set character size but in two different ways. In most systems a character point size refers only to the line spacing and indirectly to the character height. That is also true. The vertical character height referenced in these commands refer to the character height including the white space between lines. The horizontal character width is defined by the font. Normally only the character height would be specified and the width would be defined by the font and that’s how these commands work if the Width is defined as zero. If the width is defined as zero this is used as a flag to the printer to generate characters as defined by the font and use the character width returned by the font. In effect the vertical point size passed to the font rendering engine is the same as the horizontal value. The added effect of the width being passed as zero is that any enforced horizontal spacing is disables. IE the effect of the [ESC] + I, [ESC] + i, [ESC] + J and [ESC] + j commands are disabled. If the width is not zero, the [ESC] + I, [ESC] + i, [ESC] + J and [ESC] + j remain in effect and only the resulting character size is changed, the horizontal spacing is not changed. The legacy [ESC] ! select the print mode effectively issues a set minimum character height and width command followed by a set character spacing command without effecting the pseudo fixed spacing flag. The pseudo fixed spacing flag is a further complication required for dealing with fonts that are not truly fixed pitch. In some cases a fixed pitch font will have more that one character size depending on what the character is used for. This generally only affects Asian fonts where the ideograms are generally twice as wide as Latin characters. In fixed spacing mode, the printer will put the rendered character at whatever spacing is requested even if they don’t fit. If the character is too big, it will overlap the previous and next character. To allow a fixed pitch operation that deals with small and large fixed pitch character, the printer has a pseudo-fixed pitch flag that will increase the spacing in multiples of the requested spacing until it fits. The following table lists the commands and how they interact. Command Zero [ESC] + P, [ESC] + p Width 0 Page 274 Character width Same as Height Character height From command Rev C Cell Width From Font Pseudo Fixed pitch flag No effect 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts [ESC] + P, [ESC] + p Width Not Zero From Command From command Based on set character spacing command [ESC] + I, [ESC] + i [ESC] + I, [ESC] + i [ESC] + J, [ESC] + j [ESC] + J, [ESC] + j Value 0 No effect No effect From Font Value Not zero Value 0 No effect No effect No effect No effect From Command From Font Value Not zero No effect No effect From POR.INI definition From POR.INI definition [ESC]I 28-07764 Rev C A multiple of the value defined by the command As defined by command Will be used if previously set and character spacing is not being defined by the font Set Off but has no effect Set Off Set On but has no effect Set On Will be used if previously set. Page 275 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set minimum character height and width in points. [ESC] + P 1BH 2BH 50H <27> <43> <80> w = 0, 4 – 72 h = 4 - 72 All The [ESC] + P command will set the minimum character width or height based on “w” for the width and “h” for height, where “w” and “h” are in points, defined as 1/72nd of an inch increments. If the character width is set to zero, the height will be used for the width and proportional spacing will be used. NOTE: The set pitch command will take precedence unless this command selects 0 width. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set minimum character height and width in ¼ points. [ESC] + p 1BH 2BH 70H <27> <43> <112> w = 0, 16 – 255 h = 16 - 255 All The [ESC] + p command will set the minimum character width or height based on “w” for the width and “h” where “w” and “h” are in ¼ points or 1/288th of an inch increments. This approximates setting characters by dot. If the character width is set to zero, the height will be used for the width and proportional spacing will be used. NOTE: The set pitch command will take precedence unless this command selects 0 width. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set Character spacing in points. [ESC] + I 1BH 2BH 49H <27> <43> <73> d = 0, 4 – 72 All The [ESC] + I command will set the character spacing in points, where one point is defined as 1/72nd of an inch. This command will force mono-space printing. It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above. This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used. This command differs from the [ESC] + J command in that all characters are centered on the fixed cell size. It the character is too big for the cell, it may overlap the previous and next character. The character size is not adjusted to fit the cell. If d = 0 variable spacing is selected. Page 276 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts NOTE: If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing, the characters will overlap. Variable spacing is recommended. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set Character spacing in ¼ points. [ESC] + i 1BH 2BH 69H <27> <43> <105> d = 0, 16 – 255 All The [ESC] + i command will set the character spacing in points, where ¼ point is defined as 1/288th of an inch. This command will force mono-space printing. It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above. This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used. This command differs from the [ESC] + j command in that all characters are centered on the fixed cell size. It the character is too big for the cell, it may overlap the previous and next character. The character size is not adjusted to fit the cell. If d = 0 variable spacing is selected. NOTE: If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing, the characters will overlap. Variable spacing is recommended. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set Character spacing in points with adjustment. [ESC] + J 1BH 2BH 4AH <27> <43> <74> d = 0, 4 – 72 All The [ESC] + J command will set the character spacing in points, where one point is defined as 1/72nd of an inch. This command will force mono-space printing. It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above. This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used. This command differs from the [ESC] + I command in that if the character is too large for the cell, the cell will be expanded in multiples of until the character fits. If d = 0 variable spacing is selected. However, note that the cell adjustment flag will remain set and if legacy commands are used they will allow the cell to be expanded. NOTE: If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing, the cell size will be expanded Function Set Character spacing in points with adjustment. ASCII [ESC] + j Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 6AH 28-07764 Rev C All Page 277 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts Decimal Range <27> <43> <106> d = 0, 16 – 255 The [ESC] + j command will set the character spacing in points, where ¼ point is defined as 1/288th of an inch. This command will force mono-space printing. It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above. This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used. This command differs from the [ESC] + i command in that if the character is too large for the cell, the cell will be expanded in multiples of until the character fits. If d = 0 variable spacing is selected. However, note that the cell adjustment flag will remain set and if legacy commands are used they will allow the cell to be expanded. NOTE: If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing, the characters will overlap. Variable spacing is recommended. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set minimum Line Spacing in Points [ESC] + V 1BH 2BH 56H <27> <43> <86> d = 0, 4 – 72 All The [ESC] + V command will set the line spacing in points, where one point is defined as 1/72nd of an inch. If d = 0 variable spacing is selected. NOTE: This is the minimum spacing. If the character height setting requires a larger spacing, the character height will override this setting. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Set minimum Line Spacing in ¼ Points [ESC] + v 1BH 2BH 76H <27> <43> <118> d = 0, 16 – 255 All The [ESC] + v command will set the line spacing in ¼ points, where ¼ point is defined as 1/288th of an inch. ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range [ESC] + v 1BH 2BH 76H <27> <43> <118> d = 0, 16 – 255 If d = 0 variable spacing is selected. Page 278 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts NOTE: This is the minimum spacing. If the character height setting requires a larger spacing, the character height will override this setting. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Set stroke font brush size. All [ESC] + B 1BH 2BH 42H <27> <43> <66> w = 0, 6 – 200 The [ESC] + B command will set brush stroke percentage for stroke fonts. If the brush size is set to zero the font design stroke width will be used. Values from 6 to 200 represent 0.4 to 12% of the em-width of the font. The default for most fonts is about 3%. The ITherm 280 using the GB18030 font supplied by TransAct Technologies produces the best characters with a brush size of about 100. Note: The default value for the Brush stroke may be set in the POR.INI file. [ESC] [ P Set character pitch (Legacy mode command) ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS [ESC] [ P 1BH 5BH 50H <27> <91> <80> &%F1, &%F2, &%F3, &%F4, &%F5, &%F6, &%F7 [ESC] [SP] Description The [ESC] [ P command sets character per inch print pitch to . The printer resolution limits the exact print pitch. The following table lists the exact pitch for various values on . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Resulting Characters per Inch 1.00 2.00 3.01 4.00 4.95 5.94 6.93 8.00 9.04 9.90 10.95 12.23 13.00 13.87 14.86 IPCL &%F7 &%F3 &%F2 &%F6 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 PcOS Resulting Characters per Inch 16.00 17.33 17.33 18.91 20.8 20.8 23.11 23.11 23.11 23.11 26 26 26 29.71 29.71 IPCL &%F1 &%F5 &%F4 Table 51 Character Pitch 28-07764 Rev C Page 279 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 Unicode and Fonts This command disables any right-side spacing set by the [ESC] V command. It enforces this spacing on the current font selection even if the character is too large for the spacing. In addition, when font changes are made, the character pitch is maintained. Legacy Printer Features that Have Changed Because this product employs outline and stroke font character generation, support for several legacy features are changed from standard iThem 280 version. Dynamic code page definition Dynamic code page definition is still supported when in ASCII mode, however Unicode is now used for the source character locations. Page 280 Rev C 28-07764 chapter 9 File System 28-07764 Rev C Page 281 This page intentionally left blank Page 282 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 File System File System Interface The ITherm 280 provides a file system to support fonts, configuration information, user graphics and macros. There are a number of commands that are provided to support the file system. In general, files need to be opened for read or write, read or written, and then closed. There is a command that will delete a file, and print or return a file directory. TransAct Technologies provides a Windows® based tool that will interact with the ITherm 280 and provide a drag and drop interface to the file system. The file system in the ITherm 280 is partitioned into two sections, one for internal system use by the printer, and one for user information. The system partition is referred to as partition 0. It is reserved for fonts, configurations and code page files. This partition can not be deleted or completely erased. The second partition is for all other information. There is a command that will erase all the files in this partition. The partition where files are placed is determined by the three character extension. File System commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Mode FileName Description Open File command. All [ESC] [RS] O < Mode > < Filename ><0> 1BH 1EH 4FH <27> <30> <79> Mode of operation “r” for read or “w” for write. File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension. The [ESC] [RS]O command will select and open a file for the selected operation. If the file being opened for write exists, the existing file will be overwritten. Note that only one file may be open for external operations at any one time. The Mode and FileName take the following format and must be null terminated: r Filename.ext<0> Valid Modes are: “r” Read. “w” Write “w+” Write Append (Future enhancement) “ram” open a RAM file for write. Note: RAM files capability is an option and not available on all products. File Extensions are any three characters. The following are predefined and reserved for internal use. Extension 28-07764 Partition 0= System Definition Rev C Page 283 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 File System 1= User .udf 1 Undefined macro type .mac 1 Command Macro .img 1 Graphic image. (Internal format) .bgp 1 Bitmapped internal graphic .chr 1 User Character definition .cfg 0 configuration. .ttf 0 true type font .ccc 0 compressed stroke font .btf 0 Bitmap font definition .cpm 0 code page map. .bmp 1 bitmap graphic file .gph 1 raster graphic file. .ini 0 System information file .fcg 0 Field Configuration File .upd 0 System Update file .sys 0 Load image .sy_ 0 Compressed load image. Note: All other file extensions will be placed in Partition 1 (user space) Function Return Free space for Open FIle. All ASCII [ESC] [RS] S Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 53H Decimal <27> <30> <83> Description The [ESC] [RS]S command will return an identifier byte and 4 additional bytes representing a 32 bit value (LSB First) representing the amount of free space in the partition containing the open file. The format is as follows: S Function Return Free space for this partition. All ASCII [ESC] [RS] s Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 73H Decimal <27> <30> <115> Where n = The partition Description The [ESC] [RS]s command will return an identifier byte and 4 additional bytes representing a 32 bit value (LSB First) representing the amount of free space in the partition. The format is as follows: S Page 284 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description ITherm® 280 File System Close File command. [ESC] [RS] C 1BH 1EH 43H <27> <30> <67> The [ESC] [RS]C command will close the currently open file. All Function Close All Files command. All ASCII [ESC] [RS] K Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 4BH Decimal <27> <30> <75> Description The [ESC] [RS]K command will close the font system and close all currently open files. Internal fonts will be reopened automatically if used. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal FileName Description Delete File command. All [ESC] [RS] D <0> 1BH 1EH 44H <27> <30> <68> File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension, null terminated. The [ESC] [RS]D command will select and delete a file. Note: Some of the system files are protected and can not be deleted. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Attbs FileName Set/Clear File Attributes command. All [ESC] [RS] A < Attbs > < Filename ><0> 1BH 1EH 41H <27> <30> <64> File attributes to modify. File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension. Each file has several attributes associated to it. They include S, R, and H. Attribute S R H Syntax +S or -S +R or -R +H or -H Name System Read Only Hidden Use This is a system file. This file cannot be erased or modified. This file is hidden and not displayed in the directory listing. NOTE: Attributes can be combined, however, each needs to have the + or – as a prefix. To allow these attributes to be set and cleared, the [ESC][RS]A command can be used. The format is as follows: [ESC][RS]A-R-S FileName<0> This command will remove the Read only and System attributes form File name. Function 28-07764 Return the last file command status. Rev C All Page 285 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 File System ASCII [ESC] [RS] ? Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 3FH Decimal <27> <30> <63> The [ESC][RS]? Command requests the file system to return the status of the last file operation. This command, returns an identifier byte, followed by 2 bytes indicating the status results of the last file command. The format will be as follows: ?
              or 3F, (47 or 42),
              Where: Status = ‘G’ for success and ‘B’ for Failure Detail = Detailed status as a binary byte with bit definitions as follows: Bit 0 1 2 Hex 01 02 04 Decimal 1 2 4 3 4 08 10 8 16 5 20 32 6 8 40 80 64 128 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Page 286 Function File Open File in Write Mode The Read response is shorter than requested and EOF has been encountered. The file is already open. The file system has no space for the preceding operation. Could be out of Flash or out of Buffer space. A write operation has been attempted to a read only file. File requested was not found An error has occurred. Other bits may be set that give additional detail. (This bit determines the G or B status in the previous byte) Write File command. All [ESC] [RS] W <… data ..> 1BH 1EH 57H <27> <30> <87> The [ESC] [RS]W command sends data to the printer to be stored in the file. The parameters specify the length of data that will follow where the length is LH * 256 + LL. The data is treated as binary data with no translations. Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description ITherm® 280 File System Read File command. All [ESC] [RS] R 1BH 1EH 52H <27> <30> <82> The [ESC] [RS]R command requests that data be read from the file and returned to the host. The parameters specify the length of data that should be returned where LH * 256 + LL specifies the number of returned bytes. The data is treated as binary data with no translations. If there is not enough data in the file to make up the requested length, only the available data is returned. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Generate and return a file directory report. All [ESC] [RS] I 1BH 1EH 49H <27> <30> <73> The [ESC] [RS]I command requests that a formatted text directory be returned from the printer. Each line is null terminated. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal

              Description Erase all files in a partition All [ESC] [RS] X

              1BH 1EH 58H <27> <30> <88> selects the partition. 0 = System, 1 = User. The [ESC] [RS]X command requests that the selected partition be reformatted. Reformatting the system partition <0> is not recommended, as it will erase all fonts and render the printer unusable. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description De-fragment the file system. All [ESC] [RS] F 1BH 1EH 46H <27> <30> <70> The [ESC] [RS]F command forces the file system to go through the file system and clean up deleted file sectors. All sectors flagged for deletion are actually erased and consolidated when this command is issued. Note: File space is not necessarily freed up by a file delete. Sectors may be marked for deletion but still be present but inactive in the file system. These sectors take up flash space. Each cluster has a fixed number of sectors, and if the number of deleted sectors in a cluster exceed a predefined threshold, the cluster is de-fragmented automatically. This command forces all clusters to be de-fragmented. 28-07764 Rev C Page 287 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide ITherm® 280 File System Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Verify files. All [ESC] [RS] V 1BH 1EH 56H <27> <30> <86> The [ESC] [RS]V opens and reads the VERIFY.CFG file. This file contains a list of all files that are to be validated in the printer and the expected CRC of the file. If all the files verify, this command will return VG followed by it’s 2 byte CRC. If any of the files do not verify, the command will return VB followed by it’s 2 byte CRC. For example the file might look like this: Por.ini 0x06FF Only the Por.ini file will be checked in this example. An additional and optional feature of this command is that it can verify the CRC of the operating firmware. By adding “Firmware” as a file name, this command will recalculate the Firmware CRC and compare it to the master value. If the recalculation does not match the master value, this command will return a failed response. The file would be as follows to add the Firmware check. By using the master value, this file need not be updated if the firmware is updated. Por.ini 0x06FF Firmware By knowing the CRC of the Verify.cfg file, the host application can verify that all the other files are correct (and optionally the firmware) without knowing anything about the other files of firmware. Note: The typical printer is not shipped with a Verify.cfg file. Note: This command is not performed as a condition of normal operation. It is up to the host application to refuse to use the printer if this command returns a fail to verify status. Note: if the Verify.cfg file is not present, the verify command will return VB and a 0 CRC. Page 288 Rev C 28-07764 chapter 10 iTherm® 280 Extended Printer Control 28-07764 Rev C Page 289 This page intentionally left blank Page 290 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide IThermTM Extended Printer Control The iTherm® 280 printer has a number of Extended Control commands that allow an application to better track and maintain the printer. These commands are in all emulations20. The printer maintains a log of printer activity. This activity may be returned to the host with the [ESC]~ T command. This command returns a ~T followed by four binary bits that make up a 32 bit unsigned integer. The description of the command below describes the format in full. The printer also contains a number of commands that will force the printer to perform specific functions to help maintain the printer or print information about the printer. The functions available are: 1) Print Current Configuration 2) Print current log totals Note: Each of these commands follow the ESC~ or ESCy format. Other functions are performed by these basic commands. Do not attempt to use any undocumented version of these commands. The extended diagnostics commands may affect the print quality and performance of the printer. In some cases, the commands may degrade the performance of the print cartridge or mechanism. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Read and Return Totals [ESC] ~ T 1BH 7EH 54H <27> <126> <84> This command returns the current statistics for parameter n. The value returned will be ~T with the next 4 bytes being an unsigned integer. For example: Returns: [ESC]~T<1> Request cover open count ~T<1><0><0><1><100> or 256 + 100 or 356 cover opens Values of n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Request: Black Dots Red Dots Pink Dots Cover Opens Paper Outs Line Feeds Characters Printed Cash Drawer1 Cash Drawer2 Standby Cycles 20 The Star emulation does not allow the use of [ESC] y commands for extended diagnostics. The [ESC] y commands are not available. 28-07764 Rev C Page 291 IThermTM Extended Printer Control 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Page 292 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Power Up Resets Watchdog Resets Base Flash Erases Ext Flash Erases Auto Cutter Cycles Init Requests Error Vectors Auto Cutter Faults Power On Time (Min.) System Active Time (Min.) Over Temperature Cutter Re-Home Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Function: ASCII: Hex: Decimal: Description: IThermTM Extended Printer Control Set Secondary Paper Color [ESC] ~ R or [ESC] ~ L 1BH 7EH 52H or 1BH 7EH 4CH <27><126><82> or <27><126><76> This command reconfigures the secondary paper colors. This command should only be use when the colors of the installed paper are changed. This configuration must match the secondary colors as specified by the PJColor program for the color graphics to match the PJColor preview. [ESC] ~ L sets the left or primary color and [ESC] ~ R sets the right or secondary color. You can set the Left cartridge to any color and you can set the right cartridge color to any color but black. Secondary Color in Decimal in Hex RED 1 01H GREEN 2 02H BLUE 4 04H Note: These commands change the configuration of the printer that is stored in nonvolatile memory. The values take effect immediately and will remain until changed by these commands or manual configuration. This command should only be used when needed. 28-07764 Rev C Page 293 IThermTM Extended Printer Control Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Print Current Configuration and Totals [ESC] y <9> or [ESC] ~ <9> 1BH 79H 09H <27> <121> <9> This command forces the printer to print the current configuration. To function correctly it must be issued with the printer in the proper emulation mode. It is intended to be printed in the default Ithaca® configuration but will print in any configuration. Note: This command must be preceded with an ESC y <8>. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Print Current Totals [ESC] y <15> 1BH 79H 0FH <27> <121> <15> This command forces the printer to print the current totals log. Note: This command must be preceded with an ESC y <8>. Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Print Current Print Setup Values [ESC] y <20> or [ESC] ~ <20> 1BH 79H 14H <27> <121> <20> This command forces the printer to print the current setup values. Note: This command must be preceded with an ESC y <8>. Function: ASCII: Hex: Decimal: Description: Where n = Set Electronic Journal Print Configuration Control [ESC] ~ j 1BH 7EH 6AH <27><126><105> This command reconfigures the electronic journal print mode record separator and manual printing modes 76543210 Bit values ------X0 Manual Electronic Journal Print mode is Enabled ------X1 Manual Electronic Journal Print mode is Disabled ------0X A Record separation line is printed that may contain a record number. ------1X No Record separation line is printed. Note: Both parameters must be set at the same time by this command. Note: The record separation configuration may be set in manual configuration mode. This command will reset the configuration to the value specified here. Page 294 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide IThermTM Extended Printer Control Notes: This command performs a configuration update, and should not be done on a regular basis. Notes: This command must be preceded with an ESC y <8> to enable it. 28-07764 Rev C Page 295 chapter 11 Communications 28-07764 Rev C Page 297 This page intentionally left blank Page 298 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Protocol and Print Buffers The following figure illustrates the communication flow from host computer to printer and from printer to cash drawer. Host to printer link Printer Host computer Host to keypad Printer to cash drawer Cash drawer Keypad Figure 21 Typical POS System For the host to printer communication link, the iTherm® 280 printer supports serial or parallel communications. The serial and parallel ports both follow standards developed for the personal computer environment. 28-07764 Rev C Page 299 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Data to print er Printer Host computer Status and flow control back Figure 22 Host to Printer Link In most cases, the host computer is capable of sending information to the printer much faster than the printer can print it. To prevent information from being lost, a flow control mechanism is provided. The mechanism is called the flow control protocol. The goal of the flow control protocol is to exchange as much information as possible as fast as possible without losing any data. The iTherm® 280 printer supports three flow control protocols, two in serial mode and one in parallel. From the printer’s point of view, four basic functions are required of communications. All four are common to all three flow control protocols. There must be a communication driver, status inquire procedure, storage buffer, and print control mechanism that is using the data. The communication port is either the serial port hardware or the parallel port hardware and the associated communication software driver. A means for the host to bypass the buffer for status information, referred to here as an inquirer processor, is also required because the buffer offsets the printer in time from the host. (The printer is generally behind the host). The storage print buffer is a software implemented, first-in first-out (FIFO) circular buffer. It stores information in an asynchronous fashion where information can be placed in it at any rate and retrieved from it at any rate, but the information order is not altered. All buffers have a finite size, and if information is put in faster than it is removed, the buffer will overflow. To avoid overflow, a flow control mechanism is required. The print control mechanism is the remainder of the printer hardware and control software. It interprets control codes and operates the control panel, print head, and cash drawer interface. Page 300 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications The following figure illustrates the four basic parts of printer flow control. P rinter Com m u n i c a t i o n s port Serial or parallel connection ENQ processor Data Data Data Print control Print buffer Data Print head Status Status Getting full/ getting empty Figure 23 Printer Communications Buffer Flow The communication port is either serial or parallel and is controlled by a software communication driver. The driver receives data and returns requested status. As information is received from the host, data is taken from the communication port hardware by the driver, preprocessed to look for status inquire commands, and placed in the buffer. When the buffer input function finds that the buffer is getting full, it notifies the communication driver to implement flow control. Flow control attempts to stop further information from being sent from the host. The print control software takes information from the buffer, as it needs it and can use it. When the buffer output function finds that the buffer is getting low, it notifies the communication driver that the information flow can be resumed (if it was stopped) and allows more information to be placed in the buffer. The iTherm® 280 printer has a configurable input buffer. The printer can be configured to allow from 40 to 8196 bytes of input buffer. Consequently, up to 8196 characters (or control codes) can be sent to the printer before they are interpreted and printed. In effect, the host computer can get 8196 characters ahead of the printer. In all cases, the buffer resumes communications when it is half empty. For example, if the buffer is configured to be 2048, the printer will signal stop when 2048 bytes are in the buffer; resume will be signaled when 1024 bytes remain. Inquire commands are preprocessed, which means they are found in the input data stream and acted upon as they are received. The status returned is valid as of the time the command is received. This is termed real-time status even though inquire commands are preprocessed and still placed in the buffer. Real-time status assures that data is not lost when the inquire sequence is part of another command. However, the buffer may also be filled by inquire commands if the printer is waiting for some activity. 28-07764 Rev C Page 301 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications USB USB stands for Universal Serial Bus. It was originally conceived in the early 90’s and officially recognized by Compaq, Intel, Microsoft and NEC. The development of USB has been slow, however, with the release of Windows 95 SR2 development accelerated. Windows 2000 now fully supports USB as do Windows 98 SE, and Windows Me. A technical discussion of USB is beyond the scope of this document. If you would like more information about USB, visit the USB web site at www.usb.org. USB Support POS printers are different from typical Windows printers in several ways. Microsoft has recognized these differences and has been working with the USB Device Working Group to generate a set of standards that would abstract all point-of-sale devices at the application level. At this time a workable standard for POS is years away. So while Microsoft is interested in POS in the long term, Microsoft’s immediate goal is to enable POS USB devices a way that is compatible with existing service objects. In order to support USB POS devices under the existing software architecture, Microsoft is providing the POSUSB driver model to allow USB POS devices to interface as serial COM ports to service object DLLs. The Transact USB Printer interface is based on this Microsoft POSUSB driver model. It provides full bi-directional interface to the printer and allows most existing applications to interface to the USB Ithaca® iTherm® 280 as if it were on a serial COM port. In addition we have allowed the printer to register as a composite device. This allows the printer to appear in the system as a USB print device as well as a COM port. If you are using a windows printer driver (ours or the Generic driver) you can assign the printer to the USB port. We hope that supporting the USB Ithaca iTherm® 280 as a composite device provides the best of both worlds to our customer. The USB Driver is available from customer support and by download from our web site. Transact has written a POSPrinter.OCX ActiveX that will allow you to easily interface to our printers. It is used by all of our demonstration programs. This OCX is available for use with customer applications. It works with printers installed on Serial COM ports, LPT ports, TCP/IP and USB. A USB compatible version is available from customer support or from our web site. Page 302 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications TCP/IP A 10-BaseT Ethernet adapter is available for the Ithaca iTherm® 280 printer. This Wired Ethernet Adapter provides a fast and easiest way to network and share printers in your system. Ethernet provides a consistent common connection between printers and computers using standard protocols supported by Windows® 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, as well as many other platforms. Ethernet is probably the most common networking medium, and thus allows printers to be easily added, moved and removed with inexpensive common cabling and off the self components. Print Server Features Standard Ethernet Connection • • • • • • • • 10 Mbps Speed 10 Base T RJ45 network connection Network Traffic LED indicator Configured through networked PC Web Browser Works with Virtually All Major Operating Systems Integrated into the Printer Large RAM Buffer for fast continuous printing 512K Flash Memory for Future Upgrades Supported Protocols • • • • • Line Printer Daemon Protocol (LPR) Port 9100 (RAW) The TFTP Protocol (Revision 2) Telnet COM Port Hypertext Transfer Protocol (for configuration) User Interface/Configuration • • • • HTTP/Web Interface Login Page Configuration Page o IP Address / Subnet Mask o Auto-IP, DHCP, Static IP… o Printer Textual Name (User Defined) o Printer Location String (User Defined) o Protocols Enabled/Disabled, Port o LPR, Port 9100, Telnet Adapter Firmware Update Other • Push Button for Initial IP Address reset and adapter reset. • Self-Diagnostics • Firmware Upgrade via TFTP and HTTP For more information and a users guide refer to the Transact Ethernet Users Guide (100-05072). 28-07764 Rev C Page 303 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Parallel Port Parallel Port Protocol The iTherm® 280 parallel port behaves just as any printer connected to a personal computer. The parallel interface accepts 8-bits of data from the host. The strobe signal from the host is used to indicate that data is available. When the printer sees the strobe signal and accepts the data, it asserts a busy signal. The busy signal indicates to the host that the printer has accepted the data and is working on it. After the printer absorbs the data and is ready to accept another byte, the printer asserts acknowledged (ACK), negates busy, and then finally negates ACK. The host computer should meet the following parallel-port specifications and timing. In a standard personal computer, the strobe signal is generated by software writes to the parallel-port control port, which is typically done in the bios or some parallel-port driver. As personal computers become faster, it is up to the software to assure that the strobe signal does not get too narrow. One microsecond is the minimum pulse width that should be sent down a cable. Shorter pulse widths (500 nanoseconds) will be accepted by the printer. The cable can introduce significant signal degeneration and skew. The data must be valid before the strobe signal is asserted and remain so until the strobe is removed. A 500 nanosecond setup and hold time is required by the printer. The following chart illustrates parallel-port timing. INIT < ---- Rdly Pin 16 Data Data DATA Pins 2-9 Dstu---> < > <-- Dhld Sdly -----> < STROBE Pin 1 > Bhld---> <--Tstb < BUSY Pin 11 <---------------- Tcycle ---------------> ACK Pin 10 Ahld ----> Rdly Approx. 2 seconds Bhld Approx. 5 uS Dstu 500 nS (Min) Ahld Approx. 5 uS Dhld 500 nS (Min) Sdly 3 uS (Min) Tstb 1 uS (Min) < Tcycle 200 - 280 uS Typ. Figure 24 Parallel-port Data Timing To implement flow control, the busy signal is asserted by the printer outside the normal data-transfer sequence. The busy signal has several uses, but it always indicates that the printer cannot accept information. The busy signal may happen at any time and may not adhere to the above timing chart in all cases. It is up to the host's parallel-port driver to handle all possible busy states. It is important that the host driver does not hang up if it takes some time for an acknowledged (ACK) response to a strobe signal. Standard personal computer parallel-port hardware implements an interrupt on the ACK signal to make flow control easier. Page 304 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Some systems may wish to change the details of how the strobe, busy, and acknowledged signals interact. The parallel-port option features define how the strobe, busy, and acknowledged signals operate. In normal mode, the printer follows the standard (Centronics) parallel-port conventions. With Options 1 and 3, the acknowledged and busy signals change simultaneously, which is sometimes referred to as ack-after-busy. Options 2 and 3 force busy high on the rising edge of the strobe, which is sometimes referred to as busy-while-strobe timing. In all cases, the data is latched on the rising edge of the strobe. In most cases, the normal timing mode gives the best results. Data t1 t3 STB t2 t4 BUSY ACK ACK-while-BUSY ACK ACK-in-BUSY ACK ACK-after-BUSY t5 Figure 25 Parallel Port ACK Timing Options Legend Time Interval Minimum t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 DATA Setup to STB STB Width DATA Hold after STB BUSY Delay after STB ACK Pulse Width 0.5 uS 0.5 uS 0.5 uS 0 2.5 uS Maximum 500 uS 0.5 uS Table 52 Parallel-port Timing Note: Altered STB timing to take data on the falling edge of STB can be generated as a factory option. Printer Buffer Size The iTherm® 280 printer has a configurable buffer size. It can be set from 40 to 8192 bytes. The configurable buffer allows an application to control how far ahead the buffer gets from the printer. The smaller the buffer, the tighter the control will be. It is up to the application developer to select the optimal buffer size. Parallel Port Inquire and IEEE 1284 The iTherm® 280 printer supports the IEEE 1284 bidirectional parallel peripheral interface standard. The IEEE 1284 standard provides for a bidirectional link on the parallel port. The iTherm® 280 Printer only supports Modes 0 and 4, which provide a nibble mode reverse channel for printer identification and status inquire commands. It is 28-07764 Rev C Page 305 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications beyond the scope of this guide to describe the IEEE 1284 protocol. The complete specification is available from the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. at www.ieee.org. IEEE 1284 Response Buffer The iTherm® 280 printer has a 256-byte buffer that contains information to be returned by the IEEE 1284 reverse link. Information is placed in the buffer in the same format as RS-232 serial information is returned. Inquire commands sent to the printer in IEEE 1284 mode place responses to the commands in the IEEE 1284 reverse-channel buffer. The buffer is then transmitted to the host when it requests the reverse channel. Mode 4 Mode 4 allows the printer to return identification information to the host system. The iTherm® 280 printer returns: xx,yy length of following data, 2 bytes with MSB first MANUFACTURER COMMAND SET MODEL COMMENT ACTIVE COMMAND SET TransAct Technologies IPCL 1000 Rev. x.xx IPCL When a Mode 4 request is made, the IEEE 1284 buffer is cleared before the ID is sent. Mode 0 Mode 0 provides a reverse channel for information from the printer. Normal responses to inquire commands are placed in the IEEE 1284 reverse-channel buffer. The Mode 0 reverse-channel request begins returning information to the host. The host may terminate the transmission at any time. If the link is terminated between nibbles, the last nibble is retransmitted on the next request. If a complete byte is transmitted, it is deleted from the IEEE 1284 reverse-channel buffer. An inquire command can clear the reverse-channel buffer before placing its response in the buffer. The IEEE 1284 buffer is limited to 1000 characters. If the buffer is not emptied by reverse-channel requests, the buffer overflows. The buffer is a first-in first-out (FIFO) buffer, and the last data placed in the buffer is lost. Time-outs IEEE 1284 specifies time-outs for various phases of the protocol. The iTherm® 280 printer treats time-outs as minimums. The printer time outs at the specified period only if it is idle during the complete phase. Active State The IEEE 1284 reverse channel may be activated at any time as long as the printer is not busy with data. If the printer is off-line or the cover is open, the reverse channel may Page 306 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications be activated. If the printer is placed back on-line while the reverse channel is active, the printer will not exit the reverse-channel mode. Inquire Responses In general, inquire commands place two-byte responses in the IEEE 1284 reversechannel buffer. The two bytes are the same as the serial mode responses. In IEEE 1284 mode, the printer remains busy until the inquire command is processed, assuring responses in real time. To receive the response, the host must ask for it. It is possible for the host to make a number of requests and wait for the responses; however, the status returned is valid at the time the request was made. It is also possible for the dynamic response mode to be activated and the reversechannel mode to be opened. The reverse channel then changes from reverse-idle to reverse-data available as the status changes. The application must be careful in dynamic response mode that the dynamic responses are not left active when the reverse channel is closed. If the dynamic responses are active when the reverse channel closes, the output buffer overflows. If data is in the buffer when dynamic responses are activated, it will not be replaced by the current status. If dynamic response is off and a buffer-clear command is issued followed by activation of dynamic responses, the buffer will contain fresh data. If the buffer-clear command is issued after the dynamic response is activated, the buffer will be cleared and any unread responses will be lost. Parallel Port Plug and Play Microsoft Windows implements Plug and Play (PnP) by doing a special parallel, IEEE 1284 inquire during boot. The iTherm® 280 Printer responds to the inquiry if IEEE 1284 is active. If the Windows PnP configuration flag is set in the printer, IEEE 1284 will be active for all parallel-port modes. For example, PnP in parallel mode forces IEEE 1284. For PnP to work, the host must have an IEEE 1284-compatible port adapter, and the cable used to connect to the printer must support all of the interface signals. The Plug and Play response follows. Device ID string: Manufacturer: PnP ID: Device Description: Device Class: TransAct.; CMD:M280CL,IPCL; CLS:PRINTER;MDL M280 PcOS; DES:Ithaca M280; REV:x.xx;OPTS;$9xyz LPTENUM\Ithaca-Perph.M280_P4D21 Ithaca M280 Printer OPTS Field Description OPTS;$6XYZ 28-07764 Rev C Page 307 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications where X is a model definition. X will be 3 if the printer is in the native iTherm® 280 emulation. 5 indicates that the printer is in some other emulation. Y and Z are bit fields that designate the options attached to the printer. Bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bits 4-5 Bits 6-7 Page 308 Y Color Support active Undefined Undefined 0 1 0 Z 0 Knife module attached 0 0 1 0 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Serial Port Serial Port Protocol The serial port supports two flow control standards, XON/XOFF and Ready/Busy (sometimes called Data Terminal Ready (DTR) or hardware handshake). When Ready/Busy flow control is selected, the printer can be configured to use DTR, Request to Send (RTS), or both for flow control. If only DTR is selected for flow control, RTS will indicate the cover is open or the printer has faulted. The following discussion assumes the DTR is being used for flow control. The Ready/Busy protocol generally uses the DTR signal to indicate to the host computer that the printer is not ready to accept data. The host should stop sending data to the printer as soon as possible. Because the host may not notice the DTR signal until it has transmitted several bytes of data to the printer, the printer continues to except up to 25521 bytes of data after it indicates that it is not ready. Figure 26 Serial Port Flow Control Using DTR illustrates how the Ready/Busy protocol works, and Figure 27 XON/XOFF Serial Port Flow Control illustrates how the XON/XOFF protocol works. Communications Port Serial Data In Serial Data Out (Not Used for Flow Control) ENQ Data Inquire Response Clear DTR DTR Printer Control Software Set RTS RTS = Request to Send Data Proc. Data Print Data Buffer ENQ Response Buffer Getting Full 40 - 8K Buffer Getting Empty Select Key DTR = Data Terminal Ready Figure 26 Serial Port Flow Control Using DTR 21 The buffer always signals it is full before it overflows. The size of the reserve depends on the buffer size selected. It is always at least 255 bytes. 28-07764 Rev C Page 309 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Communications Port Serial Data In Serial Data Out Data Data Inquire Commands RTS (Not Used for Flow Control) ENQ Proc. Data Print Buffer Data ENQ Response Send XOFF DTR Printer Control Software Buffer Getting Full Send XON Buffer Getting Empty Send Select Key 40 - 8K XON or XOFF RTS = Request to Send DTR = Data Terminal Ready Figure 27 XON/XOFF Serial Port Flow Control Page 310 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Print Buffer Flow Flow Chart 1 illustrates how the communications driver acquires data from the serial port and places it in the buffer using Ready/Busy or XON/XOFF flow control. Wait for data from the host. Place data in the print buffer. Is the buffer full? Yes No Update the buffer pointers. Is the buffer past the high watermark? Yes Clear the DTR signal or transmit XOFF. No Flow Chart 1 Serial Buffer Operation At the top of this flow chart, the driver is waiting for data. When data is received from the host, the printer checks to see if it is an inquire command. If the data is an inquire, it is responded to and placed in the buffer. If not, the data is placed in the buffer without response. The buffer is then checked to see if it is full before the internal pointer is incremented. If it is not full, the pointer is incremented in preparation for the next data byte. The buffer is checked by looking to see if it has passed a high watermark. If the buffer has, the communication driver is notified, and it resets DTR to indicate to the host that no more data should be sent. 28-07764 Rev C Page 311 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Flow Chart 2 illustrates how the print control software takes data from the buffer and controls flow. At the top of the chart, the print control software asks for data. If there is no data in the buffer, a “no data flag” is returned. The print software must then wait for data. If there is data in the buffer, it is read, and the pointers are updated. The buffer is then checked to see how much information is left. If the buffer is below a low watermark (about 100 bytes left), the communication driver is notified, and DTR is reasserted. When XON/XOFF flow control is used, the flow is similar to DTR flow except that DTR is not used and XON/XOFF control characters are transmitted back to the host on the serial link. The XON/XOFF advantage is that only three wires are required to interconnect to a printer. The disadvantage is that a serial-port receiver driver must be written for the host. The print controller needs data to print or a command to decode. Is there any data in the buffer? Loop through idle task, and then look for more data. No Return to print controller with no data available. Yes Acquire data from the buffer. Move buffer pointers to the next data byte. Is the buffer below the low watermark? Yes Set DTR or transmit XON. No Return data to print controller. Flow Chart 2 Print Controller Using Data Page 312 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications When the printer is on, the print controller looks for data. If there is data, it processes it. Flow control is done when the data is taken from the buffer and the amount of data in the buffer is less than a prescribed amount. The low watermark is set based on the expected environment. The iTherm® 280 Printer sets the low watermark at half the buffer size or 1024 characters whichever is smaller. The low watermark gives the host application time to get more data to the printer before the printer uses up what it has. When XON/XOFF protocol is implemented, it is possible for the host to miss an XON or an XOFF. To prevent this from causing a communication lockup, the printer sends an XOFF for every character received after the high watermark is reached. If the printer detects that the serial data link is inactive, it sends out an XON about every two seconds. When the printer cover is opened, an XOFF is sent. An XOFF is sent even when the internal data buffer is past the high watermark and is done to allow the host to know that the printer is not ready. Printer Buffer Size The size of the iTherm® 280 buffer is configurable, which allows an application to control how far ahead of the printer it can get before being asked to wait. The buffer size can be set from 256 to 6144 bytes (not including the 64-character high-speed buffer). The smaller the buffer, the tighter the control will be. It is up to the developer to select the optimal buffer size for an application. Serial Mode Plug and Play Microsoft has defined a Plug and Play (PnP) protocol to identify devices on serial links. The enumeration process is designed to find and automatically configure a device driver for the printer. It is done by toggling the control lines in a specific sequence that is recognized by the printer. The peripheral then responds such that Windows can identify the device. To allow the printer to look for and respond to the sequence, EISA PnP must be enabled. When enabled in serial mode, the flow control is forced to Request to Send (RTS) with Data Terminal Ready (DTR) static. Using DSR Windows uses the host’s Data Set Ready (DSR) line (the printer’s DTR line) on the serial port to determine whether a device is attached to the port. When Windows is booted (or does PnP), the system sets the host’s DTR and RTS to zero and waits approximately 200 milliseconds. It then sets the DTR to one and waits another 200 milliseconds. After 200 milliseconds, the system checks to see whether the DSR line is high. This indicates that a serial device is attached to the serial port. The system responds by setting RTS high and waits to receive the device identification string. In some devices, such as the serial mouse, the DSR line can be held high by tying it directly to the DTR line. When the mouse is connected to the serial port on the personal computer, the power supplied through the DTR line also raises DSR high. For Plug and Play compatibility, RTS flow control is used at the printer, because DSR must stay high as long as the device is attached to the serial port. 28-07764 Rev C Page 313 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Serial Device Identification The serial device must report its identification to the system using an identification string at 1200 baud. The identification string consists of 18 fields that identify the device, class of the device, and other compatible devices. Only five of the fields are required by all serial devices; all others are optional. The identification string used by the iTherm® 280 Printer follows. 028H 0,1 'IPR0210' \PRINTER \M280 PcOS \SC: Serial Configuration: xxH 029H Start of ASCII response PnP Rev Unique ID (IPR plus revision level) Printer Model 19200,N,8,1 Baud, Parity, Bits, Stop Bits Check-sum End PnP Note: The model field may be altered to generate PnP ID’s other than “M280 PcOS” by special order. When the identification is complete, the printer returns to the baud rate specified in the configuration. Page 314 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Serial Port Inquire The serial port inquire is more straightforward than parallel mode. The serial acknowledged (ACK) or not acknowledged (NAK) responses follow a uniform format, the ACK or NAK is always followed by the command ID that requested it. This makes the design of the host application easier because the response can be identified and always follows the same format. The host sends an inquire to the printer asking for the form sensor status. The host receives the response and decodes it. The printer receives the request and preprocesses it. The printer responds with an [ACK] or [NAK] indicating the form sensor status. Flow Chart 3 Inquire Flow The host sends an [ENQ] (form sensor status) request to the printer. The printer responds with an [ACK] indicating that the request was identified, status true. Inquire commands affect the printer’s performance. Communication is a high priority for the printer. Inquire commands take processing time away from the print tasks. It is possible to ask for so much status that the printer slows. In serial mode, it is important that the response to an inquiry is received by the host before another command is issued. When an inquiry is received by the printer, it is buffered in a high-speed processing queue. When the printer has time, it empties the queue and processes the inquiries. The printer responds to the command as soon as the second byte of the command is taken from the high-speed buffer. If the host is looking for a form to be inserted, it should not send status requests as fast as it can. The host will receive a response to all of them. If the host did not wait for a response to each, there would be unnecessary responses. In IEEE 1284 mode, inquire responses are placed in an IEEE 1284 transmit queue. When the IEEE 1284 reverse channel is open, the responses are returned to the host. It is important that after each request the reverse channel be opened. Inquire responses remain in the queue until read. If the [ENQ] <9> command is sent to the printer, the IEEE 1284 buffer will be cleared, and only the response to the [ENQ] <9> will remain. 28-07764 Rev C Page 315 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Display Pass Through The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the printer. The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable. The host sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display. The printer does not provide power to the display. During normal printer operation, no data is passed to the display. In pass through mode, all received data is passed on to the display. The restrictions and considerations for pass through are: 1. Pass through only works on serial printers with DTR flow control. 2. XON/XOFF mode does not work correctly. 3. All inquire ([ENQ]) commands are active when not in actual pass through mode. If, for example, an [ENQ] command for cash drawer status is received by the printer, the response is transmitted. When pass through is active, all data except the [ENQ] is passed. The printer does not look for or act on any commands other than inquires. 4. If pass through data is sent to the printer in continuous mode (i.e. as fast as possible), each [ENQ] character in the sequence delays the transmit data by one byte. The printer buffer size is limited. If the buffer overruns, data will be lost. 5. Modem handshake signals from the printer are not controlled during past through. Their state is set by printer status. Opening the cover toggles the control lines. When the printer cover is open, it accepts data, including all [ENQ] commands. If an [ENQ] # is received when off-line, pass through is entered. 6. Previously buffered data is processed by the printer in pass through mode. Printer performance is degraded by the processing of pass through data. 7. In 8-bit, no parity mode, data is passed through unaltered. In all other modes, the parity is checked, stripped, and then regenerated by the printer. 8. Pass through has no affect on a printer in parallel mode. Remote Power Control The iTherm® 280 Printer has a remote power control command that instructs it to enter OFF. When the command is issued, the printer performs print cartridge maintenance and enters OFF. Unlike pushing the * button, remote power mode leaves the communications active. All commands except the exit power down command are ignored. [ESC] y Remote Power Control ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Where n [ESC] y 1BH 79H <27> <121> &%YX17 or &%YX18 [ESC] y 17 Requests the printer to enter remote OFF 18 Requests the printer to exit remote OFF Page 316 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Description Note: Note: Inquiry (ENQ) commands are accepted and answered in remote power down mode. The printer reactivates if the * button is pressed or a power up command is received. If power is lost after the power down command is issued, the printer remembers it is in power down mode but does not reactivate the communications link. The * button must be pushed to return the printer to full operation. This command is not available in STAR mode. Remote Printer Reset Reset in Serial Mode It is possible to generate a software printer reset in serial mode. The [ENQ] <10> command requests that the printer reset. (This is not a hardware reset). The reset completely initializes the hardware and software, but the printer does not recover from a loss of software control. Note: If the printer mode was changed by the [ESC] y <2> or <3> command, a soft reset will not return to the power on default. The command flow is as follows: • • • • • The [ENQ] <10> is acknowledged. During cleanup and initialization, the printer is placed off-line. Before the printer initializes, it tries to clean up its input buffer and other internal processes. The printer’s software is reinitialized. The power-cycled flag is set. The print head is homed and re-calibrated. The printer goes back on-line. Reset in Parallel Mode In parallel mode, driving the INIT signal on the parallel port for 100 milliseconds generates a software reset. It takes about two seconds for the printer to recover from a reset. The [ENQ] <10> command has the same effect, but it is not acknowledged. 28-07764 Rev C Page 317 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Miscellaneous Communication Features Power-cycle Recovery Sometimes the host needs to know if the printer was power cycled. An example would be after the receipt tape was changed. It is not necessary to turn off the printer to change the receipt. However, if the operator does, any information sent to the printer before the power cycle will be lost. The iTherm® 280 Printer has a flag that is set after a reset. The flag stays set until the host requests a reset. The [ENQ] <11> command reads the flag. If the command returns power-cycled status, the power has been reset or power cycled since the last request. All unprinted information has been lost. If the print operation is critical, it is a good idea to check the power-cycle flag before and after all transactions. An alternate approach is to check the flag after every off-line to on-line transition. Note: If the printer mode was changed by the [ESC] y <2> or <3> command, a powercycle reset will return to the initial configuration. Data Pass-through The iTherm® 280 Printer supports data pass-through (sometimes referred to as display pass-through). Data pass-through is activated by the print-suppress command with the pass-through bit set. In pass-through mode, the printer can be requested to transmit any data that it receives. When this is the case, the printer’s inquire commands are active but of little use. Typically, the printer’s transmit data is connected to the next device in line. Inquire commands have no data path back to the host. If pass-through is to be used, it is a good idea to deactivate the inquire commands. (Use [ESC] y <6>). Before pass-through data can be used, it must be activated in the configuration menu, which is the third selection in the print-suppress/pass option. All data after, but not including, the print-suppress command is pass through. When deactivated, the print-suppress command is again not pass through. During pass through the multi-drop commands are active (if configured). The printer will act upon a multi-drop control command found in the pass-through data. If the printer is deselected during pass-through, it stops passing on the data. When the printer is re-addressed, data pass-through is active. Multi-drop Configuration The iTherm® 280 Printer supports a multi-drop configuration where up to three printers can be connected in parallel. Each printer has a different address A, B, or C. The printer does not accept any print information unless it is addressed. Multi-drop configuration is only available in serial mode, as parallel printers cannot be connected together. Page 318 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Off-line Active A configuration flag that prevents the printer from going off-line (in most cases) is available. Off-line mode allows the application to query the printer for status rather than assume a status from the control signals. The feature allows the host application to query the printer at all times except when there is no power; a full input buffer; or a hard failure. For example, when the printer’s cover is open, the printer stops printing but still accepts data and inquiries. The inquire cover status command returns, “Cover open.” Hard failures result when there is no power or a printer fault occurs. If the printer is offline, either the input buffer is full or a hard fault has occurred. The host application should not allow the input buffer to fill. 28-07764 Rev C Page 319 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Recovery from Mechanical Errors The Ithaca Inquire commands and the Epson [DLE][ENQ] and [DLE][EOT] commands allow most printer error status to be read and in some cases recovery attempted. Paper jams and auto-cutter faults can be recovered, however, any data not previously printed will be lost. If the application is to support error recovery, the application should use the appropriate status request commands to query the printer periodically. If an error response is such that the fault is recoverable, the host application should interact with the operator and request that the fault be corrected. (IE. Clear Paper Jam) When the operator indicates that the problem has been corrected, the host can issue a reset request. If a serious error occurs, the printer will halt and enter fault error mode. If the fault is such that the printer can maintain communications with the host, the print status request and response system will remain active. The status of the system will however remain static, i.e. the status responses will reflect the state of the system when the fault occurred. There are errors that cannot be reported to the host system. These errors are such that the integrity of the printer do not allow continued operation. That is there is no way to report the error. These errors occur (for the most part) during power up diagnostics. They are as follows: EEPROM READ ERROR Power up only The Internal EEPROM is not readable or the check sum is bad. Pressing the Power Button will attempt to rewrite the configuration information. This may leave the printer configured incorrectly. EEPROM WRITE ERROR Power up/down and Configuration only The Internal EEPROM is defective. There is no recovery. SOFTWARE ERROR VECTOR Can occur at any time. These errors can occur during operation. They signal a serious problem with the system. In most cases this error will also generate a Watch Dog reset. A power cycle will generally recover normal printer operation. An ESD event or a firmware bug generally causes these errors. The printer maintains an error log, this log contains additional information about the fault and is printed during manual configuration. The information in this log should be reported to Transact to identify the exact cause of the fault. USERSTORE FORMAT ERROR Power up or User Store Write Operations The User Store data in FLASH has an invalid format. Pressing the Power Button will erase the user store and reformat it. This can be caused by a firmware update. FLASH WRITE ERROR Power up or User Store Write Operation. The Program Flash has failed. There is no recovery from this error. COM ADAPTER ERROR Power up only The communications interface card is not supported by the firmware or is missing. There is no recovery. Page 320 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Communications Programmer’s Notes When the serial port is used, it is important that the output lines from the printer not be shorted or back driven. If the signals are not to be used, they should be left open. Pins 3, 4, and 7 (of the 9 pin connector) are outputs from the printer. If any one of these signals is grounded or back driven, the other two outputs will be degraded. The best time to configure the printer by the host with remote configuration is during system setup or software update. 28-07764 Rev C Page 321 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix Appendix A: Internal Code Pages Code Page Country Code/Language Set 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 437 737 850 852 855 857 858 866 1004 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1257 28591 28592 28593 28594 28595 28597 28599 28605 USA (Slashed 0) USA (Unslashed 0) British German French Swedish I Danish Norwegian Dutch Italian French Canadian Spanish Swedish II Swedish III Swedish IV Turkish Swiss I Swiss II USA Greek Multilingual East Europe Latin II-852 Cyrillic I-855 Turkey 857 Multilingual Euro Cyrillic II-866 IS08859 Windows 1250 Central Europe Windows 1251 Cyrillic Windows 1252 Latin 1 Windows 1253 Greek Windows 1254 Turkish Windows 1257 Baltic ISO8859-1 Latin 1 ISO8859-2 Latin 2 ISO8859-3 Latin 3 ISO8859-4 Baltic 4 ISO8859-5 Cyrillic ISO8859-7 Greek ISO8859-9 Turkish ISO8859-15 Latin 9 Decimal 0,64 0,65 0,66 0,67 0,68 0,69 0,70 0,71 0,72 0,73 0,74 0,75 0,76 0,77 0,78 0,79 0,80 0,81 1,181 2,225 3,82 3,84 3,87 3,89 3,90 3,98 3,236 4,226 4,227 4,228 4,229 4,230 4,233 111,175 111,176 111,177 111,178 111,179 111,181 111,183 111,189 Hex 0H,040H 0H,041H 0H,042H 0H,043H 0H,044H 0H,045H 0H,046H 0H,047H 0H,048H 0H,049H 0H,04AH 0H,04BH 0H,04CH 0H,04DH 0H,04EH 0H,04FH 0H,050H 0H,051H 1H,0B5H 2H,0E1H 3H,052H 3H,054H 3H,057H 3H,059H 3H,05AH 3H,062H 3H,0ECH 4H,0E2H 4H,0E3H 4H,0E4H 4H,0E5H 4H,0E6H 4H,0E9H 6FH,AFH 6FH,B0H 6FH,B1H 6FH,B2H 6FH,B3H 6FH,B5H 6FH,B7H 6FH,BDH Note: The [ESC]! Select international character set command uses Code Pages 64-81 and represent old DOS code page maps. They are provided to support of legacy applications. They are not recommended for new applications. 28-07764 Rev C Page 323 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix Appendix B - ASCII Code Table Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII 32 (SP) 40 64 @ 60 96 ` 00 0 NULL 20 01 1 SOH 21 33 ! 41 65 A 61 97 a 34 " 42 66 B 62 98 b # 43 67 C 63 99 c 02 2 STX 22 03 3 ETX 23 35 04 4 EOT 24 36 $ 44 68 D 64 100 d 37 % 45 69 E 65 101 e & 46 70 F 66 102 f 05 5 ENQ 25 06 6 ACK 26 38 07 7 BEL 27 39 ' 47 71 G 67 103 g 40 ( 48 72 H 68 104 h ) 49 73 I 69 105 i 08 8 BS 28 09 9 HT 29 41 0A 10 LF 2A 42 * 4A 74 J 6A 106 j 43 + 4B 75 K 6B 107 k 44 , 4C 76 L 6C 108 l 0B 11 VT 2B 0C 12 FF 2C 0D 13 CR 2D 45 - 4D 77 M 6D 109 m 46 . 4E 78 N 6E 110 n O 6F 111 o 0E 14 SO 2E 0F 15 SI 2F 47 / 4F 79 10 16 DLE 30 48 0 50 80 P 70 112 p 49 1 51 81 Q 71 113 q 11 17 DC1 31 12 18 DC2 32 50 2 52 82 R 72 114 r 13 19 DC3 33 51 3 53 83 S 73 115 s 52 4 54 84 T 74 116 t 14 20 DC4 34 15 21 NAK 35 53 5 55 85 U 75 117 u 54 6 56 86 V 76 118 v 16 22 SYN 36 17 23 ETB 37 55 7 57 87 W 77 119 w 18 24 CAN 38 56 8 58 88 X 78 120 x 57 9 59 89 Y 79 121 y : 5A 90 Z 7A 122 z 19 25 EM 39 1A 26 SUB 3A 58 1B 27 ESC 3B 59 ; 5B 91 [ 7B 123 { 60 < 5C 92 \ 7C 124 | 93 ] 7D 125 } 1C 28 FS 3C 1D 29 GS 3D 61 = 5D 1E 30 RS 3E 62 > 5E 94 ^ 7E 126 ~ US 3F 63 ? 5F 95 _ 7F 127 (sp) 1F 31 Page 324 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix Appendix C: Unicode Character Addresses Note: This information is based on the Unicode 3.0 Standard. For specific character locations see the Unicode standard. Note: The Accutherm Supterme does not contain all possible Unicode characters. The default character sets are defined by the WGL4 and GB18030 standards. Unicode Range 0x0000 0x0000 0x0020 0x0080 0x00A0 0x0100 0x0180 0x0250 0x02B0 0x0300 0x0370 0x0400 0x0500 0x0530 0x0590 0x0600 0x0700 0x0900 0x0980 0x0A00 0x0A80 0x0B00 0x0B80 0x0C00 0x0C80 0x0D00 0x0D80 0x0D80 0x0E00 0x0E80 0x0F00 0x0F00 0x0F80 0x1000 0x1060 0x10A0 0x1100 0x1100 0x1200 0x13A0 0x1400 0x16A0 0x1E00 0x1F00 0x2000 28-07764 0x007F 0x001F 0x007F 0x00FF 0x00FF 0x017F 0x024F 0x02AF 0x02FF 0x036F 0x03FF 0x04FF 0x052F 0x058F 0x05FF 0x06FF 0x08FF 0x097F 0x09FF 0x0A7F 0x0AFF 0x0B7F 0x0BFF 0x0C7F 0x0CFF 0x0D7F 0x0DFF 0x0DFF 0x0E7F 0x0EFF 0x0F7F 0x0FBF 0x0FFF 0x105F 0x109F 0x10FF 0x11FF 0x11F9 0x137F 0x13FF 0x167F 0x1DFF 0x1EFF 0x1FFF 0x206F Use C0 Controls and Basic Latin C0 controls ASCII C1 Controls and Latin-1 Supplement Latin1 Latin Extended-A Latin Extended-B IPA Extensions Spacing Modifier Letters Combining Diacritical Marks Greek Cyrillic Unassigned zone 0500-052F Armenian Hebrew Arabic Unassigned 0700-08FF Devanagari. Based on ISCII 1988 Bengali. Based on ISCII 1988 Gurmukhi. Based on ISCII 1988 Gujarati. Based on ISCII 1988 Oriya. Based on ISCII 1988 Tamil. Based on ISCII 1988 Telugu. Based on ISCII 1988 Kannada. Based on ISCII 1988 Malayalam. Based on ISCII 1988 Unassigned zone 0D80-0DFF Sinhala (Pre-Unicode 2.0) Thai. Based on TIS 620-2529 Lao. Based on TIS 620-2529 Burmese (Pre-Unicode 2.0) Tibetan Khmer (Pre-Unicode 2.0) Tibetan (Pre-Unicode 2.0) Mongolian (Pre-Unicode 2.0) Georgian Hangul Jamo Korean combining alphabet Ethiopian (Post-Unicode 2.0) Cherokee (Post-Unicode 2.0) Canadian Syllabics (Post-Unicode 2.0) Unassigned zone 16A0-1DFF Latin Extended Additional Greek Extended General Punctuation Rev C Page 325 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix 0x2070 0x20A0 0x20D0 0x2100 0x2150 0x2190 0x2200 0x2300 0x2400 0x2440 0x2460 0x2500 0x2580 0x25A0 0x2600 0x2700 0x27C0 0x2800 0x2900 0x3000 0x3040 0x30A0 0x3100 0x3130 0x3190 0x31A0 0x3200 0x3300 0x3400 0x209F 0x20CF 0x20FF 0x214F 0x218F 0x21FF 0x22FF 0x23FF 0x243F 0x245F 0x24FF 0x257F 0x259F 0x25FF 0x26FF 0x27BF 0x27FF 0x28FF 0x2FFF 0x303F 0x309F 0x30FF 0x312F 0x318F 0x319F 0x31FF 0x32FF 0x33FF 0x4DFF 0x4E00 0x9FA6 0xAC00 0xD7A4 0xD800 0xDB80 0xDC00 0xE000 0xF900 0xFB00 0xFB50 0xFE20 0xFE30 0xFE50 0xFE70 0xFEFF 0xFF00 0xFFF0 0xFFF0 0xFFFE 0x9FA5 0xABFF 0xD7A3 0xD7FF 0xDB7F 0xDBFF 0xDFFF 0xF8FF 0xFAFF 0xFB4F 0xFDFF 0xFE2F 0xFE4F 0xFE6F 0xFEFF 0xFEFF 0xFFEF 0xFFFF 0xFFFD 0xFFFF Page 326 Superscripts and Subscripts Currency Symbols Combining Diacritical Marks for Symbols Letter like Symbols Number Forms Arrows Mathematical Operators Miscellaneous Technical Control Pictures Optical Character Recognition Enclosed Alphanumerics Box Drawing Block Elements Geometric Shapes Miscellaneous Symbols Dingbats Unassigned zone 27C0-27FF Braille Pattern Symbols (Post-Unicode 2.0) Unassigned zone 2900-2FFF CJK Symbols and Punctuation Hiragana Katakana Bopomofo Hangul Compatibility Jamo. Based on KSC 5601 Kanbun Unassigned zone 31A0-31FF Enclosed CJK Letters and Months CJK Compatibility CJK Unified Ideograph Extension A (PostUnicode 2.0) CJK Unified Ideographs Unassigned zone 9FA6-ABFF Hangul Syllables Unassigned zone D7A4-D7FF High Surrogates Private Use High Surrogates Low Surrogates Private Use Area CJK Compatibility Ideographs Alphabetic Presentation Forms Arabic Presentation Forms-A Combining Half Marks CJK Compatibility Forms Small Form Variants Arabic Presentation Forms-B Special Half width and Full width Forms Specials Specials Not character codes Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix Appendix D: WGL4.0 Character Addresses There are 654 Characters in this set. Unicode 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 002a 002b 002c 002d 002e 002f 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 003a 003b 003c 003d 003e 003f 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 004a 004b 004c 004d 004e 004f 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005a 005b 005c 005d 005e 005f 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 006a 006b 006c 006d 006e 006f Character space exclamation mark quotation mark number sign dollar sign percent sign ampersand apostrophe left parenthesis right parenthesis asterisk plus sign comma hyphen-minus period slash digit zero digit one digit two digit three digit four digit five digit six digit seven digit eight digit nine colon semicolon less-than sign equals sign greater-than sign question mark commercial at Latin capital letter a Latin capital letter b Latin capital letter c Latin capital letter d Latin capital letter e Latin capital letter f Latin capital letter g Latin capital letter h Latin capital letter i Latin capital letter j Latin capital letter k Latin capital letter l Latin capital letter m Latin capital letter n Latin capital letter o Latin capital letter p Latin capital letter q Latin capital letter r Latin capital letter s Latin capital letter t Latin capital letter u Latin capital letter v Latin capital letter w Latin capital letter x Latin capital letter y Latin capital letter z left square bracket backslash right square bracket circumflex accent underline grave accent Latin small letter a Latin small letter b Latin small letter c Latin small letter d Latin small letter e Latin small letter f Latin small letter g Latin small letter h Latin small letter i Latin small letter j Latin small letter k Latin small letter l Latin small letter m Latin small letter n Latin small letter o 28-07764 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 007a 007b 007c 007d 007e 00a0 00a1 00a2 00a3 00a4 00a5 00a6 00a7 00a8 00a9 00aa 00ab 00ac 00ad 00ae 00af 00b0 00b1 00b2 00b3 00b4 00b5 00b6 00b7 00b8 00b9 00ba 00bb 00bc 00bd 00be 00bf 00c0 00c1 00c2 00c3 00c4 00c5 00c6 00c7 00c8 00c9 00ca 00cb 00cc 00cd 00ce 00cf 00d0 00d1 00d2 00d3 00d4 00d5 00d6 00d7 00d8 00d9 00da 00db 00dc 00dd 00de 00df 00e0 00e1 Rev C Latin small letter p Latin small letter q Latin small letter r Latin small letter s Latin small letter t Latin small letter u Latin small letter v Latin small letter w Latin small letter x Latin small letter y Latin small letter z left curly bracket vertical line right curly bracket tilde no-break space inverted exclamation mark cent sign pound sign currency sign yen sign broken bar section sign diaeresis copyright sign feminine ordinal indicator left guillemet not sign soft hyphen registered trade mark sign macron, overline degree sign plus-minus sign superscript two superscript three acute accent micro sign paragraph sign middle dot, kana conjoctive cedilla superscript one masculine ordinal indicator right guillemet vulgar fraction one quarter vulgar fraction one half vulgar fraction three quarters inverted question mark Latin capital letter a with grave accent Latin capital letter a with acute accent Latin capital letter a with circumflex accent Latin capital letter a with tilde Latin capital letter a with diaeresis Latin capital letter a with ring above Latin capital letter a with e Latin capital letter c with cedilla Latin capital letter e with grave accent Latin capital letter e with acute accent Latin capital letter e with circumflex accent Latin capital letter e with diaeresis Latin capital letter i with grave accent Latin capital letter i with acute accent Latin capital letter i with circumflex accent Latin capital letter i with diaeresis Latin capital letter eth Latin capital letter n with tilde Latin capital letter o with grave accent Latin capital letter o with acute accent Latin capital letter o with circumflex accent Latin capital letter o with tilde Latin capital letter o with diaeresis multiplication sign Latin capital letter o with oblique stroke Latin capital letter u with grave accent Latin capital letter u with acute accent Latin capital letter u with circumflex accent Latin capital letter u with diaeresis Latin capital letter y with acute accent Latin capital letter thorn Latin small letter sharp s Latin small letter a with grave accent Latin small letter a with acute accent Page 327 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix 00e2 00e3 00e4 00e5 00e6 00e7 00e8 00e9 00ea 00eb 00ec 00ed 00ee 00ef 00f0 00f1 00f2 00f3 00f4 00f5 00f6 00f7 00f8 00f9 00fa 00fb 00fc 00fd 00fe 00ff 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 010a 010b 010c 010d 010e 010f 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 011a 011b 011c 011d 011e 011f 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 012a 012b 012c 012d 012e 012f 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 0135 0136 0137 0138 Latin small letter a with circumflex accent Latin small letter a with tilde Latin small letter a with diaeresis Latin small letter a with ring above Latin small letter a with e Latin small letter c with cedilla Latin small letter e with grave accent Latin small letter e with acute accent Latin small letter e with circumflex accent Latin small letter e with diaeresis Latin small letter i with grave accent Latin small letter i with acute accent Latin small letter i with circumflex accent Latin small letter i with diaeresis Latin small letter eth Latin small letter n with tilde Latin small letter o with grave accent Latin small letter o with acute accent Latin small letter o with circumflex accent Latin small letter o with tilde Latin small letter o with diaeresis division sign Latin small letter o with oblique stroke Latin small letter u with grave accent Latin small letter u with acute accent Latin small letter u with circumflex accent Latin small letter u with diaeresis Latin small letter y with acute accent Latin small letter thorn Latin small letter y with diaeresis Latin capital letter a with macron Latin small letter a with macron Latin capital letter a with breve Latin small letter a with breve Latin capital letter a with ogonek Latin small letter a with ogonek Latin capital letter c with acute accent Latin small letter c with acute accent Latin capital letter c with circumflex Latin small letter c with circumflex Latin capital letter c with dot above Latin small letter c with dot above Latin capital letter c with caron Latin small letter c with caron Latin capital letter d with hacek Latin small letter d with hacek Latin capital letter d with stroke Latin small letter d with stroke Latin capital letter e with macron Latin small letter e with macron Latin capital letter e with breve Latin small letter e with breve Latin capital letter e with dot above Latin small letter e with dot above Latin capital letter e with ogenek Latin small letter e with ogenek Latin capital letter e with hacek Latin small letter e with hacek Latin capital letter g with circumflex Latin small letter g with circumflex Latin capital letter g with breve Latin small letter g with breve Latin capital letter g with dot above Latin small letter g with dot above Latin capital letter g with cedilla Latin small letter g with cedilla Latin capital letter h with circumflex Latin small letter h with circumflex Latin capital letter h with stroke Latin small letter h with stroke Latin capital letter i with tilde Latin small letter i with tilde Latin capital letter i with macron Latin small letter i with macron Latin capital letter i with breve Latin small letter i with breve Latin capital letter i with ogonek Latin small letter i with ogonek Latin capital letter i with dot above Latin small letter i without dot above Latin capital ligature ij Latin small ligature ij Latin capital letter j with circumflex Latin small letter j with circumflex Latin capital letter k with cedilla Latin small letter k with cedilla Latin small letter kra Page 328 0139 013a 013b 013c 013d 013e 013f 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 014a 014b 014c 014d 014e 014f 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 015a 015b 015c 015d 015e 015f 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 016a 016b 016c 016d 016e 016f 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 017a 017b 017c 017d 017e 017f 0192 01fa 01fb 01fc 01fd 01fe 01ff 02c6 02c7 02c9 02d8 02d9 02da 02db 02dc 02dd Rev C Latin capital letter l with acute accent Latin small letter l with acute accent Latin capital letter l with cedilla Latin small letter l with cedilla Latin capital letter l with hacek Latin small letter l with hacek Latin capital letter l with middle dot Latin small letter l with middle dot Latin capital letter l with stroke Latin small letter l with stroke Latin capital letter n with acute accent Latin small letter n with acute accent Latin capital letter n with cedilla Latin small letter n with cedilla Latin capital letter n with hacek Latin small letter n with hacek Latin small letter n preceded by apostrophe Latin capital letter eng Latin small letter eng Latin capital letter o with macron Latin small letter o with macron Latin capital letter o with breve Latin small letter o with breve Latin capital letter o with double acute accent Latin small letter o with double acute accent Latin capital ligature o with e Latin small ligature o with e Latin capital letter r with acute accent Latin small letter r with acute accent Latin capital letter r with cedilla Latin small letter r with cedilla Latin capital letter r with hacek Latin small letter r with hacek Latin capital letter s with acute accent Latin small letter s with acute accent Latin capital letter s with circumflex Latin small letter s with circumflex Latin capital letter s with cedilla Latin small letter s with cedilla Latin capital letter s with hacek Latin small letter s with hacek Latin capital letter t with cedilla Latin small letter t with cedilla Latin capital letter t with hacek Latin small letter t with hacek Latin capital letter t with stroke Latin small letter t with stroke Latin capital letter u with tilde Latin small letter u with tilde Latin capital letter u with macron Latin small letter u with macron Latin capital letter u with breve Latin small letter u with breve Latin capital letter u with ring above Latin small letter u with ring above Latin capital letter u with double acute accent Latin small letter u with double acute accent Latin capital letter u with ogonek Latin small letter u with ogonek Latin capital letter w with circumflex Latin cmall letter w with circumflex Latin capital letter y with circumflex Latin small letter y with circumflex Latin capital letter y with diaeresis Latin capital letter z with acute accent Latin small letter z with acute accent Latin capital letter z with dot above Latin small letter z with dot above Latin capital letter z with hacek Latin small letter z with hacek Latin small letter long s Latin small letter script f,florin sign Latin capital letter a with ring above and acute Latin small letter a with ring above and acute Latin capital ligature ae with acute Latin small ligature ae with acute Latin capital letter o with stroke and acute Latin small letter o with stroke and acute nonspacing circumflex accent modifier letter hacek modifier letter macron breve dot above ring above ogonek nonspacing tilde modifier letter double prime 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide 0384 0385 0386 0387 0388 0389 038a 038c 038e 038f 0390 0391 0392 0393 0394 0395 0396 0397 0398 0399 039a 039b 039c 039d 039e 039f 03a0 03a1 03a3 03a4 03a5 03a6 03a7 03a8 03a9 03aa 03ab 03ac 03ad 03ae 03af 03b0 03b1 03b2 03b3 03b4 03b5 03b6 03b7 03b8 03b9 03ba 03bb 03bc 03bd 03be 03bf 03c0 03c1 03c2 03c3 03c4 03c5 03c6 03c7 03c8 03c9 03ca 03cb 03cc 03cd 03ce 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 040a 040b 040c 040e 040f 0410 Appendix Greek tonos Greek dialytika tonos Greek capital letter alpha with tonos Greek ano teleia Greek capital letter epsilon with tonos Greek capital letter eta with tonos Greek capital letter iota with tonos Greek capital letter omicron with tonos Greek capital letter upsilon with tonos Greek capital letter omega with tonos Greek small letter iota with dialytika and tonos Greek capital letter alpha Greek capital letter beta Greek capital letter gamma Greek capital letter delta Greek capital letter epsilon Greek capital letter zeta Greek capital letter eta Greek capital letter theta Greek capital letter iota Greek capital letter kappa Greek capital letter lamda Greek capital letter mu Greek capital letter nu Greek capital letter xi Greek capital letter omicron Greek capital letter pi Greek capital letter rho Greek capital letter sigma Greek capital letter tau Greek capital letter upsilon Greek capital letter phi Greek capital letter chi Greek capital letter psi Greek capital letter omega Greek capital letter iota with dialytika Greek capital letter upsilon with dialytika Greek small letter alpha with tonos Greek small letter epsilon with tonos Greek small letter eta with tonos Greek small letter iota with tonos Greek small letter upsilon with dialytika and tonos Greek small letter alpha Greek small letter beta Greek small letter gamma Greek small letter delta Greek small letter epsilon Greek small letter zeta Greek small letter eta Greek small letter theta Greek small letter iota Greek small letter kappa Greek small letter lamda Greek small letter mu Greek small letter nu Greek small letter xi Greek small letter omicron Greek small letter pi Greek small letter rho Greek small letter final sigma Greek small letter sigma Greek small letter tau Greek small letter upsilon Greek small letter phi Greek small letter chi Greek small letter psi Greek small letter omega Greek small letter iota with dialytika Greek small letter upsilon with dialytika Greek small letter omicron with tonos Greek small letter upsilon with tonos Greek small letter omega with tonos Cyrillic capital letter io Cyrillic capital letter dje Cyrillic capital letter gje Cyrillic capital letter ukrainian ie Cyrillic capital letter dze Cyrillic capital letter byelorussian-ukrainian i Cyrillic capital letter yi Cyrillic capital letter je Cyrillic capital letter lje Cyrillic capital letter nje Cyrillic capital letter tshe Cyrillic capital letter kje Cyrillic capital letter short u Cyrillic capital letter dzhe Cyrillic capital letter a 28-07764 0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 041a 041b 041c 041d 041e 041f 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 0425 0426 0427 0428 0429 042a 042b 042c 042d 042e 042f 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 0435 0436 0437 0438 0439 043a 043b 043c 043d 043e 043f 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 0445 0446 0447 0448 0449 044a 044b 044c 044d 044e 044f 0451 0452 0453 0454 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 045a 045b 045c 045e 045f 0490 0491 1e80 1e81 1e82 1e83 1e84 1e85 1ef2 1ef3 Rev C Cyrillic capital letter be Cyrillic capital letter ve Cyrillic capital letter ghe Cyrillic capital letter de Cyrillic capital letter ie Cyrillic capital letter zhe Cyrillic capital letter ze Cyrillic capital letter i Cyrillic capital letter short i Cyrillic capital letter ka Cyrillic capital letter el Cyrillic capital letter em Cyrillic capital letter en Cyrillic capital letter o Cyrillic capital letter pe Cyrillic capital letter er Cyrillic capital letter es Cyrillic capital letter te Cyrillic capital letter u Cyrillic capital letter ef Cyrillic capital letter ha Cyrillic capital letter tse Cyrillic capital letter che Cyrillic capital letter sha Cyrillic capital letter shcha Cyrillic capital letter hard sign Cyrillic capital letter yeru Cyrillic capital letter soft sign Cyrillic capital letter e Cyrillic capital letter yu Cyrillic capital letter ya Cyrillic small letter a Cyrillic small letter be Cyrillic small letter ve Cyrillic small letter ghe Cyrillic small letter de Cyrillic small letter ie Cyrillic small letter zhe Cyrillic small letter ze Cyrillic small letter i Cyrillic small letter short i Cyrillic small letter ka Cyrillic small letter el Cyrillic small letter em Cyrillic small letter en Cyrillic small letter o Cyrillic small letter pe Cyrillic small letter er Cyrillic small letter es Cyrillic small letter te Cyrillic small letter u Cyrillic small letter ef Cyrillic small letter ha Cyrillic small letter tse Cyrillic small letter che Cyrillic small letter sha Cyrillic small letter shcha Cyrillic small letter hard sign Cyrillic small letter yeru Cyrillic small letter soft sign Cyrillic small letter e Cyrillic small letter yu Cyrillic small letter ya Cyrillic small letter io Cyrillic small letter dje Cyrillic small letter gje Cyrillic small letter ukrainian ie Cyrillic small letter dze Cyrillic small letter byelorussian-ukrainian i Cyrillic small letter yi Cyrillic small letter je Cyrillic small letter lje Cyrillic small letter nje Cyrillic small letter tshe Cyrillic small letter kje Cyrillic small letter short u Cyrillic small letter dzhe Cyrillic capital letter ghe with upturn Cyrillic small letter ghe with upturn Latin capital letter w with grave Latin small letter w with grave Latin capital letter w with acute Latin small letter w with acute Latin capital letter w with diaeresis Latin small letter w with diaeresis Latin capital letter y with grave Latin small letter y with grave Page 329 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix 2013 2014 2015 2017 2018 2019 201a 201b 201c 201d 201e 2020 2021 2022 2026 2030 2032 2033 2039 203a 203c 203e 2044 207f 20a3 20a4 20a7 20ac 2105 2113 2116 2122 2126 212e 215b 215c 215d 215e 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 21a8 2202 2206 220f 2211 2212 2215 2219 221a 221e 221f 2229 222b 2248 2260 2261 2264 2265 2302 2310 2320 2321 2500 2502 250c 2510 2514 2518 251c en dash em dash horizontal bar double low line left single quotation mark right single quotation mark single low-9 quotation mark single high-reversed-9 quotation mark left double quotation mark right double quotation mark double low-9 quotation mark dagger double dagger bullet horizontal ellipsis per mille sign prime double prime single left-pointing angle quotation mark single right-pointing angle quotation mark double exclamation mark overline fraction slash superscript Latin small letter n french franc sign lira sign peseta sign euro currency symbol care of script small l numero sign trademark sign ohm sign estimated symbol vulgar fraction one eighth vulgar fraction three eighths vulgar fraction five eighths vulgar fraction seven eighths leftwards arrow upwards arrow rightwards arrow downwards arrow left right arrow up down arrow up down arrow with base partial differential increment n-ary product n-ary summation minus sign division slash bullet operator square root infinity right angle intersection integral almost equal to not equal to identical to less-than or equal to greater-than or equal to house reversed not sign top half integral bottom half integral box drawings light horizontal box drawings light vertical box drawings light down and right box drawings light down and left box drawings light up and right box drawings light up and left box drawings light vertical and right 2524 252c 2534 253c 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 255a 255b 255c 255d 255e 255f 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 256a 256b 256c 2580 2584 2588 258c 2590 2591 2592 2593 25a0 25a1 25aa 25ab 25ac 25b2 25ba 25bc 25c4 25ca 25cb 25cf 25d8 25d9 25e6 263a 263b 263c 2640 2642 2660 2663 2665 2666 266a 266b f001 f002 fb01 fb02 box drawings light vertical and left box drawings light down and horizontal box drawings light up and horizontal box drawings light vertical and horizontal box drawings double horizontal box drawings double vertical box drawings down single and right double box drawings down double and right single box drawings double down and right box drawings down single and left double box drawings down double and left single box drawings double down and left box drawings up single and right double box drawings up double and right single box drawings double up and right box drawings up single and left double box drawings up double and left single box drawings double up and left box drawings vertical single and right double box drawings vertical double and right single box drawings double vertical and right box drawings vertical single and left double box drawings vertical double and left single box drawings double vertical and left box drawings down single and horizontal double box drawings down double and horizontal single box drawings double down and horizontal box drawings up single and horizontal double box drawings up double and horizontal single box drawings double up and horizontal box drawings vertical single and horizontal double box drawings vertical double and horizontal single box drawings double vertical and horizontal upper half block lower half block full block left half block right half block light shade medium shade dark shade black square white square black small square white small square black rectangle black up-pointing triangle black right-pointing pointer black down-pointing triangle black left-pointing pointer lozenge white circle black circle inverse bullet inverse white circle white bullet white smiling face black smiling face white sun with rays female sign male sign black spade suit black club suit black heart suit black diamond suit eighth note Beamed eighth notes fi ligature fl ligature Fi ligature Fl ligature Note: This information is based on the Microsoft's Typography web page Page 330 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix Appendix E: GB18030 Character Addresses There are 28575 Characters in this set. UNICODE 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 002A 002B 002C 002D 002E 002F 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 003A 003B 003C 003D 003E 003F 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 004A 004B 004C 004D 004E 004F 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 005C 005D 005E 005F 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 006A 006B 006C 006D 006E 006F CHARACTER SPACE EXCLAMATION MARK QUOTATION MARK NUMBER SIGN DOLLAR SIGN PERCENT SIGN AMPERSAND APOSTROPHE LEFT PARENTHESIS RIGHT PARENTHESIS ASTERISK PLUS SIGN COMMA HYPHEN-MINUS FULL STOP SOLIDUS DIGIT ZERO DIGIT ONE DIGIT TWO DIGIT THREE DIGIT FOUR DIGIT FIVE DIGIT SIX DIGIT SEVEN DIGIT EIGHT DIGIT NINE COLON SEMICOLON LESS-THAN SIGN EQUALS SIGN GREATER-THAN SIGN QUESTION MARK COMMERCIAL AT LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z LEFT SQUARE BRACKET REVERSE SOLIDUS RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT LOW LINE GRAVE ACCENT LATIN SMALL LETTER A LATIN SMALL LETTER B LATIN SMALL LETTER C LATIN SMALL LETTER D LATIN SMALL LETTER E LATIN SMALL LETTER F LATIN SMALL LETTER G LATIN SMALL LETTER H LATIN SMALL LETTER I LATIN SMALL LETTER J LATIN SMALL LETTER K LATIN SMALL LETTER L LATIN SMALL LETTER M LATIN SMALL LETTER N LATIN SMALL LETTER O 28-07764 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 007C 007D 007E 007F 00A4 00A7 00A8 00B0 00B1 00B7 00D7 00E0 00E1 00E8 00E9 00EA 00EC 00ED 00F2 00F3 00F7 00F9 00FA 00FC 0101 0113 011B 012B 0144 0148 014D 016B 01CE 01D0 01D2 01D4 01D6 01D8 01DA 01DC 0251 0261 02C7 02C9 02CA 02CB 02D9 0391 0392 0393 0394 0395 0396 0397 0398 0399 039A 039B 039C 039D 039E 039F Rev C LATIN SMALL LETTER P LATIN SMALL LETTER Q LATIN SMALL LETTER R LATIN SMALL LETTER S LATIN SMALL LETTER T LATIN SMALL LETTER U LATIN SMALL LETTER V LATIN SMALL LETTER W LATIN SMALL LETTER X LATIN SMALL LETTER Y LATIN SMALL LETTER Z LEFT CURLY BRACKET VERTICAL LINE RIGHT CURLY BRACKET TILDE CURRENCY SIGN SECTION SIGN DIAERESIS DEGREE SIGN PLUS-MINUS SIGN MIDDLE DOT MULTIPLICATION SIGN LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE DIVISION SIGN LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH MACRON LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH MACRON LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CARON LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH MACRON LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CARON LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH MACRON LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH MACRON LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CARON LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH CARON LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CARON LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CARON LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND MACRON LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND CARON LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER ALPHA LATIN SMALL LETTER SCRIPT G CARON (MANDARIN CHINESE THIRD TONE) MODIFIER LETTER MACRON (MANDARIN CHINESE FIRST TONE) MODIFIER LETTER ACUTE ACCENT (MANDARIN CHINESE SECOND TONE) MODIFIER LETTER GRAVE ACCENT (MANDARIN CHINESE FOURTH TONE) DOT ABOVE (MANDARIN CHINESE LIGHT TONE) GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ALPHA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER BETA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER GAMMA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER DELTA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER EPSILON GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ZETA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ETA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER THETA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER IOTA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER KAPPA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMDA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER MU GREEK CAPITAL LETTER NU GREEK CAPITAL LETTER XI GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMICRON Page 331 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix 03A0 03A1 03A3 03A4 03A5 03A6 03A7 03A8 03A9 03B1 03B2 03B3 03B4 03B5 03B6 03B7 03B8 03B9 03BA 03BB 03BC 03BD 03BE 03BF 03C0 03C1 03C3 03C4 03C5 03C6 03C7 03C8 03C9 0401 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 041A 041B 041C 041D 041E 041F 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 0425 0426 0427 0428 0429 042A 042B 042C 042D 042E 042F 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 0435 0436 0437 0438 0439 043A 043B 043C 043D 043E 043F 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PI GREEK CAPITAL LETTER RHO GREEK CAPITAL LETTER SIGMA GREEK CAPITAL LETTER TAU GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PHI GREEK CAPITAL LETTER CHI GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PSI GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMEGA GREEK SMALL LETTER ALPHA GREEK SMALL LETTER BETA GREEK SMALL LETTER GAMMA GREEK SMALL LETTER DELTA GREEK SMALL LETTER EPSILON GREEK SMALL LETTER ZETA GREEK SMALL LETTER ETA GREEK SMALL LETTER THETA GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA GREEK SMALL LETTER KAPPA GREEK SMALL LETTER LAMDA GREEK SMALL LETTER MU GREEK SMALL LETTER NU GREEK SMALL LETTER XI GREEK SMALL LETTER OMICRON GREEK SMALL LETTER PI GREEK SMALL LETTER RHO GREEK SMALL LETTER SIGMA GREEK SMALL LETTER TAU GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON GREEK SMALL LETTER PHI GREEK SMALL LETTER CHI GREEK SMALL LETTER PSI GREEK SMALL LETTER OMEGA CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER IO CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER A CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER BE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER VE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER GHE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER IE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZHE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER I CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHORT I CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER KA CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EL CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EM CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EN CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER O CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER PE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ER CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ES CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER U CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EF CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER HA CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TSE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER CHE CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHA CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHCHA CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER HARD SIGN CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YERU CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SOFT SIGN CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER E CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YU CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YA CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER A CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER BE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER VE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER GHE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER IE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZHE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER I CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHORT I CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER KA CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EL CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EM CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EN CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER O CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER PE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ER CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ES CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER TE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER U CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EF Page 332 0445 0446 0447 0448 0449 044A 044B 044C 044D 044E 044F 0451 2010 2013 2014 2015 2016 2018 2019 201C 201D 2025 2026 2030 2032 2033 2035 203B 20AC 2103 2105 2109 2116 2121 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 216A 216B 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2190 2191 2192 2193 2196 2197 2198 2199 2208 220F 2211 2215 221A 221D 221E 221F 2220 2223 2225 2227 2228 2229 222A 222B 222E 2234 2235 2236 2237 223D 2248 Rev C CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER HA CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER TSE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER CHE CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHA CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHCHA CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER HARD SIGN CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YERU CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SOFT SIGN CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER E CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YU CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YA CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER IO HYPHEN EN DASH EM DASH HORIZONTAL BAR DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK TWO DOT LEADER HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS PER MILLE SIGN PRIME DOUBLE PRIME REVERSED PRIME REFERENCE MARK EURO SIGN DEGREE CELSIUS CARE OF DEGREE FAHRENHEIT NUMERO SIGN TELEPHONE SIGN ROMAN NUMERAL ONE ROMAN NUMERAL TWO ROMAN NUMERAL THREE ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE ROMAN NUMERAL SIX ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT ROMAN NUMERAL NINE ROMAN NUMERAL TEN ROMAN NUMERAL ELEVEN ROMAN NUMERAL TWELVE SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL ONE SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TWO SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL THREE SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SIX SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL NINE SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TEN LEFTWARDS ARROW UPWARDS ARROW RIGHTWARDS ARROW DOWNWARDS ARROW NORTH WEST ARROW NORTH EAST ARROW SOUTH EAST ARROW SOUTH WEST ARROW ELEMENT OF N-ARY PRODUCT N-ARY SUMMATION DIVISION SLASH SQUARE ROOT PROPORTIONAL TO INFINITY RIGHT ANGLE ANGLE DIVIDES PARALLEL TO LOGICAL AND LOGICAL OR INTERSECTION UNION INTEGRAL CONTOUR INTEGRAL THEREFORE BECAUSE RATIO PROPORTION REVERSED TILDE (LAZY S) ALMOST EQUAL TO 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide 224C 2252 2260 2261 2264 2265 2266 2267 226E 226F 2295 2299 22A5 22BF 2312 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 247A 247B 247C 247D 247E 247F 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 248A 248B 248C 248D 248E 248F 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 249A 249B 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 250A 250B 250C 250D 250E 250F 2510 2511 Appendix ALL EQUAL TO APPROXIMATELY EQUAL TO OR THE IMAGE OF NOT EQUAL TO IDENTICAL TO LESS-THAN OR EQUAL TO GREATER-THAN OR EQUAL TO LESS-THAN OVER EQUAL TO GREATER-THAN OVER EQUAL TO NOT LESS-THAN NOT GREATER-THAN CIRCLED PLUS CIRCLED DOT OPERATOR UP TACK RIGHT TRIANGLE ARC CIRCLED DIGIT ONE CIRCLED DIGIT TWO CIRCLED DIGIT THREE CIRCLED DIGIT FOUR CIRCLED DIGIT FIVE CIRCLED DIGIT SIX CIRCLED DIGIT SEVEN CIRCLED DIGIT EIGHT CIRCLED DIGIT NINE CIRCLED NUMBER TEN PARENTHESIZED DIGIT ONE PARENTHESIZED DIGIT TWO PARENTHESIZED DIGIT THREE PARENTHESIZED DIGIT FOUR PARENTHESIZED DIGIT FIVE PARENTHESIZED DIGIT SIX PARENTHESIZED DIGIT SEVEN PARENTHESIZED DIGIT EIGHT PARENTHESIZED DIGIT NINE PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER ELEVEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TWELVE PARENTHESIZED NUMBER THIRTEEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER FOURTEEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER FIFTEEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER SIXTEEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER SEVENTEEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER EIGHTEEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER NINETEEN PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TWENTY DIGIT ONE FULL STOP DIGIT TWO FULL STOP DIGIT THREE FULL STOP DIGIT FOUR FULL STOP DIGIT FIVE FULL STOP DIGIT SIX FULL STOP DIGIT SEVEN FULL STOP DIGIT EIGHT FULL STOP DIGIT NINE FULL STOP NUMBER TEN FULL STOP NUMBER ELEVEN FULL STOP NUMBER TWELVE FULL STOP NUMBER THIRTEEN FULL STOP NUMBER FOURTEEN FULL STOP NUMBER FIFTEEN FULL STOP NUMBER SIXTEEN FULL STOP NUMBER SEVENTEEN FULL STOP NUMBER EIGHTEEN FULL STOP NUMBER NINETEEN FULL STOP NUMBER TWENTY FULL STOP BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT TRIPLE DASH HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY TRIPLE DASH HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT TRIPLE DASH VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY TRIPLE DASH VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT QUADRUPLE DASH HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY QUADRUPLE DASH HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT QUADRUPLE DASH VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY QUADRUPLE DASH VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND RIGHT HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND RIGHT LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY DOWN AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND LEFT HEAVY 28-07764 Rev C 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 251A 251B 251C 251D 251E 251F 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 252A 252B 252C 252D 252E 252F 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 253A 253B 253C 253D 253E 253F 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 254A 254B 2550 2551 2552 2553 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND LEFT LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY DOWN AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND RIGHT HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND RIGHT LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY UP AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND LEFT HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND LEFT LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY UP AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL LIGHT AND RIGHT HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND RIGHT DOWN LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND RIGHT UP LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND RIGHT LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND RIGHT UP HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND RIGHT DOWN HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY VERTICAL AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL LIGHT AND LEFT HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND LEFT DOWN LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND LEFT UP LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND LEFT LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND LEFT UP HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND LEFT DOWN HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY VERTICAL AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LEFT HEAVY AND RIGHT DOWN LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT HEAVY AND LEFT DOWN LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND HORIZONTAL HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND HORIZONTAL LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT LIGHT AND LEFT DOWN HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT DOWN HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY DOWN AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LEFT HEAVY AND RIGHT UP LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT HEAVY AND LEFT UP LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND HORIZONTAL HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND HORIZONTAL LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT LIGHT AND LEFT UP HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT UP HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY UP AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LEFT HEAVY AND RIGHT VERTICAL LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT HEAVY AND LEFT VERTICAL LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL LIGHT AND HORIZONTAL HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND DOWN HORIZONTAL LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND UP HORIZONTAL LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND HORIZONTAL LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS LEFT UP HEAVY AND RIGHT DOWN LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT UP HEAVY AND LEFT DOW N LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS LEFT DOWN HEAVY AND RIGHT UP LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT DOWN HEAVY AND LEFT UP LIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND UP HORIZONTAL HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND DOWN HORIZONTAL HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT LIGHT AND LEFT VERTICAL HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT VERTICAL HEAVY BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS DOWN SINGLE AND RIGHT DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS DOWN DOUBLE AND RIGHT SINGLE Page 333 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 255A 255B 255C 255D 255E 255F 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 256A 256B 256C 256D 256E 256F 2570 2571 2572 2573 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 258A 258B 258C 258D 258E 258F 2593 2594 2595 25A0 25A1 25B2 25B3 25BC 25BD 25C6 25C7 25CB 25CE 25CF 25E2 25E3 25E4 25E5 2605 2606 2609 2640 2642 2FF0 2FF1 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN SINGLE AND LEFT DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS DOWN DOUBLE AND LEFT SINGLE BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS UP SINGLE AND RIGHT DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS UP DOUBLE AND RIGHT SINGLE BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE UP AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS UP SINGLE AND LEFT DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS UP DOUBLE AND LEFT SINGLE BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE UP AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND RIGHT DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL DOUBLE AND RIGHT SINGLE BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND LEFT DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL DOUBLE AND LEFT SINGLE BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS DOWN SINGLE AND HORIZONTAL DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS DOWN DOUBLE AND HORIZONTAL SINGLE BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS UP SINGLE AND HORIZONTAL DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS UP DOUBLE AND HORIZONTAL SINGLE BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE UP AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND HORIZONTAL DOUBLE BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL DOUBLE AND HORIZONTAL SINGLE BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC DOWN AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC DOW N AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC UP AND LEFT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC UP AND RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL UPPER RIGHT TO LOWER LEFT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL UPPER LEFT TO LOWER RIGHT BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL CROSS LOWER ONE EIGHTH BLOCK LOWER ONE QUARTER BLOCK LOWER THREE EIGHTHS BLOCK LOWER HALF BLOCK LOWER FIVE EIGHTHS BLOCK LOWER THREE QUARTERS BLOCK LOWER SEVEN EIGHTHS BLOCK FULL BLOCK LEFT SEVEN EIGHTHS BLOCK LEFT THREE QUARTERS BLOCK LEFT FIVE EIGHTHS BLOCK LEFT HALF BLOCK LEFT THREE EIGHTHS BLOCK LEFT ONE QUARTER BLOCK LEFT ONE EIGHTH BLOCK DARK SHADE UPPER ONE EIGHTH BLOCK RIGHT ONE EIGHTH BLOCK BLACK SQUARE WHITE SQUARE BLACK UP-POINTING TRIANGLE WHITE UP-POINTING TRIANGLE BLACK DOWN-POINTING TRIANGLE WHITE DOWN-POINTING TRIANGLE BLACK DIAMOND WHITE DIAMOND WHITE CIRCLE BULLSEYE BLACK CIRCLE BLACK LOWER RIGHT TRIANGLE BLACK LOWER LEFT TRIANGLE BLACK UPPER LEFT TRIANGLE BLACK UPPER RIGHT TRIANGLE BLACK STAR WHITE STAR SUN FEMALE SIGN MALE SIGN IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER LEFT TO RIGHT IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER ABOVE TO BELOW Page 334 Rev C 2FF2 2FF3 2FF4 2FF5 2FF6 2FF7 2FF8 2FF9 2FFA 2FFB 3000 3001 3002 3003 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 300A 300B 300C 300D 300E 300F 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 301D 301E 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 303E 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 304A 304B 304C 304D 304E 304F 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 305A 305B 305C 305D 305E 305F 3060 3061 IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER LEFT TO MIDDLE AND RIGHT IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER ABOVE TO MIDDLE AND BELOW IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER FULL SURROUND IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER SURROUND FROM ABOVE IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER SURROUND FROM BELOW IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER SURROUND FROM LEFT IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER SURROUND FROM UPPER LEFT IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER SURROUND FROM UPPER RIGHT IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER SURROUND FROM LOWER LEFT IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER OVERLAID IDEOGRAPHIC SPACE IDEOGRAPHIC COMMA IDEOGRAPHIC FULL STOP DITTO MARK IDEOGRAPHIC ITERATION MARK IDEOGRAPHIC CLOSING MARK IDEOGRAPHIC NUMBER ZERO LEFT ANGLE BRACKET RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET LEFT DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET RIGHT DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET LEFT CORNER BRACKET RIGHT CORNER BRACKET LEFT WHITE CORNER BRACKET RIGHT WHITE CORNER BRACKET LEFT BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET RIGHT BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET POSTAL MARK GETA MARK LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET RIGHT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET LEFT WHITE LENTICULAR BRACKET RIGHT WHITE LENTICULAR BRACKET REVERSED DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK HANGZHOU NUMERAL ONE HANGZHOU NUMERAL TWO HANGZHOU NUMERAL THREE HANGZHOU NUMERAL FOUR HANGZHOU NUMERAL FIVE HANGZHOU NUMERAL SIX HANGZHOU NUMERAL SEVEN HANGZHOU NUMERAL EIGHT HANGZHOU NUMERAL NINE IDEOGRAPHIC VARIATION INDICATOR HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL A HIRAGANA LETTER A HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL I HIRAGANA LETTER I HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL U HIRAGANA LETTER U HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL E HIRAGANA LETTER E HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL O HIRAGANA LETTER O HIRAGANA LETTER KA HIRAGANA LETTER GA HIRAGANA LETTER KI HIRAGANA LETTER GI HIRAGANA LETTER KU HIRAGANA LETTER GU HIRAGANA LETTER KE HIRAGANA LETTER GE HIRAGANA LETTER KO HIRAGANA LETTER GO HIRAGANA LETTER SA HIRAGANA LETTER ZA HIRAGANA LETTER SI HIRAGANA LETTER ZI HIRAGANA LETTER SU HIRAGANA LETTER ZU HIRAGANA LETTER SE HIRAGANA LETTER ZE HIRAGANA LETTER SO HIRAGANA LETTER ZO HIRAGANA LETTER TA HIRAGANA LETTER DA HIRAGANA LETTER TI 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 306A 306B 306C 306D 306E 306F 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 307A 307B 307C 307D 307E 307F 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 308A 308B 308C 308D 308E 308F 3090 3091 3092 3093 309B 309C 309D 309E 30A1 30A2 30A3 30A4 30A5 30A6 30A7 30A8 30A9 30AA 30AB 30AC 30AD 30AE 30AF 30B0 30B1 30B2 30B3 30B4 30B5 30B6 30B7 30B8 30B9 30BA 30BB 30BC 30BD 30BE 30BF 30C0 30C1 Appendix HIRAGANA LETTER DI HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL TU HIRAGANA LETTER TU HIRAGANA LETTER DU HIRAGANA LETTER TE HIRAGANA LETTER DE HIRAGANA LETTER TO HIRAGANA LETTER DO HIRAGANA LETTER NA HIRAGANA LETTER NI HIRAGANA LETTER NU HIRAGANA LETTER NE HIRAGANA LETTER NO HIRAGANA LETTER HA HIRAGANA LETTER BA HIRAGANA LETTER PA HIRAGANA LETTER HI HIRAGANA LETTER BI HIRAGANA LETTER PI HIRAGANA LETTER HU HIRAGANA LETTER BU HIRAGANA LETTER PU HIRAGANA LETTER HE HIRAGANA LETTER BE HIRAGANA LETTER PE HIRAGANA LETTER HO HIRAGANA LETTER BO HIRAGANA LETTER PO HIRAGANA LETTER MA HIRAGANA LETTER MI HIRAGANA LETTER MU HIRAGANA LETTER ME HIRAGANA LETTER MO HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YA HIRAGANA LETTER YA HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YU HIRAGANA LETTER YU HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YO HIRAGANA LETTER YO HIRAGANA LETTER RA HIRAGANA LETTER RI HIRAGANA LETTER RU HIRAGANA LETTER RE HIRAGANA LETTER RO HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL WA HIRAGANA LETTER WA HIRAGANA LETTER WI HIRAGANA LETTER WE HIRAGANA LETTER WO HIRAGANA LETTER N KATAKANA-HIRAGANA VOICED SOUND MARK KATAKANA-HIRAGANA SEMI-VOICED SOUND MARK HIRAGANA ITERATION MARK HIRAGANA VOICED ITERATION MARK KATAKANA LETTER SMALL A KATAKANA LETTER A KATAKANA LETTER SMALL I KATAKANA LETTER I KATAKANA LETTER SMALL U KATAKANA LETTER U KATAKANA LETTER SMALL E KATAKANA LETTER E KATAKANA LETTER SMALL O KATAKANA LETTER O KATAKANA LETTER KA KATAKANA LETTER GA KATAKANA LETTER KI KATAKANA LETTER GI KATAKANA LETTER KU KATAKANA LETTER GU KATAKANA LETTER KE KATAKANA LETTER GE KATAKANA LETTER KO KATAKANA LETTER GO KATAKANA LETTER SA KATAKANA LETTER ZA KATAKANA LETTER SI KATAKANA LETTER ZI KATAKANA LETTER SU KATAKANA LETTER ZU KATAKANA LETTER SE KATAKANA LETTER ZE KATAKANA LETTER SO KATAKANA LETTER ZO KATAKANA LETTER TA KATAKANA LETTER DA KATAKANA LETTER TI 28-07764 Rev C 30C2 30C3 30C4 30C5 30C6 30C7 30C8 30C9 30CA 30CB 30CC 30CD 30CE 30CF 30D0 30D1 30D2 30D3 30D4 30D5 30D6 30D7 30D8 30D9 30DA 30DB 30DC 30DD 30DE 30DF 30E0 30E1 30E2 30E3 30E4 30E5 30E6 30E7 30E8 30E9 30EA 30EB 30EC 30ED 30EE 30EF 30F0 30F1 30F2 30F3 30F4 30F5 30F6 30FC 30FD 30FE 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 310A 310B 310C 310D 310E 310F 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 311A 311B 311C 311D 311E 311F 3120 3121 3122 3123 KATAKANA LETTER DI KATAKANA LETTER SMALL TU KATAKANA LETTER TU KATAKANA LETTER DU KATAKANA LETTER TE KATAKANA LETTER DE KATAKANA LETTER TO KATAKANA LETTER DO KATAKANA LETTER NA KATAKANA LETTER NI KATAKANA LETTER NU KATAKANA LETTER NE KATAKANA LETTER NO KATAKANA LETTER HA KATAKANA LETTER BA KATAKANA LETTER PA KATAKANA LETTER HI KATAKANA LETTER BI KATAKANA LETTER PI KATAKANA LETTER HU KATAKANA LETTER BU KATAKANA LETTER PU KATAKANA LETTER HE KATAKANA LETTER BE KATAKANA LETTER PE KATAKANA LETTER HO KATAKANA LETTER BO KATAKANA LETTER PO KATAKANA LETTER MA KATAKANA LETTER MI KATAKANA LETTER MU KATAKANA LETTER ME KATAKANA LETTER MO KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YA KATAKANA LETTER YA KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YU KATAKANA LETTER YU KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YO KATAKANA LETTER YO KATAKANA LETTER RA KATAKANA LETTER RI KATAKANA LETTER RU KATAKANA LETTER RE KATAKANA LETTER RO KATAKANA LETTER SMALL WA KATAKANA LETTER WA KATAKANA LETTER WI KATAKANA LETTER WE KATAKANA LETTER WO KATAKANA LETTER N KATAKANA LETTER VU KATAKANA LETTER SMALL KA KATAKANA LETTER SMALL KE KATAKANA-HIRAGANA PROLONGED SOUND MARK KATAKANA ITERATION MARK KATAKANA VOICED ITERATION MARK BOPOMOFO LETTER B BOPOMOFO LETTER P BOPOMOFO LETTER M BOPOMOFO LETTER F BOPOMOFO LETTER D BOPOMOFO LETTER T BOPOMOFO LETTER N BOPOMOFO LETTER L BOPOMOFO LETTER G BOPOMOFO LETTER K BOPOMOFO LETTER H BOPOMOFO LETTER J BOPOMOFO LETTER Q BOPOMOFO LETTER X BOPOMOFO LETTER ZH BOPOMOFO LETTER CH BOPOMOFO LETTER SH BOPOMOFO LETTER R BOPOMOFO LETTER Z BOPOMOFO LETTER C BOPOMOFO LETTER S BOPOMOFO LETTER A BOPOMOFO LETTER O BOPOMOFO LETTER E BOPOMOFO LETTER EH BOPOMOFO LETTER AI BOPOMOFO LETTER EI BOPOMOFO LETTER AU BOPOMOFO LETTER OU BOPOMOFO LETTER AN BOPOMOFO LETTER EN Page 335 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3231 32A3 338E 338F 339C 339D 339E 33A1 33C4 33CE 33D1 33D2 33D5 3400-4DB5 4E00-9FA5 E78D-E796 E7C7-E7C8 E815-E864 F92C F979 F995 F9E7 F9F1 FA0C FA0D FA0E FA0F FA11 FA13 FA14 FA18 FA1F FA20 FA21 FA23 FA24 FA27 FA28 FA29 FE30 FE31 FE33 FE34 FE35 FE36 FE37 FE38 FE39 FE3A FE3B FE3C FE3D FE3E FE3F FE40 FE41 BOPOMOFO LETTER ANG BOPOMOFO LETTER ENG BOPOMOFO LETTER ER BOPOMOFO LETTER I BOPOMOFO LETTER U BOPOMOFO LETTER IU PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH ONE PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH TWO PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH THREE PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH FOUR PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH FIVE PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH SIX PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH SEVEN PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH EIGHT PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH NINE PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH TEN PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH STOCK CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH CORRECT SQUARE MG SQUARE KG SQUARE MM SQUARE CM SQUARE KM SQUARE M SQUARED SQUARE CC SQUARE KM CAPITAL SQUARE LN SQUARE LOG SQUARE MIL CJK UNIFIED IDEOGRAPH EXTENSION A CJK UNIFIED IDEOGRAPH PRIVATE USE AREA PRIVATE USE AREA PRIVATE USE AREA CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F92C CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F979 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F995 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F9E7 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F9F1 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA0C CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA0D CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA0E CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA0F CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA11 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA13 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA14 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA18 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1F * CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA20 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA21 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA23 * CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA24 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA27 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA28 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA29 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL TWO DOT LEADER PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL EM DASH PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LOW LINE PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL WAVY LOW LINE PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT PARENTHESIS PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT PARENTHESIS PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT CURLY BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT CURLY BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT ANGLE BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT CORNER BRACKET Page 336 Rev C FE42 FE43 FE44 FE49 FE4A FE4B FE4C FE4D FE4E FE4F FE50 FE51 FE52 FE54 FE55 FE56 FE57 FE59 FE5A FE5B FE5C FE5D FE5E FE5F FE60 FE61 FE62 FE63 FE64 FE65 FE66 FE68 FE69 FE6A FE6B FF01 FF02 FF03 FF04 FF05 FF06 FF07 FF08 FF09 FF0A FF0B FF0C FF0D FF0E FF0F FF10 FF11 FF12 FF13 FF14 FF15 FF16 FF17 FF18 FF19 FF1A FF1B FF1C FF1D FF1E FF1F FF20 FF21 FF22 FF23 FF24 FF25 FF26 FF27 FF28 FF29 FF2A FF2B FF2C FF2D FF2E FF2F FF30 FF31 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT CORNER BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT WHITE CORNER BRACKET PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT WHITE CORNER BRACKET DASHED OVERLINE CENTRELINE OVERLINE WAVY OVERLINE DOUBLE WAVY OVERLINE DASHED LOW LINE CENTRELINE LOW LINE WAVY LOW LINE SMALL COMMA SMALL IDEOGRAPHIC COMMA SMALL FULL STOP SMALL SEMICOLON SMALL COLON SMALL QUESTION MARK SMALL EXCLAMATION MARK SMALL LEFT PARENTHESIS SMALL RIGHT PARENTHESIS SMALL LEFT CURLY BRACKET SMALL RIGHT CURLY BRACKET SMALL LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET SMALL RIGHT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET SMALL NUMBER SIGN SMALL AMPERSAND SMALL ASTERISK SMALL PLUS SIGN SMALL HYPHEN-MINUS SMALL LESS-THAN SIGN SMALL GREATER-THAN SIGN SMALL EQUALS SIGN SMALL REVERSE SOLIDUS SMALL DOLLAR SIGN SMALL PERCENT SIGN SMALL COMMERCIAL AT FULLWIDTH EXCLAMATION MARK FULLWIDTH QUOTATION MARK FULLWIDTH NUMBER SIGN FULLWIDTH DOLLAR SIGN FULLWIDTH PERCENT SIGN FULLWIDTH AMPERSAND FULLWIDTH APOSTROPHE FULLWIDTH LEFT PARENTHESIS FULLWIDTH RIGHT PARENTHESIS FULLWIDTH ASTERISK FULLWIDTH PLUS SIGN FULLWIDTH COMMA FULLWIDTH HYPHEN-MINUS FULLWIDTH FULL STOP FULLWIDTH SOLIDUS FULLWIDTH DIGIT ZERO FULLWIDTH DIGIT ONE FULLWIDTH DIGIT TWO FULLWIDTH DIGIT THREE FULLWIDTH DIGIT FOUR FULLWIDTH DIGIT FIVE FULLWIDTH DIGIT SIX FULLWIDTH DIGIT SEVEN FULLWIDTH DIGIT EIGHT FULLWIDTH DIGIT NINE FULLWIDTH COLON FULLWIDTH SEMICOLON FULLWIDTH LESS-THAN SIGN FULLWIDTH EQUALS SIGN FULLWIDTH GREATER-THAN SIGN FULLWIDTH QUESTION MARK FULLWIDTH COMMERCIAL AT FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide FF32 FF33 FF34 FF35 FF36 FF37 FF38 FF39 FF3A FF3B FF3C FF3D FF3E FF3F FF40 FF41 FF42 FF43 FF44 FF45 FF46 FF47 FF48 FF49 FF4A FF4B Appendix FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z FULLWIDTH LEFT SQUARE BRACKET FULLWIDTH REVERSE SOLIDUS FULLWIDTH RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET FULLWIDTH CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT FULLWIDTH LOW LINE FULLWIDTH GRAVE ACCENT FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER A FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER B FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER C FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER D FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER E FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER F FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER G FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER H FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER I FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER J FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER K 28-07764 FF4C FF4D FF4E FF4F FF50 FF51 FF52 FF53 FF54 FF55 FF56 FF57 FF58 FF59 FF5A FF5B FF5C FF5D FF5E FFE0 FFE1 FFE2 FFE3 FFE4 FFE5 Rev C FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER L FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER M FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER N FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER O FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER P FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER Q FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER R FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER S FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER T FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER U FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER V FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER W FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER X FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER Y FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER Z FULLWIDTH LEFT CURLY BRACKET FULLWIDTH VERTICAL LINE FULLWIDTH RIGHT CURLY BRACKET FULLWIDTH TILDE FULLWIDTH CENT SIGN FULLWIDTH POUND SIGN FULLWIDTH NOT SIGN FULLWIDTH MACRON * FULLWIDTH BROKEN BAR FULLWIDTH YEN SIGN Page 337 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix Appendix F Windows 1252 Latin 1 Windows 1252 Latin 1 to Unicode translation ASCII 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F 0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x27 0x28 0x29 0x2A 0x2B 0x2C 0x2D 0x2E 0x2F 0x30 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 0x38 0x39 0x3A 0x3B 0x3C 0x3D 0x3E 0x3F 0x40 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 Unicode 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 0x0005 0x0006 0x0007 0x0008 0x0009 0x000A 0x000B 0x000C 0x000D 0x000E 0x000F 0x0010 0x0011 0x0012 0x0013 0x0014 0x0015 0x0016 0x0017 0x0018 0x0019 0x001A 0x001B 0x001C 0x001D 0x001E 0x001F 0x0020 0x0021 0x0022 0x0023 0x0024 0x0025 0x0026 0x0027 0x0028 0x0029 0x002A 0x002B 0x002C 0x002D 0x002E 0x002F 0x0030 0x0031 0x0032 0x0033 0x0034 0x0035 0x0036 0x0037 0x0038 0x0039 0x003A 0x003B 0x003C 0x003D 0x003E 0x003F 0x0040 0x0041 0x0042 0x0043 0x0044 Page 338 Character NULL START OF HEADING START OF TEXT END OF TEXT END OF TRANSMISSION ENQUIRY ACKNOWLEDGE BELL BACKSPACE HORIZONTAL TABULATION LINE FEED VERTICAL TABULATION FORM FEED CARRIAGE RETURN SHIFT OUT SHIFT IN DATA LINK ESCAPE DEVICE CONTROL ONE DEVICE CONTROL TWO DEVICE CONTROL THREE DEVICE CONTROL FOUR NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE SYNCHRONOUS IDLE END OF TRANSMISSION BLOCK CANCEL END OF MEDIUM SUBSTITUTE ESCAPE FILE SEPARATOR GROUP SEPARATOR RECORD SEPARATOR UNIT SEPARATOR SPACE EXCLAMATION MARK QUOTATION MARK NUMBER SIGN DOLLAR SIGN PERCENT SIGN AMPERSAND APOSTROPHE LEFT PARENTHESIS RIGHT PARENTHESIS ASTERISK PLUS SIGN COMMA HYPHEN-MINUS FULL STOP SOLIDUS DIGIT ZERO DIGIT ONE DIGIT TWO DIGIT THREE DIGIT FOUR DIGIT FIVE DIGIT SIX DIGIT SEVEN DIGIT EIGHT DIGIT NINE COLON SEMICOLON LESS-THAN SIGN EQUALS SIGN GREATER-THAN SIGN QUESTION MARK COMMERCIAL AT LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D 0x45 0x46 0x47 0x48 0x49 0x4A 0x4B 0x4C 0x4D 0x4E 0x4F 0x50 0x51 0x52 0x53 0x54 0x55 0x56 0x57 0x58 0x59 0x5A 0x5B 0x5C 0x5D 0x5E 0x5F 0x60 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 0x65 0x66 0x67 0x68 0x69 0x6A 0x6B 0x6C 0x6D 0x6E 0x6F 0x70 0x71 0x72 0x73 0x74 0x75 0x76 0x77 0x78 0x79 0x7A 0x7B 0x7C 0x7D 0x7E 0x7F 0x80 0x81 0x82 0x83 0x84 0x85 0x86 0x87 0x88 0x89 0x8A Rev C 0x0045 0x0046 0x0047 0x0048 0x0049 0x004A 0x004B 0x004C 0x004D 0x004E 0x004F 0x0050 0x0051 0x0052 0x0053 0x0054 0x0055 0x0056 0x0057 0x0058 0x0059 0x005A 0x005B 0x005C 0x005D 0x005E 0x005F 0x0060 0x0061 0x0062 0x0063 0x0064 0x0065 0x0066 0x0067 0x0068 0x0069 0x006A 0x006B 0x006C 0x006D 0x006E 0x006F 0x0070 0x0071 0x0072 0x0073 0x0074 0x0075 0x0076 0x0077 0x0078 0x0079 0x007A 0x007B 0x007C 0x007D 0x007E 0x007F 0x20AC 0x0000 0x201A 0x0192 0x201E 0x2026 0x2020 0x2021 0x02C6 0x2030 0x0160 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z LEFT SQUARE BRACKET REVERSE SOLIDUS RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT LOW LINE GRAVE ACCENT LATIN SMALL LETTER A LATIN SMALL LETTER B LATIN SMALL LETTER C LATIN SMALL LETTER D LATIN SMALL LETTER E LATIN SMALL LETTER F LATIN SMALL LETTER G LATIN SMALL LETTER H LATIN SMALL LETTER I LATIN SMALL LETTER J LATIN SMALL LETTER K LATIN SMALL LETTER L LATIN SMALL LETTER M LATIN SMALL LETTER N LATIN SMALL LETTER O LATIN SMALL LETTER P LATIN SMALL LETTER Q LATIN SMALL LETTER R LATIN SMALL LETTER S LATIN SMALL LETTER T LATIN SMALL LETTER U LATIN SMALL LETTER V LATIN SMALL LETTER W LATIN SMALL LETTER X LATIN SMALL LETTER Y LATIN SMALL LETTER Z LEFT CURLY BRACKET VERTICAL LINE RIGHT CURLY BRACKET TILDE DELETE EURO SIGN SINGLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK LATIN SMALL LETTER F WITH HOOK DOUBLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS DAGGER DOUBLE DAGGER MODIFIER LETTER CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT PER MILLE SIGN LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide 0x8B 0x2039 0x8C 0x8D 0x8E 0x8F 0x90 0x91 0x92 0x93 0x94 0x95 0x96 0x97 0x98 0x99 0x9A 0x9B 0x0152 0x0000 0x017D 0x0000 0x0000 0x2018 0x2019 0x201C 0x201D 0x2022 0x2013 0x2014 0x02DC 0x2122 0x0161 0x203A 0x9C 0x9D 0x9E 0x9F 0x0153 0x0000 0x017E 0x0178 0xA0 0xA1 0xA2 0xA3 0xA4 0xA5 0xA6 0xA7 0xA8 0xA9 0xAA 0xAB 0x00A0 0x00A1 0x00A2 0x00A3 0x00A4 0x00A5 0x00A6 0x00A7 0x00A8 0x00A9 0x00AA 0x00AB 0xAC 0xAD 0xAE 0xAF 0xB0 0xB1 0xB2 0xB3 0xB4 0xB5 0xB6 0xB7 0xB8 0xB9 0xBA 0xBB 0x00AC 0x00AD 0x00AE 0x00AF 0x00B0 0x00B1 0x00B2 0x00B3 0x00B4 0x00B5 0x00B6 0x00B7 0x00B8 0x00B9 0x00BA 0x00BB 0xBC 0xBD 0xBE 0xBF 0xC0 0xC1 0xC2 0x00BC 0x00BD 0x00BE 0x00BF 0x00C0 0x00C1 0x00C2 0xC3 0xC4 0x00C3 0x00C4 0xC5 0x00C5 0xC6 0xC7 0xC8 0xC9 0xCA 0x00C6 0x00C7 0x00C8 0x00C9 0x00CA 0xCB 0x00CB 0xCC 0x00CC 28-07764 Appendix SINGLE LEFT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK BULLET EN DASH EM DASH SMALL TILDE TRADE MARK SIGN LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON SINGLE RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS NO-BREAK SPACE INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK CENT SIGN POUND SIGN CURRENCY SIGN YEN SIGN BROKEN BAR SECTION SIGN DIAERESIS COPYRIGHT SIGN FEMININE ORDINAL INDICATOR LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK NOT SIGN SOFT HYPHEN REGISTERED SIGN MACRON DEGREE SIGN PLUS-MINUS SIGN SUPERSCRIPT TWO SUPERSCRIPT THREE ACUTE ACCENT MICRO SIGN PILCROW SIGN MIDDLE DOT CEDILLA SUPERSCRIPT ONE MASCULINE ORDINAL INDICATOR RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK VULGAR FRACTION ONE QUARTER VULGAR FRACTION ONE HALF VULGAR FRACTION THREE QUARTERS INVERTED QUESTION MARK LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH ACUTE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH TILDE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH GRAVE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH ACUTE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH GRAVE Rev C 0xCD 0xCE 0x00CD 0x00CE 0xCF 0xD0 0xD1 0xD2 0xD3 0xD4 0x00CF 0x00D0 0x00D1 0x00D2 0x00D3 0x00D4 0xD5 0xD6 0x00D5 0x00D6 0xD7 0xD8 0xD9 0xDA 0xDB 0x00D7 0x00D8 0x00D9 0x00DA 0x00DB 0xDC 0x00DC 0xDD 0xDE 0xDF 0xE0 0xE1 0xE2 0x00DD 0x00DE 0x00DF 0x00E0 0x00E1 0x00E2 0xE3 0xE4 0xE5 0x00E3 0x00E4 0x00E5 0xE6 0xE7 0xE8 0xE9 0xEA 0x00E6 0x00E7 0x00E8 0x00E9 0x00EA 0xEB 0xEC 0xED 0xEE 0xEF 0xF0 0xF1 0xF2 0xF3 0xF4 0x00EB 0x00EC 0x00ED 0x00EE 0x00EF 0x00F0 0x00F1 0x00F2 0x00F3 0x00F4 0xF5 0xF6 0xF7 0xF8 0xF9 0xFA 0xFB 0x00F5 0x00F6 0x00F7 0x00F8 0x00F9 0x00FA 0x00FB 0xFC 0xFD 0xFE 0xFF 0x00FC 0x00FD 0x00FE 0x00FF LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH ACUTE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH TILDE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH GRAVE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH TILDE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS MULTIPLICATION SIGN LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH GRAVE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH ACUTE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH TILDE LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE LATIN SMALL LETTER AE LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH TILDE LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH TILDE LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS DIVISION SIGN LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS Page 339 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Appendix Appendix G: Ordering Supplies ITherm® supplies can be ordered easily direct from the TransAct website (www.transacttech.com) or our telephone number within the US toll free: (877) 7ithaca. (other inquires: (607) 257-8901). When calling by phone, please ask for the Sales Department. Receipt Paper Type Dimensions Black Monochrome One-Ply, 24 rolls per box 3.125” wide x 4” diameter Thermal Red Color Thermal One-Ply, 24 rolls per box Red/Black 3.125” wide x 4” diameter Blue Color Thermal One-Ply, 24 rolls per box Blue/Black 3.125” wide x 4” diameter Green Color Thermal One-Ply, 24 rolls per box Green/Black 3.125” wide x 4” diameter NOTE: Green Thermal paper may not be available. Contact Transact Sales for availability. Stock Number 100-04410 100-04400 100-04401 100-04402 Table 53 Paper Ordering Information Cables 110V Power Cable (USA) 220V Power Cable (Australia) 230V Power Cable (International) 230V Power Cable (IND/South Africa) 240V Power Cable (UK) Parallel Communication Cable 25-pin male to 25-pin male 36-pin Centronics to 25-pin male Serial Communication Cable 9-pin Female to 9-pin Female 9-pin Female to 25-pin Female Stock Number 98-02174 98-02178 98-02175 98-02179 98-02176 253-9800007 253-9800002 10-2020 10-2021 Table 54 Cables Ordering Information Domestic and International power cables available. Call for more information Drivers Available: Windows® 95/98/Me Print Driver and Documentation Windows® 2000/NT 4.0 Print Driver and Documentation OPOS Print Driver Manual OPOS Print Driver Disk 1 / Disk 2 Software Developer’s Toolkit (CD-ROM) 28-07764 Rev C 98-9171 98-9172 100-9730 100-9731 / 100-9732 100-02440 Page 341 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Index Index [BEL] Audio alert, 163, 164 [BEL] Sound buzzer, 223 [BS] Insert back space, 83 [BS] Set back space, 206 [CAN] Clear print buffer, 162 [CR] Print and carriage return, 191 [CR] Set carriage return, 82 [DC2] Begin 10 cpi, 93 [DC4] End one-line double-wide print, 107 [DLE] [DC4] <1> Generate pulse in real time, 225 [DLE] [DC4] <2> Executes the printer power-off sequence, 225 [DLE] [DC4] <8> d1…d7 Clear Buffer(s), 225 [DLE] ENQ Real-time request to printer, 227 [DLE] EOT Transmit real-time status, 213 [ENQ] <1> Inquire Cash Drawer 1 status, 172 [ENQ] <10> Request printer reset, 173 [ENQ] <11> Request printer power cycle status, 174 [ENQ] <14> Inquire mechanical error status, 174 [ENQ] <15> Inquire printer state, 175 [ENQ] <20> Inquire all printer status, 176 [ENQ] <21> Inquire printer ID, 177 [ENQ] <22> Inquire Error Status, 178 [ENQ] <23> Inquire user-store status, 179 [ENQ] <3> Inquire receipt paper low status, 172 [ENQ] <4> Inquire receipt paper out status, 173 [ENQ] <8> Inquire cover open status, 173 [ENQ] <9> Inquire buffer status, 173 [ENQ] Inquire printer status, 172 [ESC] - <1> Begin underline, 108, 110 [ESC] - Turn on/off underline mode, 199 [ESC] \ Set relative print position, 205 [ESC] ! Select international character set, 101, 102, 270, 271, 272, 276, 277, 278, 279, 283, 284, 285, 286, 287, 288 [ESC] ! Select print mode(s), 199 [ESC] # <0> Begin 12 x 12 draft print, 96 [ESC] $ Set absolute print position, 205 [ESC] $ Set print position to beginning, 205 [ESC] $ Cancel user-defined characters, 106 [ESC] % Select/cancel user-defined character set, 193 [ESC] % G Begin italics, 112 [ESC] % H End italics, 112 [ESC] & … Define user-defined characters, 194 [ESC] * <0> <0> Set horizontal graphics mode, 128 [ESC] * Print graphics in mode , 124 [ESC] *

              Select bitimage mode, 209 [ESC] ? Reassign graphic mode, 124 [ESC] ? Cancel user-defined characters, 194 [ESC] @ Initialize the printer, 163, 224 [ESC] [ @ ... Double-wide, double-high italics, 109 [ESC] [ C Insert Euro character, 103 28-07764 [ESC] [ P Set character pitch, 94, 279 [ESC] [ S... Redefine character set, 104 [ESC] [ T Select character code page, 101 [ESC] [BEL] Audio alert control, 164 [ESC] [EM] B Set bar code height, 147 [ESC] [EM] J Set bar code justification and HRI modes, 148 [ESC] [SI] Begin 24 cpi, 93 [ESC] [US] 1 <0> Load item process, 131 [ESC] [US] b <0> Begin named macro record, 130, 132 [ESC] [US] c <0> Save user-defined characters, 131, 133 [ESC] [US] d <0> Delete item from user store, 134, 135 [ESC] [US] e <0> End name macro record, 133 [ESC] [US] e <0> Remove item from user store, 131 [ESC] [US] e <0> Stop name macro record, 130 [ESC] [US] f ALL <0> Flush user store, 132, 135 [ESC] [US] l <0> Load macro/character, 134 [ESC] [US] m <0> Save macro data, 133 [ESC] [US] m Save macro data, 130 [ESC] [US] q <0> Query user store, 136 [ESC] [US] r <0> Run macro data, 134 [ESC] [US] s <0> Flag as a start-up macro, 131 [ESC] [US] s <0> Flag start-up macro, 134 [ESC] ] Reverse line feed, 90 [ESC] ^ Print control character, 102, 198 [ESC] { Turn on/off upside-down print mode, 200 [ESC] { Electronic Journal Begin, 159 [ESC] < Enable data pass through, 166 [ESC] < Enable print suppress, 166 [ESC] < Return home, 208 [ESC] Set horizontal position, 84 [ESC] = Select peripheral device status, 226 [ESC] = … Define user-defined characters, 105 [ESC] = y c1 c2…Define user-defined characters, 131 [ESC] > Enable user-defined characters, 106 [ESC] 0 Set line spacing to 27/216 inch, 86 [ESC] 1 Set left margin, 208 [ESC] 1 Set line spacing to 7/72 inch, 86 [ESC] 2 Enable variable line spacing, 87 [ESC] 2 Select default line spacing, 193 [ESC] 3 Set line spacing, 193 [ESC] 3 Set line spacing to n/216 inch, 85 [ESC] 4 Begin italics, 201 [ESC] 4 Set top of form, 89 [ESC] 5 <01> Begin auto line feed, 90 [ESC] 5 End italics, 201 [ESC] 8 Disable paper out sensor, 161 [ESC] 9 Enable paper out sensor, 161 [ESC] a Select justification, 206 Rev C Page 343 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Index [ESC] a Set justification, 84 [ESC] A Set variable line spacing to n/72 inch, 86 [ESC] b ... Print bar code, 139, 146, 179, 180 [ESC] B 0 Set vertical tab stops, 88 [ESC] Begin 12 cpi, 93 [ESC] BEL Sound buzzer, 223 [ESC] C [NUL] Set form length in inches, 89 [ESC] c Select color, 107 [ESC] C Set form length in lines, 89 [ESC] c 3 Select paper sensor(s) to output paperend signals, 204, 236 [ESC] c 4 Select paper sensor(s) to stop printing, 203, 236 [ESC] c 5 Enable/disable paper feed, 202, 236 [ESC] d Feed lines at current spacing, 87 [ESC] d Print and feed lines, 191 [ESC] D 0 Set horizontal tab stops, 83 [ESC] D NUL Set horizontal tab positions, 207 [ESC] e Print and reverse feed lines, 191 [ESC] E Turn on/off emphasized mode, 199 [ESC] E Begin emphasized print, 110 [ESC] F End emphasized print, 111 [ESC] f Select receipt station, 115, 116, 119, 120, 121, 122 [ESC] g <0> Process user macro, 138 [ESC] g <1> Start macro record, 130, 138 [ESC] g <2> Stop macro record, 130, 138 [ESC] g <3> Stop macro record and save, 138 [ESC] G Turn on/off double-strike mode, 200 [ESC] G Begin enhanced print, 110 [ESC] h Process color graphics, 127 [ESC] h Process horizontal graphics, 127 [ESC] H End enhanced print, 110 [ESC] I Set print quality mode, 96 [ESC] i Partial knife cut, 223 [ESC] J Fine line feed, 85 [ESC] J Fine linefeed, 151, 152, 153, 154 [ESC] J Print and feed paper, 192 [ESC] j Print and reverse feed, 192 [ESC] K Print and reverse feed lines, 192 [ESC] K Print single-density graphics, 123 [ESC] L Print half-speed double-density graphics, 123 [ESC] l Electronic Journal Carbon Copy, 160 [ESC] M Select character font table, 194 [ESC] m Perform a partial knife cut, 223 [ESC] p Generate pulse, 225 [ESC] P Begin rotated font, 97 [ESC] p 3 Select paper sensor(s) to output paperend signals, 165 [ESC] p 4 Select paper sensor(s) to stop printing, 165 [ESC] p 5 Enable/disable paper feed, 164 [ESC] q Query marker, 162 [ESC] Q Set right margin, 208 [ESC] R Select an international character set, 195 [ESC] r Turn color mode on/off, 198 Page 344 [ESC] R Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops, 84, 88 [ESC] S <0> Select superscript, 111 [ESC] S <1> Select subscript, 111 [ESC] SP Set right-side character spacing, 193 [ESC] t Select character code table, 198 [ESC] T End superscript or subscript, 111 [ESC] U <0> Begin bi-directional print, 126 [ESC] U <1> Begin unidirectional print, 125 [ESC] U Turn on/off unidirectional printing mode, 207 [ESC] V Set intercharacter spacing, 95 [ESC] V Turn on/off 90° rotation mode, 200 [ESC] W Double-wide, double-high mode, 108 [ESC] w Enable dynamic response, 154 [ESC] x Open cash drawer, 163 [ESC] X Set left/right print margin, 161 [ESC] y Set feature control, 167 [ESC] Y Print full-speed double-density graphics, 124 [ESC] Z Print quad-density graphics, 124 [FF] Set form feed, 89, 91 [GS] \ Set relative vertical print position in page mode, 220 [GS] a Enable/disable Automatic Status Back, 210 [GS] b Turns smoothing on/off, 201 [GS] c Print counter, 228 [GS] g 0 Initialize maintenance counter, 228 [GS] g 2 Transmits maintenance counter, 229 [GS] I Transmit printer ID, 224 [GS] P x y Set horizontal and vertical motion units, 224 [GS] r Transmit status, 212 [GS] Start/end macro definition, 230 [GS] V Select cut mode and cut paper, 223 [HT] Set horizontal tab, 83, 206 [LF] Print and line feed, 191 [LF] Set line feed, 82 [SI] Begin 17 cpi, 93 [SO] Begin one-line double-wide print, 107 [SOH] Begin multi-drop control, 170 [VT] Set vertical tab, 88 10 CPI Character Pitch, Beginning, 93 12 CPI Character Pitch, Beginning, 93 12 x 12 Draft Print Mode, Beginning, 96 17 CPI Character Pitch, Beginning, 93 24 CPI Character Pitch, Beginning, 93 APA Graphics, Printing, 124 Appendix A Ordering Supplies, 341 Application Development, 74 Audio Alert, Configuring, 164 Auido alert, 164 Auto cut, Performing, 163 Auto Line Feed, Beginning, 90 Automatic Status back, Enable/Disable, 210 Back Space, 83 Bar Code Commands, 220 Bar Code, Print, 139, 146, 179, 180 Bar Code, Set height, 147 Bar Code, Set Justification, Print Direction, 148 Bar Codes, 139 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Index Begin Italics, 112 Bi-directional Printing, Beginning, 126 Bit Image Mode, Selecting, 209 Bit-Image Command, 209 Boot Loader Mode, 61 Buffer, 306 Carriage Return, 82 Cash Drawer 1 Status, Inquire, 172 Cash drawer, Opening, 163 Change User Store Terminator, 136 Changing Interface Cards, 39 Character attributes, 107 Character Code Page, Setting, 101 Character Code table, Selecting, 196 Character Code Table, Selecting, 198 Character Commands, 193 Character Pitch, Setting, 94, 279 Character Set, Redefining, 104 Character Spacing, Setting, 193 Clear Buffer(s), 225 Code Page Definitions, 323 Color Graphics, 245 Color Mode, Turning on/off, 198 Commands, User-store, 132 Communication Features, 318 Parallel Port, 304 Serial Port, 309 Communications Interface, 30 Configuration Remote, 69 Configuration Control, Extending, 168 Configuration Mode Overview, 65 Connecting Communication Cables, 42 Connecting Power, 41 Control Character, Printing, 102 Control Codes Overview, 73 Control Codes and Commands, 75 Control Feature, Setting, 167 Cover Open Status, Inquire, 173 Current Requirements, 30 Cut Mode/Cut paper, Selecting, 223 Data pass-through, 318 Display Pass Through, 31, 316 Display pass-through, 318 Double Density Graphics, Full-Speed Printing, 124 Double Density Graphics, Half-Speed Printing, 123 Double Strike Mode, On/Off, 200 Dynamic Response, Enable, 154 Emphasized Mode, On/Off, 199 Emphasized Print Mode, Beginning, 110 Emphasized Print Mode, Ending, 111 End Italics, 112 Enhanced Print Mode, Ending, 110 Enhanced print, Beginning, 110 Entering Configuration Mode, 65 Entering Self-Test Mode, 58 EPOS Codes, 181 command summary, 187 28-07764 EPOS 90° Rotation Mode, On/Off, 200 EPOS Absolute Print Position, Setting, 205 EPOS Back Space, Setting, 206 EPOS Bar Code Height, Setting, 221 EPOS Bar Code, Printing, 220 EPOS Character Size, Setting, 201 EPOS Control Character, Printing, 198 EPOS Emulation, 74 EPOS Euro Character, Insert, 198 EPOS Execute Macro, 230 EPOS HRI Characters, Selecting Font, 222 EPOS HRI Characters-Printing Position, Selecting, 221 EPOS Italics, Beginning, 201 EPOS Italics, Ending, 201 EPOS Knife Cut-Partial, 223 EPOS Knife Cut-Partial, Performing, 223 EPOS Macro Definition, Start/End, 230 EPOS margin-eft, Setting, 208 EPOS Margin-left, Setting, 207 EPOS Margin-Right, Setting, 208 EPOS Motion Units, Setting, 224 EPOS Nonvolatile Memory, Erasing All Entries, 233 EPOS Nonvolatile Memory, Erasing Single Entry, 233 EPOS Page Mode Commands, 217 EPOS Paper Error Signal Control, 236 EPOS Printing Area Width, Setting, 207 EPOS Query Nonvolatile Memory Pool Information, 235 EPOS Relative Print Position, Setting, 205 EPOS Relative Vertical Print Position in page mode, Setting, 220 EPOS Set Print to beginning of print line, 205 EPOS Sound Buzzer, 223 EPOS Startup Macro Definition, Deleting, 231 EPOS Unidirectional Printing Mode, On/Off, 207 EPOS User Defined Bit Image, Define, 234 EPOS User Defined Bit Image, Defining, 231 EPOS User Defined Bit Image, Printing, 233, 235 EPOS User Defined Character Set, Saving, 235 EPOS User Defined Character Set, Selecting, 235 EPOS, Print and Reverse Feed, 192 Error Status, Inquire, 178 ESC [ T Select character code table, 196 Euro Character, Inserting, 103 Executes power-off sequence, 225 Extended APA Graphics, 124 Extended Diagnostics Hex-Dump, 60 Firmware Configuration, 43 Flow control Data Terminal Ready (DTR), 309 Ready/Busy, 309 XON/XOFF, 309 Form Feed, 89, 91 Form Length, Setting Inches, 89 Form Length, Setting Lines, 89 Forming characters, 257 Generate Pulse, 225 Generate Pulse in real time, 225 Graphic Mode, 123 Rev C Page 345 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Index International Character Sets, 195 IPCL Codes, 74 Ithaca Specific iTherm™ 280 Commands, 236 Justification, Selecting, 206 Justification, Setting, 84 LED indicator error, 56 paper, 56 power, 56 Level 0 diagnostics, 61 Line feed, 82 Line Feed Button, 55 Line Feed, Performing, 85 Line Feed, Reverse, 90 Line Spacing Commands, 193 Line Spacing, Enabling, 87 Line Spacing, Feeding Lines, 87 Line Spacing, Select Default, 193 Line Spacing, Set at 2 ½, 16-inch and 7/72 inch, 86 Line Spacing, Set-1/8 inch, 86 Line Spacing, Set-n/216 inch, 85 Line Spacing, Setting, 193 Line Spacing-Variable, Setting, 86 Machanical Error Status, Inquire, 174 Macro Data, Run from user Store, 134 Macro Data, Saving, 130 Macro Data, Saving in user Store, 133 Macro Record, Beginning, 130 Macro Record, Ending, 133 Macro Record, Ending name, 130 Macro Record, Start, 138 Macro Record, Starting, 130, 132 Macro Record, Stop, 138 Macro Record, Stop and Save, 138 Macro Record, Stopping, 130 Macro, Flag on Startup, 134 Macro-Function Commands, 230 Mechanism Control Commands, 223 Microline Emulation, 74 Miscellaneous Commands, 224 Multidrop configuration, 318 Multi-Drop Control, Beginning, 170 Multiline Mode, 108 OFF Button, 55 Off-line active, 319 One Line/Double Wide Print, Beginning, 107 One Line/Double Wide Print, Canceling, 107 Output Paper end Signals, Selecting Paper Sensors, 165, 204 Panel Button Commands, 202 paper Feed, Enable, Disable, 164, 202 Paper Feed, Enable/Disable, 236 Paper Low Sensor, 236 Paper Motion, 82 Paper Out Sensor, disable, 161 Paper Out Sensor, enabling, 161 Paper Out Status, Inquire, 173 Paper Sensor Commands, 203 Paper Sensors, Selecting to Stop Printing, 165, 203 Parallel Interface Connector, 42 Parallel port timing, 304 PcOS Control Codes, 75 Graphic Data, Processing, 127 Graphic Mode, Reassigning, 124 Graphic mode, Set Horizontal, 128 Graphic save, 129 Graphics all-points-addressable (APA), 244 Character, 241 color, 127 horizontal, 127 Horizontal, 244 printing, 241 GS - <0> x y d1…d(x x y x 8)Define userdefined bit image, 231 GS ! Set character size, 201 GS # Insert Euro character, 198 GS * x y d1 … d(x x y x 8) Define single user-defined bit-image, 234 GS / Print single user-defined bit-image, 235 GS ^ r t m Execute macro, 230 GS _ Delete start-up macro definition, 231 GS 0 <0> Print user-defined bit image, 233 GS 1 <0> Erase single entry from nonvolatile memory, 233 GS 3 Query nonvolatile memory pool information, 235 GS 5 Erase all entries from nonvolatile memory pool, 233 GS 6 <0> Save user-defined character set, 235 GS 7 <0> Select user-defined character set, 235 GS f Select font for HRI characters, 222 GS H Select printing position of HRI characters, 221 GS h Set bar code height, 221 GS k
              NUL Print bar code, 220 GS L Set left margin, 207 GS w Set bar code width, 222 GS W Set printing area width, 207 Home, Returning, 208 Horizontal Motion Control, 83 Horizontal Position, Setting, 84 Horizontal Tab, 83 Horizontal Tab Positions, Setting, 207 Horizontal tab Stops, Setting, 83 Horizontal Tab, Setting, 206 IEEE 1284 buffer, Clearing, 173 Indicator Lights, 56 Indicators Fault, 56 Initialize maintenance counter, 228 Initialize the Printer, 163, 224 Ink Cartridges Ordering, 341 Inquire Commands, 172 Installing Cables, 41 Installing New Interface Cards, 40 Installing Paper, 43 Intercharacter Spacing, Setting, 95 International Character Set, Selecting, 101, 102, 195, 270, 271, 272, 276, 277, 278, 279, 283, 284, 285, 286, 287, 288 Page 346 Rev C 28-07764 iTherm® 280 Programmer’s Guide Index PcOS Quick Reference Chart, 76 Peripheral Devise Status, Selecting, 226 Plug and Play parallel, 307 Serial, 313 Power Control, Remote, 169, 316 Power Cycle Status, Inquire, 174 Power-cycle recovery, 318 Print and Carriage Return, 191 Print and Feed Lines, 191 Print and Feed Paper, 192 Print and Line Feed, 191 Print and Reverse Feed Lines, 191, 192 Print Buffer Flow, 311 Print Buffer Size, 313 Print buffer, control, 162 Print buffers, 299 Print counter, 228 Print Current Configuration, 294 Print Current totals, 294 Print margins, setting, 161 Print Modes, Selecting, 199 Print Position Commands, 205 Print Quality Mode, Setting, 96 Print Style, Setting, 109 Print Supress/Data Pass Through, Enabling, 166 Printer Care, 55 Printer ID, Inquire, 177 Printer Reset, Requesting, 173 Printer State, Inquire, 175 Printer Status, 171 Printer Status, Inquire, 172, 176 Process User Macro, 138 Programmer’s Notes, 321 Programming Considerations, 137 Quad Density Graphics, Printing, 124 Query marker, 162 Read and return Totals, 291 Real Time Status, Transmitting, 213 real-time Request to Printer, 227 Recovery form Mechanical Errors, 320 Regulatory Compliance, 2 Remote Power Control, 169, 316 Remote Reset, 317 Removing Old Interface Cards, 39, 40 Rotated Font, Beginning, 97 Select Character Font Table, 194 Select Color, 107 Select Subscript, 111 Select Superscript, 111 Self-Test Using, 58 Serial Device Identification, 314 Serial Interface Communication, 31 Serial Interface Connector, 42 28-07764 Serial port flow control, 309 Serial Port Inquire, 315 Signal Levels, 30 Single Density Graphics, Printing, 123 Specifications and Requirements, 21 Standard APA Graphics, 123 Standard Emulation, 74 Start up Macro, Flagging, 131 Status Commands, 210 Status Inquire, 171 Status, Inquire Receipt Paper Low, 172 Superscript and Subscript, 111 Supplies Ink Cartridges, 341 Ordering Cables, 341 Ordering Paper, 341 Tab Stops, Resetting, 84, 88 Testing the Printer, 58 TM T90 and EPOS Command Descriptions, 191 TM-90 Command Summary, 183 Top of Form, Setting, 89 Transmit Printer ID, 224 Transmit Status, 212 Transmits maintenance counter, 229 Turns smoothing on/off, 201 Underline Mode, On/Off, 199 Underline, Beginning, 108, 110 Unidirectional Printing, Beginning, 125 Upside down Print Mode, On/Off, 200 USB Interface Connector, 43 User Defined Character Set, Selecting, 193 User Defined Character, Saving, 131, 133 User Defined Characters, Canceling, 106, 194 User Defined Characters, Defining, 105, 131, 194 User Defined Characters, Enabling, 106 User macros, 137 User store, 129 User Store Status, Inquire, 179 User Store, Delete item, 134, 135 User Store, Flush Information, 132, 135 User Store, Load item, 134 User Store, Loading item, 131 User Store, Removing Item, 131 User Store, Report, 136 User Store, Reporting, 132 User-Defined Memory Commands, 231 Using Configuration Mode, 66 Using DSR, 313 Verify Cash Drawer Interface, 40 Vertical Tab, 88 Vertical Tab Stops, Setting, 88 Rev C Page 347

Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.2
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 349
Creator                         : 28-07765C M280i Programmers Guide.doc [Compatibility Mode] - Microsoft Word
Create Date                     : 2009:04:21 10:03:08
Title                           : 28-07765C M280i Programmers Guide.doc
Author                          : quaifr
Producer                        : Acrobat PDFWriter 5.0 for Windows NT
EXIF Metadata provided by
EXIF.tools

Navigation menu